JACK-UP Specification.pdf

FRIEDE AND GOLDMAN LTD JU-2000E Jack-Up Drilling Unit

JU-2000E CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

Based on 032-11 Rev C 140 Complement

Rev 0


DOCUMENT REVISION HISTORY Revision A 0

Description

By

Initial Issue, 140 POB, 907 mt. hook load Revised based on client comments


Rev 0

BW/RS F&G

Date Nov, 2011 Feb, 2012


Table of Contents Section 1.0

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS

2.0

STEEL STRUCTURES

3.0

HULL FITTINGS

4.0

INSULATION, JOINER WORK AND DECK COVERING

5.0

FURNISHINGS

6.0

LEGS, STRUCTURE, SUPPORTS, JACKS AND HANDLING

7.0

SAFETY EQUIPMENT

8.0

PAINTING AND MARKING

9.0

DECK MACHINERY

10.0

HAVC SYSTEMS

11.0

REFRIGERATION

12.0

MAIN AND AUXILIARY MACHINERY

13.0

REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPIG SYSTEMS

14.0

PIPING SYSTEMS

15.0

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16.0

TRIALS AND TESTS

17.0

DRILLING SYSTEMS

18.0

EQUIPMENT LIST


Rev 0

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1.0 –GENERAL PROVISIONS......................................................................................................................2 1.1

INTENT OF DOCUMENTS ...................................................................................................................2

1.2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................................2

1.3

DEFINITIONS.........................................................................................................................................2

1.4

CLASSIFICATION, RULES, REGULATIONS AND CERTIFICATES.............................................3

1.5

PERFORMANCE CRITERIA AND DESIGN CONDITIONS .............................................................5

1.6

STABILITY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................9

1.7

MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP .................................................................................................9

1.8

CONTRACT PLANS ..............................................................................................................................9

1.9

BUILDER’S DRAWINGS ....................................................................................................................11

1.10

DRAWING APPROVAL ......................................................................................................................11

1.11

“AS BUILT” DRAWINGS...................................................................................................................12

1.12

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ...........................................................................12

1.13

PROGRESS SCHEDULE .....................................................................................................................13

1.14

WEIGHT AND CENTER OF GRAVITY ............................................................................................13

1.15

PHOTOGRAPHS ..................................................................................................................................14

1.16

INSPECTION ........................................................................................................................................14

1.17

SOURCE OF EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................14

1.18

SUBSTITUTIONS ................................................................................................................................15

1.19

TRIALS, TESTING AND CLEANING ...............................................................................................16

1.20

SPECIFICATION AND PLAN OWNERSHIP ....................................................................................16

1.21

OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT (OFE) .....................................................................................16

1.22

CONSTRUCTION PORTFOLIO .........................................................................................................16

1.22

NOISE AND VIBRATION ...................................................................................................................17


SECTION 1.0 –GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1

INTENT OF DOCUMENTS

It is the intent of this Specification, its Appendices, and the Contract Plans referenced below to provide for the construction and delivery to the Owner of a completely outfitted and equipped Self-Elevating Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit (hereinafter referred to as “Vessel”). The Vessel is to be constructed, outfitted and furnished to meet the most current requirements of the American Bureau of Shipping (ABS), IMO MODU Code (2001) including all amendments, and other such specific requirements as are set out in this Specification, the Contract and the Contract Plans. The Contract shall include the Builder’s labor, supply and installation of all materials, machinery, equipment, furnishing, and fittings, as specified herein, and as required to deliver a complete and fully operational Drilling Rig, able to drill in water depths up to 121.9 m. (400 ft.) and a drilling depth down to 35,000 ft. (10,668 m.) with 5 ½" drill pipe under the conditions and limit as defined in the Specifications. The only equipment or materials not to be supplied by the Builder are those items specifically identified as Owner Furnished Equipment (OFE) in Section 18. The Builder shall be responsible for the storage, preservation and installation of all OFE. Upon delivery, the Vessel including all material and equipment furnished by Builder and Owner shall be complete, and all its parts, systems, and appurtenances shall be proven by appropriate commissioning tests and trials to be thoroughly workable as specified herein.

1.2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Vessel consists of a modified triangular hull with three (3) triangular truss work legs, each fitted with a spud can at its lower end. The modified triangular hull is 70.4 meters (231 ft.) long, approximately 76.0 meters (249 ft.) wide, and 9.5 meter (31 ft.) deep. The three legs are spaced with the forward leg on the centerline of the Vessel, and the two aft legs 45.7 meters (150 ft.) aft of the forward leg and 23.8 meters (78.0 ft.) outboard of the Vessel centerline. The spud cans, which form the lower segments of the legs, are circular with an outside diameter of 18 meters (59 ft.). The total leg length, including the spud can, is 167 meters (547 ft.). The multi-level accommodations provides spaces for catering, housekeeping, hospital, offices, and recreational facilities for a crew complement of 140 persons in a combination of one and two man staterooms, generally as shown in the Contract Drawings. The heliport is mounted on the bow of the Vessel on the Vessel’s longitudinal centerline. The accommodations also house the helicopter waiting room, radio room, jacking control room and an emergency generator house. The drill floor is located on the substructure above the cantilever. The cantilever is capable of being skidded fore and aft, and the drill floor on its substructure can be skidded on the cantilever port and starboard of the Vessel centerline. The cantilever and drill floor shall be outfitted with sufficient lengths of continuous (no breaks) electrical (power, control, communication, etc.) service cables. The cables shall be run from point to point without use of intermediate terminal boxes except where required by the design of the equipment or devices being served. Accommodation for movement or translation between structures shall be handled by drag chains at the main deck/cantilever and at cantilever/drill floor interfaces so that the centerline of rotary can be skidded 22.8 meters (75 ft.) aft of the transom and 4.6 meters (15 ft.) either port or starboard. Similarly, where service hoses are used as a catenary, adequate hose connections (main deck / cantilever) shall be provided to accommodate the full range of cantilever skidding. Drill floor translation shall be accommodated without the use of multiple terminals.

1.3

DEFINITIONS

When the term "Owner" is used herein, it shall be understood to mean (TBD) or its nominee. Where the term "Resident Inspector" or "Inspector" or "Owner's Representative" is used, it shall be understood to be any person or member of any organization designated by the Owner for that particular duty. Where the term "Builder" or "Contractor" is used, it shall be understood to mean the shipyard awarded the construction contract for this vessel.

Friede & Goldman, Ltd., Houston, TX USA

Rev. 0

2


When the term “Designer” is used, it shall be understood to mean Friede & Goldman, Ltd. Where the term "Regulatory Agencies," "Regulatory Requirements," or "Regulatory Bodies" is used, it shall be understood to be the requirements of all Government Agencies or statutory regulations relative to the construction of the Vessel as defined in sub paragraph 1.1 above or 1.4 below. Where the term "Vessel", “Drilling Rig” or "Unit" is used, it shall be understood to be the Self Elevating Drilling Vessel, the construction of which is covered by the Contract, Contract Plans and this Specification. Where the terms "Provided," "Furnish" or "Install" are used, it shall be understood that the Builder shall provide, at his expense, any labor, material and equipment (hereinafter referred to as Builder Furnished Equipment or BFE) and any installation materials required for the complete construction and outfitting of the Vessel including that necessary for installation, commissioning, and testing of items listed in Section 18 which will be supplied by the Owner as Owner Furnished Equipment (hereinafter referred to as Owner Furnished Equipment or OFE). The Builder shall install all the referenced material and/or equipment (OFE and BFE) according to equipment manufacturer’s requirements at the Builder's expense, and to the complete satisfaction of the Classification Society, Regulatory Bodies as applicable, and the Owner. "Classification Society" - The term Classification Society shall be the American Bureau of Shipping (ABS). “Contract Plans”, “Contract Drawings” or “Drawings”- The term Contract Plans shall be those plans or Drawings listed in Section 1.8. Flag country: TBD It is Owner’s responsibility to make application; documents approval and certificate obtain to flag country regulatory bodies based on Vessel technical condition with assistance of Builder. In the case of design changes due to requirement of flag country regulatory bodies, such changes shall be made subject to the mutual agreement in writing under Contract.

1.4

CLASSIFICATION, RULES, REGULATIONS AND CERTIFICATES

The Vessel, with its equipment, shall be built under special survey of the Classification Society to the highest classification for Vessels of this type of Self-Elevating Drilling Vessel. All items required by the Classification Society and other Regulatory Bodies (including latest changes, amendments and published revisions) in effect as of the date of the Contract, shall be Builder's responsibility. All changes or revisions required by the Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies as a direct result of rule changes put into effect after the date of the Contract shall be for Owner's account. The Vessel as delivered, shall comply with the applicable regulatory requirements as follows: American Bureau of Shipping “Rules for Building and Classing Mobile Offshore Drilling Units (2012)” including load line assignment, cargo gear, Certification of Drilling Systems (CDS) and distinguished in Record by Maltese Cross Symbols A1 Self-Elevating Drilling Unit ABS Rules for Building and Classing Mobile Offshore Drilling Units (2012) ABS Steel Vessel Rules (2001, reprint 2006) International Convention on Load lines 1966 Regulation, with 1988 protocol. International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL consolidated edition 2006), and as amended. (Single point discharge collection and treatment) International Convention on Tonnage Measurement 1969. International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea – Consolidated edition, 2009 (SOLAS) including all amendments


Rev. 0

3

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C International Regulations For Preventing Collisions At Sea, 1972, consolidated edition 2003 (COLREG) IMO international convention on the control of harmful anti-fouling systems on ships, adopted Oct. 2001, into force Sept. 2008 IMO Code for Construction and Equipment of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units, 2009. (Resolution A.1023). IEC publication 61892, part 1 through 7. Mobile and fixed offshore units – Electrical installations International Tele-Communication and Radio Regulations Convention (1974 and 1982) USCG regulations for foreign flagged vessels; CFR 155, CFR 159, CFR 164 UK Civil Aviation Authority, CAP 437 (for heliport design) 6th edition, April 2010. WHO / US department of health and human services, CDC, Vessel sanitation program, construction guidelines ILO, 92 and 133, Accommodation of crews convention, as applied to MODU’s by the Flag State IMO FSS (Fire Safety Systems) code (2007 edition) IMO resolution A.468 (XII) Codes of noise levels on board ships ABS Guide for Certification of Cranes and lifting appliances 2007. IMO LSA (Life-Saving Appliances) Code (2010 Edition) The Builder shall obtain and deliver all necessary certificates and/or documents, except for those which apply to OFE, covering the approval and indicating compliance with the above regulations, including cargo gear certificates and admeasurement documents. The Builder shall also furnish a Master Carpenter's Certificate, a Classification Certificate, a Builder’s Certificate, a Load Line Certificate, an IMO Certificate, and a Certificate of Inspection (issued by the Flag State), all to be delivered to the Owner. An official number shall be obtained by the Owner and marked on Vessel by Builder as directed. In addition, the Vessel shall be designed and built to meet the following:

1)

Electrical Cable: Cables are to be selected according to IEC 331, 332-3 CAT A and ABS requirements. All cables are to be approved by the Classification Society.

2)

A60 Windows as shown on the Contract Plans and as required by the Regulatory Bodies shall comply with ABS requirements and are to be approved by the Classification Society.

3)

Ambient Temperature for Motors: Motors shall comply with ABS requirements.

4)

IP Model Code of Safe Practice, Part 15 - Area Classification Code for Petroleum Installations

5)

API RP500B Recommended Practice for Classification of Areas for Electrical Installations at Drilling Rigs and production Facilities on Land and On Marine Fixed and Mobile Platforms

6)

Blowout Prevention Equipment and Systems •

Blowout Preventers: API-RP53 API 16A NACE MR01-75 Hi-Temp Service

•

Choke & Kill Manifold, Piping, and Auto Chokes API 6A API 16C API RP-53 NACE MR01-75


Rev. 0

4

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C PSL-03 Hi-Temp Service •

Diverter API-RP-64 NACE MR01-75

•

BOP Controls API 16D API 16E API 53

7)

AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel (latest revision)

8)

AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel For Buildings

9)

International Association of Classification Societies (IACS) “Recommendation No. 47 (5 Oct 2010) – Part A – Shipbuilding and Repair Quality Standard for New Construction”

10)

ANSI B31.3 - Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping (latest edition)

11)

IP Code of Practice Part 1 Electrical

12)

IP Code of Practice Part 8 Drilling and Production Safety Code for Offshore Operations

13)

ASTM – American Society of Testing of Materials

14)

AISE – Association of Iron and Steel Engineers

15)

SNAME T&R 5-5A

16)

NACE – National Association of Corrosion Engineers

17)

All calculations for cooling and heating shall be in accordance with the applicable sections of SNAME technical and research bulletins 4-7 and 4-16, ISO 7547 (accommodations), ISO 8861 (engine rooms), ISO 8862 (control rooms) and ASHRAE standards including, but not limited to, standards 26, 55, and 62.

18)

ABS Guide for Crew Habitability on Offshore Installations (with regards to noise and vibration only – does not apply to room size requirements)

All fees incidental to the foregoing inspections, certificates, etc., shall be paid by the Builder except for those required for OFE. Owner shall be responsible for registering the Unit with the Flag authorities, at his expense, at least 60 days prior to the Contractual delivery date. An official number shall be obtained by the Owner and marked on vessel by Builder.

1.5

PERFORMANCE CRITERIA AND DESIGN CONDITIONS

Definitions Fixed Loads: Consist of the following, all of which are permanently attached and form part of the drilling Vessel: quarters, heliport, substructure, cranes, winches, engines, generators, pump, electrical equipment, electrical cables, drilling machinery, cementing unit, well logging unit, foundations, piping, rigging, all fluids in equipment at normal operating levels, etc. Movable (fixed) Loads: Consist of the Cantilever, Drill Floor and their fixed machinery, and equipment (i.e. mud return tanks, cement package, shale shakers, mud process machinery, drawworks house, drilling machinery,


Rev. 0

5

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C pump(s), electrical equipment, electrical cables, derrick, piping, rigging, all fluids in equipment at normal operating levels, etc.). Variable Loads: Consist of the following items which are readily removable, shifted, or consumed during the drilling operations: bulk mud, bulk chemicals, bulk cement, liquid mud, liquid cement, casing, drill pipe, drill collar(s), drill water, diesel oil, lube oil, crew, crew supplies, potable water, setback load, conductor tensioner load, mud logging unit, BOP’s, well test equipment, skimmer tank contents, well logging unit, etc. Also includes Substructure Drilling Loads, consisting of Hook or rotary loads, setback load, and conductor tensioner load. General Operating Conditions: Temperature Minimum Maximum Relative Humidity Minimum Maximum Sea water temperature: Minimum Maximum

-20 °C 45 °C 30 % 90 % -2 °C 35 °C

Design Operating Conditions1 Water Depth (meters) Maximum Wave Height (meters) Corresponding Wave Period (sec) Maximum Wind Velocity (m/s - one min. avg.) Surface Current (m/s) Air Gap (meters) Penetration (meters) Variable Load (mt.) Minimum Design Temperature

100 22.0 15.5 36 0.51 19.8 3 3,766 -20° C

107 20.7 14.7 36 1.03 15.2 3 3,766 -20° C

122 17.1 14.5 36 0.77 12.2 3 3,766 -20° C

Design Storm Survival Conditions1 Water Depth (meters) Maximum Wave Height (meters) Corresponding Wave Period (sec) Maximum Wind Velocity (m/s - one min. avg.) Surface Current (m/s) Air Gap (meters) Penetration (meters)

100 22.0 15.5 44.8 0.51 19.8 3

107 17.4 15.5 51.4 1.03 15.2

122 13.4 14.1 51.4 0.77 12.2

3

3

Variable Load (mt.)

2,995

2,995

2,995

Minimum Design Temperature

-20° C

-20° C

-20° C

1

These ratings based on: ABS-approved calculation methodology Leg length: 167 meters Cantilever position: CL rotary 22.8 meters aft of transom Conductor (915 mm dia) included No marine growth P-delta and dynamic amplification per ABS

Hull Design Loads


Rev. 0

6


- Maximum Combined Variable (subject to location, water depth, environmental conditions, stability nomograms)

6,488 mt. (14,300 kips)

Drillfloor/Cantilever Load Maximum Combined Total - Consisting of any proportion of the following: Hook Rotary Set Back Conductor Tensioner Skimmer Tank Load

1180 mt. (2600 kips)

Maximum Combined Load when Cantilever Skidding

907 mt. (2000 kips) 907 mt. (2000 kips) 431 mt. (950 kips) 408 mt. (900 kips) 58 mt. (127 kips) 431 mt. Setback + 508 mt. Cantilever Pipe Rack

Cantilever Pipe Rack Load Total Maximum Preload Spud Can Reaction

508 mt. 10,662 mt.

Deck Design Loads 2.64 mt./m2 2.08 mt./m2 2.64 mt./m2 1.32 mt./m2 1.95 mt./m2 22.5 mt./m2 0.46 mt./m2 0.73 mt./m2 10.25 mt./m2 1.32 mt./m2 2.64 mt./m2 1.47 mt./m2

Main Deck (Inside Pipe Rack) Main Deck (Outside Pipe Rack) Cantilever Deck (Inside Pipe Rack) Cantilever Deck (Outside Pipe Rack) Drill Floor (Working Areas) (Setback Areas) Quarters' Deck House Tops Mud Pits Machinery Spaces Sack Stores Sloping Deck over BOP Storage

Cantilever Design Loads Rotary Position

On Centerline

4.57m Off CL P/S

22.86 m Aft of Transom

1230 mt.

500 mt.


1360 mt.

590 mt.


1360 mt.

1360 mt.

The above design cantilever loads are the sum of the following individual loads: a)

Setback load

b) Rotary load c)

Hook load

d) Conductor Tensioner load The above design loads are based on the following data (any changes to weights and centers may affect the load chart):


Rev. 0

7

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C Item

Weight (mt.)

Drill Floor Cantilever/Substructure Setback Cantilever Pipe Rack

LCG (m fwd. of rotary centerline) 0.1 15.82 -

960 1867 0 0

TCG (m stbd rotary centerline) 0.42 0.07 -

Cantilever Design Loads also include Well Control Load of 64 mt., Mud Return Load of 73 mt., & Miscellaneous Loads of 50 mt. Note: 1 tonne = 1 mt. Cantilever and Drill floor weights are inclusive of structure, paint, outfitting and equipment, as listed elsewhere in this Specification and include mud logging unit, cementing unit and future centrifuge units and pumps. During design development these weights shall be carefully monitored, and should these weights vary appreciably, the designer is to be promptly notified by the Builder. Operating Capacities To be confirmed by the capacity calculations.

Tank Diesel Fuel Drill Water Fresh Water Ballast or Preload Bulk Mud and/or Cement Sack Stores Active & Reserve Mud Pits

Total Capacity 4151 9874 3428 84161 17657 5000 4729

Units bbls bbls bbls bbls Ft3 Sacks bbls

752 m³ 23.8 m³ 213 m³ 84 m³ 213 m³ 10.0 m³ 3.0 m³ 20 m³

Slugging Pit Brine Return Pits, Sand Trap, treatment tanks Base Oil Trip Tank (2) Stripping Tank Skimmer Tank

150 1340 528 1340 63 19 126

bbls bbls bbls bbls bbls bbls bbls

Pipe Rack - Cantilever Pipe Rack – Main Deck

453 241

m² m²

660 m³ 1570 m³ 545 m³ 13,382 m³ 500 m³

Design Towing Conditions 1.

Wet Tow Field Transit Allowable Motion

6 degrees single amplitude roll or pitch at the natural period of the unit, plus 120% of the gravity load at that angle of inclination. Fully Retracted – 167 meters

Leg Length 2.

Wet Tow Ocean Transit Allowable Motion

15 degrees single amplitude roll or pitch at a 10 second period, plus 120% of the gravity moment caused by the angle of inclination of the legs (ABS) Fully Retracted – 130.5 meters

Leg Length 3.

Dry Tow Leg Length 167 meters It is to be confirmed that the structure of the Vessel is designed for dry tow with proper sea fastening.


Rev. 0

8


1.6

STABILITY REQUIREMENTS

The Builder shall prepare and obtain Classification Society approval of the stability calculations. The stability calculations shall be based on the Vessel as delivered and verified by the inclining test of the Vessel. Stability calculations shall be included in the Operations Manual covering the operating conditions of the Vessel as specified in sub-paragraph 1.14 of this Section of the Specification. The location of air escapes, ventilation openings, hatches, and personnel accesses shall be as shown on the Contract Plans.

1.7

MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

All material, machinery and equipment furnished by the Builder shall be new and of a grade suitable for the service intended, and approved by Classification Society and the Owner.

1.8

CONTRACT PLANS

All of the Drawings listed below ‘Contract Drawing List’ are incorporated into and form an integral part of this Specification and are hereafter referred to as "Contract Plans”, “Drawings” or “Contract Drawings”. In the event there are conflicts or inconsistencies between the Specification and the Contract Plans, the Specification will prevail. In any event, if the Builder discovers a conflict or an inconsistency between the Specification and any of the Contract Plans, he shall bring such conflict or inconsistency to the attention of the Owner who shall promptly provide the Builder with a resolution. Under no circumstances shall such resolution cause the Builder to request a change order unless the resolution clearly exceeds the intent of the Specification. The Specification calls for compliance with Classification Society and other Regulatory Body requirements as defined in paragraph 1.4. Builder shall modify and supplement the Contract Plans as necessary to meet the full requirement of paragraph 1.4 and shall build the Vessel according to such modified and supplemented drawings. If Contractor determines that there is a better or simpler way of building any part of the Vessel in a way that does not affect the performance of the Vessel or its compliance with any of the regulatory bodies, Contractor shall be permitted to redesign such part of the rig to provide a better or simpler arrangement, as long as the redesign is approved by the Designer and the Owner and it meets all Regulatory Body and Classification Society requirements and does not result in a lightship weight increase. All sizes, dimensions, quantities and descriptions shown on the Contract Plans are given for the purpose of guiding the Builder in developing the detail design and working drawings. The Builder shall develop his own measurements and shall not scale from the Contract Plans. However, no departure from principal characteristics, basic arrangements and major dimensions will be allowed. While it is recognized that exact adherence to structural arrangements, machinery layout, etc., is not always fully possible in progressing from the Contract Plans to the detailed design and working drawings, any deviations made by the Builder shall be kept to an absolute minimum and be subject to the Owner's prior written approval. Deviations permitted for the Builder's convenience shall be considered a development of the Contract Plans and Specifications, and not as a basis of "change orders" or "extra work". All such changes or deviations including weight increase or decrease shall be noted in written form accompanying the submittal of the working plan for Owner's approval. The Contract Plans which form a part of these Specifications are as follows: Project Documentation Document No.

Title

SP-7811-001 WE-7811-001

Construction Specification Preconstruction Weight Estimate

Arrangement Drawings Document No.

Title

7811-J-001

General Arrangement - Outboard Profile


Rev. 0

9

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C 7811-J-010 7811-J-011 7811-J-012 7811-J-013-1 7811-J-013-2 7811-J-014 7811-J-015 7811-J-016 7811-J-020 7811-J-030 7811-J-034 7811-J-035 7811-J-040 7811-J-041 7811-J-042 7811-J-092 7811-J-093 7811-J-099 7811-J-600

Inner Bottom Tank Arrangement General Arrangement - Machinery Deck 1830 ABL General Arrangement - Machinery Deck 5640 ABL General Arrangement - Top Deck Plan General Arrangement - Main Deck General Arrangement - Drill Floor and Cantilever Beam Pipe Rack General Arrangement - Cantilever Beam Cellar Deck and Mud Processing Area Primary Structure Plan General Arrangement Quarters Lines Plan Cathodic Protection Arrangement Load line Mark & Draft Plan Capacity and Deck Load Plan External Watertight Integrity Plan Internal Watertight Integrity Plan Leg and Jack Tower Tolerance Plan Cantilever Beam Tolerance Plan F&G Standard Symbols and Drawing Aids Jacking Foundation & Rack Chock Arrangement

Global Scantling Drawings Document No.

Title

7811-J-100-1 7811-J-100-2 7811-J-100-3 7811-J-100-4 7811-J-101-1 7811-J-101-2 7811-J-101-3 7811-J-102 7811-J-103 7811-J-104 7811-J-105 7811-J-106 7811-J-120 7811-J-121 7811-J-122 7811-J-123 7811-J-130 7811-J-131 7811-J-151 7811-J-152 7811-J-620 7811-J-621

Scantling Plan - Main Deck Scantling Plan - 5640 Flat Scantling Plan - Inner Bottom Scantling Plan - Bottom Plating Scantling Plan - Transverse Sections - Frames 2A to 10A Scantling Plan - Transverse Sections - Frames 11 to 22 Scantling Plan - Transverse Sections - Frames 13 to 28, 30, 31 & Side Shell Scantling Plan - Longitudinal Bulkheads Scantling Plan - Longitudinal Girders Scantling Plan - Leg Well Modules Framing Below the Jack Foundation and Lower Guide Dry Tow Strong Boxes Leg Structure Spudcan Structure Racks for JU-2000E Rack Chord Detail Scantling Plan - Superstructure Structural Plan - Heliport Jack Foundation Bracing Pump Tower and Leg Jetting Piping Jackcase Foundation Structure and Details Jackcase Foundation Machining and Miscellaneous Details

Equipment Dependent Drawings Document No.

Title

7811-J-140 7811-J-141 7811-J-142 7811-J-143 7811-J-150-1 7811-J-150-2 7811-J-150-3 7811-J-156

Scantling Plan - Substructure and Cantilever Beams Drill Floor Structure Cantilever Support, Guides and Securing Arrangement Cantilever Bearing Plates Crane Foundation - Crane 2 & Details (Stbd Fwd. Crane) Crane Foundation - Crane 1 & Details (Port Aft Crane) Crane Foundation - Crane 3 & Details (Stbd Aft Crane) Conductor Tensioner Platform

Piping Flow Diagrams


Rev. 0

10


Document No.

Title

7811-J-201 7811-J-202 7811-J-203 7811-J-204 7811-J-210 7811-J-212 7811-J-213 7811-J-220 7811-J-222 7811-J-230 7811-J-231 7811-J-240 7811-J-241 7811-J-260 7811-J-261 7811-J-262 7811-J-265 7811-J-282

Piping Diagram Preload Supply & Dumps Piping Diagram Bilge and Stripping System Piping Diagram Jetting System Piping Diagram Salt Water Service Piping Diagram Main Engines Piping Diagram Brake Cooling System Piping Diagram Fire Fighting System Piping Diagram Fresh Water & Potable Water System Piping Diagram Drill Water System Piping Diagram Diesel Oil System Piping Diagram Lube Oil & Dirty Oil System Piping Diagram Compressed Air System Piping Diagram Bulk, Barite, Gel & Cement System Piping Diagram High Pressure Mud & Cement System Piping Diagram Low Pressure Mud System Piping Diagram Low Pressure Mud Processing System Piping Diagram Brine & Base Oil System Piping Diagram Single Point Discharge System

Electrical One-Line Diagrams Document No.

Title

7811-J-301 7811-J-302-1 7811-J-302-2 7811-J-303 7811-J-304 7811-J-305 7811-J-306 7811-J-307 7811-J-308 7811-J-309

One Line Diagram of Power System One Line Diagram of 480V Distribution (Main MCC 1) One Line Diagram of 480V Distribution (Main MCC 2) One Line Diagram of 480V Distribution (Drilling MCC's) One Line Diagram of 480V Distribution (Cantilever Drilling MCC's) One Line Diagram of 480V/400/230V Distribution (Emergency) One Line Diagram of 690V Distribution (Jacking MCC) One Line Diagram of 480V Distribution (Ventilation MCC's) One Line Diagram of 400/230V Distribution (Main) One Line Diagram of 400/230V Distribution (Galley Power Panels)

1.9

BUILDER’S DRAWINGS

During the detail engineering phase the Builder shall develop his own detailed measurements, prepare and provide all working and construction drawings, shop drawings, sketches and calculations for the approval of the Owner and Classification Society prior to the use of these drawings. The Builder shall also prepare and provide full composite layouts and / or isometric drawings (for machinery spaces and accommodation corridors), including piping, electrical cable ways, and ventilation ducts, for review and comment by the Owner. Approval of these drawings by the Owner or Classification Society does not relieve the Builder of his responsibility to provide a complete and operable Vessel in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications. If it is found, after approval of the drawings by the Owner or Classification Society, that a drawing is in error or is not in compliance with these Specifications, the Builder shall correct the drawing and make any changes to the Vessel required to ensure compliance with the Specifications at no additional cost to the Owner. It is to be clearly understood that the Contract Plans are not intended to show all details of the work to be performed. In particular the scantling plans, even when already approved by the Classification Society, do not purport to show all structure required for this design. The Builder shall have included in his Contract price the cost of such additional steel work as may be required by the Classification Society when working drawings are submitted for approval and for mutually agreed scantling increases which the Owner may request for Builder-developed structure not shown on the Contract Plans.

1.10

DRAWING APPROVAL


Rev. 0

11

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C The Builder shall provide the Owner, within thirty (30) days after the Contract date, a schedule of detailed working drawings to be submitted for approval. The schedule shall list for each drawing the proposed and actual submittal dates, approval dates and revision submittal and approval dates. The schedule shall be brought up to date quarterly and resubmitted to the Owner. The Builder shall submit six (6) copies of all drawings, sketches, diagrams, etc., and calculations developed by him to the Owner for approval. The Builder shall simultaneously submit to both Classification Societies as well as to other applicable Regulatory Bodies and agencies all documents required by these organizations to obtain the certifications listed in Section 1.4. The Builder is responsible for any modifications to the drawings or calculations required by the Classification Societies or Regulatory Bodies or agencies. The requested modifications shall be made in a timely manner and shall be resubmitted to all parties including the Owner for approval. The Owner shall normally approve the drawings within twenty (20) working days after receipt or the Owner shall advise the Builder of discrepancies, which would require revision and re-submittal. For drawings requiring urgent approval, Owner shall return within ten working days. Two (2) copies of all drawings submitted to and returned by the Classification Society will be issued by the Builder to the Owner within ten days of receipt.

1.11

“AS BUILT” DRAWINGS

Upon completion of the construction, the Builder shall provide the Owner and the Designer with one (1) set of AutoCAD *.dwg files on optical disk and one set of photocopy "as-built" working plans, including tank tables (in barrels, liters, metric tons, VCG, LCG, TCG, and longitudinal and transverse free surface moment as a function of actual sounding height in meters and millimeters), capacity plan, curves of form, stability booklet, all diagrams, and material traceability booklet (construction portfolio) The Designer shall receive one set of AutoCAD *.dwg files on optical disk and one set of all documentation provided to the Owner. The Builder shall further provide the following documentation: The hazardous area equipment registers using the format, supplied by the Owner. One picture for each equipment type shall be taken and filed as well as all certificates of the hazardous equipment shall be filed in one common folder according to a grid plan, which shall be added to the hazardous area drawings. The following studies and calculations shall be provided by the Builder: • Load analysis in transit, normal drilling, back reaming, emergency mode, including load cases for UPS and chargers. • Power system study dossier, including short circuit calculations, earth fault calculations, load flow, large motor inrush voltage drop, transformer inrush voltage drop, cable sizing and selection tables, total harmonic distortion and battery and cable sizing calculations.

1.12

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

The Builder shall furnish to Owner one copy in Microsoft Word on optical disk and six photocopies of all operation and maintenance manuals and parts lists for all BFE. The Builder shall furnish to the Designer one copy of all documentation furnished to the Owner. The operation and maintenance manuals shall include information describing; installation, operation, safety, maintenance, adjustment, wiring, and parts lists, with suitable illustrations and dimension drawings. The manual shall be formatted and organized according to Owner requirements. Builder shall obtain from each vendor of BFE a list of recommended spares for one year's service, compile these spares lists in a cross indexed booklet form and present them to the Owner for his subsequent use. This booklet shall be provided to the Owner at least ninety days prior to delivery of the Vessel and notification of any long delivery spares should be given as soon as possible during the construction of the Vessel. All information regarding the as-built condition of the vessel necessary for completion of the operating manual shall be submitted to the Owner in a timely manner. Schedule of submittal for this information shall be mutually agreed upon between the Builder and the Owner.


Rev. 0

12

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C A software register, identifying all installed support, operating and application software to be provided by the Builder. For each release of software installed in a system, a back-up and tools for upload/download of updates shall be provided by the Builder, together with upload/download instructions.

1.13

PROGRESS SCHEDULE

The Builder shall, within thirty days after execution of the Contract, prepare and furnish the Owner or his Representative a detailed key event production schedule in the form of a Gantt bar graph based on Microsoft Project software or another recognized planning program, such as Primavera showing planned construction progress of the Vessel. The Builder shall provide a progress report to Owner or his Representative two weeks after Contract execution. After approval of the production schedule by the Owner or the Representative within ten working days after receipt thereof, the production schedule (herein called the "Production Schedule") shall be the basis of interpretation of actual construction progress of the Vessel. This Production Schedule shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: •

The schedule shall as a minimum be of a level 3 type with sufficient detail to allow tracking of progress and determination of the critical path.

•

An erection sequence to show the order in which the construction of the Vessel shall take place. This Schedule shall be in a form detailing all major activities with time duration of each. The Schedule shall be prepared in sufficient detail to show all production items including the proposed start and finish dates for hull groups, machinery items, piping systems, electrical items and systems, ventilation and air conditioning systems, and joiner items.

•

The schedule shall indicate by milestones identified to be achieved during the construction. The schedule shall include planned issue dates for IDC, IFA, AFC and As Built. The final set of drawings shall be: “As Built and Commissioned”

•

A schedule of proposed plans: This schedule shall include all plans to be prepared by the Builder and his subcontractors.

•

A schedule of required dates for material, showing the dates on which all material items, including OFE, are required at the shipyard for fabrication, erection or installation.

•

A schedule of documentation submittal to Classification Society or Regulatory Bodies.

•

A schedule of documentation deliverables to Owner.

All tasks shall be appropriately linked according to their interdependence, and the Builder shall use the Tracking Gantt feature of the Microsoft Project software to indicate actual progress against planned activities and to identify the critical path for completion. Progress reports are to commence thirty (30) days following the date of the Contract signing through completion of the Vessel. These schedules shall be kept current with the progress of the Work, revised to show all changes, progress (percentage complete) and delays, and shall be submitted to the Owner weekly for his information and review. “Percentage complete” shall not be limited to an evaluation of the steel tonnage completed, but shall include evaluations of the status of items such as engineering and systems installation. As each item on the schedule is completed, it shall be so indicated. Dates of submittals and approvals shall be noted.

1.14

WEIGHT AND CENTER OF GRAVITY

Within ninety (90) calendar days after date of award, the Builder shall submit for approval by the Owner an independently prepared estimate of light ship weight and center of gravity. This estimate shall describe the weight and center of gravity of the Vessel in comprehensive detail and shall include summaries and work sheets showing detailed calculations.


Rev. 0

13

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C Within thirty days of the receipt of the Builder's estimate of the lightship weight and center of gravity, the Owner shall approve the estimate. Thereafter, the Builder shall be responsible for monitoring the weight and center of gravity characteristics adjusted for authorized departures from the construction contemplated in the approved estimate. Departures from the construction contemplated in the approved estimate, which affects the light ship weight, and center of gravity shall not be undertaken until the Builder has submitted to the Owner his estimate of the effect on weight and center of gravity of the Vessel, and obtained written approval to proceed with the departure. Departures, of which the total effect changes any weight group by less than 250 kg, may be considered negligible and will not require written approval with respect to weight. As an aid to weight, trim and stability control, the Builder shall submit quarterly to the Owner a tabulation of approved departures and their cumulative effect on weight and center of gravity of the approved light ship. In addition, in submitting plans for approval, where such plans involve departures from the type of construction contemplated in design drawings or the estimate, the Builder shall itemize such departures and their effect on light ship weight and center of gravity in his letter of transmittal. Where material substitutions are required, Builder shall submit the proposed substitutions to the Owner so that the optimum substitution can be chosen

1.15

PHOTOGRAPHS

During the construction of the Vessel, the Builder shall make approximately one hundred (100) photographs to identify progress of construction, and shall furnish the Owner with one set of these photographs. Upon completion of the finished Vessel, the Builder shall make approximately two hundred (200) photographs showing exterior and interior views as directed and furnish three prints each and the digital copies on optical disk (CD-ROM/DVD) to the Owner and Designer. Photographs shall only be taken by the Builder or the Owner. The public release of any photographs shall be approved by the Owner.

1.16

INSPECTION

The Vessel is to be built, equipped and delivered under the inspection and subject to the approval of the Owner, Classification Society and applicable Regulatory Bodies. The Builder shall have a quality control system and inspection force of his own to insure the quality of workmanship and materials at the yard and at his vendors’ plants as necessary. The construction project shall be administered on the basis of an ISO 9000 Quality Management System. Failure on the part of the Builder to provide these safeguards shall not later be the basis of a claim for delay in delivery if workmanship or design of a vendor is rejected by the Owner. Failure on the part of the Owner to identify substandard quality at a particular time does not relieve the Builder of its responsibility to correct this problem when it is discovered. Radiograph inspection shall also be provided in accordance with Section 2 of these Specifications. All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection by representatives of the Owner at any reasonable time during manufacture or construction and at any or all places where such work is carried on. The Owner or his representative shall have the authority to reject workmanship or material whenever found defective, not in conformity with good shipbuilding practice, or not in accordance with the requirements of the Plans and Specifications. The Builder and Owner will coordinate the scheduling of inspection personnel to minimize the disruption to both sides by giving a minimum of one working day's but not less than twenty-four hours, written notice prior to all inspections. The Builder shall furnish, without additional charge, all facilities, including air conditioned furnished offices, heat, light, telephones, drawing tables, stools, desks, chairs, filing cabinets, personal computers with e-mail connections, etc., as may be required for the resident project team. Long distance telephone calls, faxes and mailing costs, incurred by the project team will be paid for by the Owner. Access to yard and office shall be available twenty-four hours a day seven days a week.

1.17

SOURCE OF EQUIPMENT


Rev. 0

14

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C Unless specifically stated to the contrary in this Specification, the Builder shall furnish and install all necessary materials, machinery, equipment, appurtenances, etc., as specified herein for the construction of a complete Vessel. Any outfit or equipment which may be OFE for use on the Vessel, upon delivery to the shipyard’s by Owner at Builder's dock, or by truck to his warehouse, shall be stored and preserved until the time of installation by the Builder to prevent pilferage, breakage, weather damage, etc., and shall be insured against all risk, and shall be installed and/or delivered onboard prior to acceptance of the Vessel. Items of equipment, material and certified drawings to be furnished by the Owner will be delivered free to the Contractor's yard. The Builder shall receive, unload, handle, inspect, preserve and be responsible for all materials and articles furnished by the Owner under these Specifications, do all uncrating, cleaning necessitated by wear or exposure after delivery to the Builder, care for the material and store same in a suitable manner after Owner's inspection, including warehousing where usual, until such time as required by installation on board the Vessel. All OFE shall be segregated from any Builder or other Owner equipment and its location ID shelf, spare number identified. The OFE should then not be moved from this location without prior notice to, and approval by the Owner The Builder, upon delivery by Owner, shall inspect OFE and endeavor to determine that no shipping damage, shortages or obvious defects exist prior to the acceptance of such items. The Builder shall immediately notify the Owner in writing should any such damage or defect be found. Thereafter any damages, shortages shall be rectified/replaced at the builder’s cost. Copies of all material receiving sheets whether OFE or BFE, shall be transmitted to Owner's representative within twenty-four hours of receiving the material. Receiving sheet shall denote item, manufacturer, model, type, serial number, and other name plate data, including area where stored, and whether anti-condensation heaters have been installed where necessary. Copies shall be in triplicate. All OFE material must be of a usable quality suitable for the service intended and will be subject to inspection by the Builder. Material found to be unsuitable shall be rejected in writing. It shall be the responsibility of the Builder to provide suitable 3-conductor cords and plugs to meet regulations for grounding the portable electrical appliances and to suit the receptacles provided. Electrical/mechanical equipment shall be protected by use of heat lamps and/or supplying electrical source for equipment heaters according to manufacturer’s recommendations. The Builder shall then assemble, fit and install the items in their proper locations in a satisfactory manner, ready for use, and shall deliver them with the completed Vessel in a condition at least equal to that in which they were found at the time of the Owner's inspection approval. All work of installation, assembling, fitting, fastening, wiring, piping and all connections pertaining thereto shall be performed by the Builder as part of the Contract at no additional cost to the Owner. In the case of articles or materials supplied by the Owner, the Builder shall follow the manufacturer's installation instructions, unless they do not specifically apply to the installation, at which time the Builder shall notify the Owner who will furnish appropriate instructions. The Builder shall not be relieved of his responsibility in the event of faulty or incorrect installation and securing on the Vessel of such equipment or apparatus. Unless otherwise specified herein, the Owner will furnish all of the drilling and allied equipment, tools, hotel outfit (cutlery, napery, bedding and chinaware, etc.), radio, and communication equipment, etc., to the extent listed in Sections 17 and 18.

1.18

SUBSTITUTIONS

Where materials, fittings or equipment are specified herein by vendor or trade name, it is the intent that such product be furnished and installed by the Builder. Where the terms "or equal" or "similar to" are used herein in conjunction with such vendor or trade name, the Builder may propose articles substantially similar in design, quality and construction produced by reputable manufacturers other than those indicated, but such proposed substitutions shall be submitted to the Owner for written approval, with reasons for substitution and complete description and specification of the article. It shall be understood that any proposed substitution shall not be grounds for delay of delivery or increase of cost except where specifically stated in the proposal and as agreed thereupon in writing by the Owner. Owner's written decision regarding the acceptability or otherwise of any substitution shall be final, and such decision shall be given to Builder within ten days. Substitution will not be allowed among other reasons if, in the opinion of the Owner, spare parts for the proposed equipment are not readily available on an international basis.


Rev. 0

15


1.19

TRIALS, TESTING AND CLEANING

All in place trials and testing shall be in accordance with Section 16 herein. Cleaning and testing of all piping systems shall be in accordance and with the standards set forth in Section 13. The cleaning and chlorination of potable water tanks and system shall be in accordance with Regulatory Requirements. At time of delivery all tanks shall be empty, clean and free from all foreign material, except those tanks containing clean fuel, lube oil and fresh water.

1.20

SPECIFICATION AND PLAN OWNERSHIP

The Specifications and Contract Plans, which have been developed by the Designer are the Designer’s property. No alterations shall be made to any of the above listed Contract documents without the written consent of the Owner and Designer, except for alterations made according to the provisions of paragraph 1.8 of this Specification. The reuse of the design, Specifications, and the Contract Plans are subject to the express consent of their respective owners except as follows: In addition to any Classification Society requirements, the Builder shall provide the Owner with copies of the as-built plans for the Vessel as per paragraph 1.11 of this Specification, which the Owner may use as they see fit. Any further development of the Specifications by the Owner shall be their property. Likewise, any further development of the Construction Plans for this vessel shall be the property of the Builder. If either the Builder or the Owner provides any other party with all or any part of the design, Plans, or Specifications, they shall require such other party to treat the information contained therein as confidential.

1.21

OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT (OFE)

All material and equipment furnished by the Owner shall be to the extent as listed in Section 18.

1.22

CONSTRUCTION PORTFOLIO

A booklet of pertinent documentation shall be compiled by the Builder, reviewed and approved by the Classification Society (through Builder) and presented to the Owner upon delivery of the Vessel or as soon as possible thereafter. A sample booklet shall be prepared and submitted to the Owner along with a procedure for obtaining the documentation within ninety days of Contract date. The booklet shall contain the following: a)

Key plans showing locations and grades of steel material.

b) List of piping and fitting materials for all applications. c)

List of structural drawings.

d) Welding procedures, specifications for all materials, and procedure qualification records. e)

Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) Plan.

f)

NDT record of Vessel during construction.

g) Recommendation for repair procedures. h) Mill certificates on all high strength and special application materials with a record of where all such identified materials are to be found in the completed Vessel. i)

Full certification for all BFE equipment.

j)

Comprehensive list of all pad eyes and their capacities.

Those items of special steel, piping and fittings included in lists shall include trade names, ASTM (or equivalent) specifications, chemical composition, and physical properties, as well as any pertinent data, modifications, etc., that may be required when ordering replacement parts or materials.


Rev. 0

16


1.22

NOISE AND VIBRATION

Noise levels to comply with criteria as noted below. Area Workspaces Machinery spaces (continuously manned)** Machinery spaces (not continuously manned)** Machinery control rooms Workshops Non-specified work spaces ** Navigation spaces Navigating bridge and chartrooms Listening post, including navigating bridges* wings and windows Radio rooms (with radio eq. operating but not producing audio signals) Radar rooms Accommodation spaces Cabins and hospitals Mess rooms Recreation rooms Open recreation areas Offices Services spaces Galley, without food processing equipment Serveries and pantries Normally unoccupied spaces Spaces not specified **

dB (A) IMO

dB (A) ABS

90 110 75 85 90

85 108 65 80 80

65 70

55 55

60

55

65

55

60 65 65 75 65

50 55 60 65 60

75 75

70 70

90

108

*Reference is made to Resolution A. 343(IX) which also applies. **Ear protectors should be worn when the noise level is above 85 dB (A) The vibration levels shall comply with ISO/ABS


Rev. 0

17

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 2.0 - STEEL STRUCTURE .......................................................................................................... 2 2.1

CONSTRUCTION ......................................................................................................................... 2

2.2

HULL ............................................................................................................................................. 2

2.3

LEGS .............................................................................................................................................. 2

2.4

LEG GUIDE STRUCTURE ........................................................................................................... 2

2.5

SUPERSTRUCTURES AND HELIPORT .................................................................................... 3

2.6

DRILL FLOOR, SUBSTRUCTURE, AND CANTILEVER ......................................................... 4

2.7

BURNER BOOMS ......................................................................................................................... 6

2.8

BUILT-IN TANKS......................................................................................................................... 6

2.9

SEA CHEST ................................................................................................................................... 6

2.10

WELDING ..................................................................................................................................... 7

2.11

FOUNDATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 8

2.12

DERRICK....................................................................................................................................... 8


SECTION 2.0 - STEEL STRUCTURE 2.1

CONSTRUCTION

Workmanship shall be of good marine standard and meet the requirements of the Classification Society, the Regulatory Bodies and the Builder's standards. Plating shall be erected reasonably fair. Beams, frames, girders, etc., shall be installed fair and in proper alignment in accordance with regulatory and classification society standards listed in Section 1. Bulkheads and decks shall be erected reasonably fair to provide a good appearance and prevent the collection of water. Fairness shall generally be in accordance with regulatory and classification society standards listed in Section 1. Openings and doubler and insert plates shall have well-rounded corners with ample radii. During the outfitting of the Vessel, care shall be taken to keep the size and number of openings made in the structure for the passage of piping, wiring, ventilation ducts, etc., to a minimum. Where openings are required, they shall be carefully made, and the openings structurally reinforced where required according to construction standards developed by the Builder and approved by the Owner and Classification Society. Openings, permanent or temporary, in the primary structure shall be approved by the Owner and the Classification Society.

2.2

HULL

The hull material shall be as shown on the Contract Plans and selected for a Minimum Design Temperature (MDT) of -20˚C. Each tank required by the Classification Society to be hydrostatically tested shall be individually tested by an approved procedure (air and water) and proven tight. The configuration of the hull shall be constructed with a flat bottom profile. There shall be no bilge radius on the hull. All connections between the side shell and bottom plate will be by fabricated plate intersection (square corners). Adequate structure and/or reinforcement shall be provided in way of chocks, towing pads, and recessed strongboxes along the transom for dry transport sea fastening, etc., as required. The stern strong boxes, all combined, shall be designed to react a transverse load of 7,000 mt. and a longitudinal load of 5,000 mt. All structure shall be designed to be within the normal Classification Society and Regulatory Body stress levels, but in any event shall not have scantlings less than indicated on the Contract Plans, except where specifically approved by the Owner and Designer. Deck structure shall be designed for the deck loading specified in these Specifications and as shown on the Contract Plans. Concentrated loads such as foundations, depending on the framing method used, may require changes in the basic scantlings, in which case the changes shall be considered as a development of the design and not an extra. The crane foundation locations are shown on the Contract Plans. The Builder shall provide foundations for the specific cranes selected by Owner. Crane boom cradle supports with layered timber shall be provided by the Builder for each of the cranes and a means of securing the booms during transit. Centerline, port, and starboard main deck pipe rack structures will be provided for racking of drill pipe and/or casing. The details of the pipe racks shall be as shown on the Contract Plans. Easily removable pipe stanchions (with lifting attachments), and sockets shall be provided to subdivide the pipe rack into bays, and a tie-down system shall be provided for securing tubulars while afloat. All main deck pipe rack areas outside the envelope of the cantilever shall have permanent bulkheads at the forward end.

2.3

LEGS

Legs shall be as defined in the Contract Plans and Section 6 of these Specifications.

2.4

LEG GUIDE STRUCTURE

The leg guide structure shall be constructed as shown on the Contract Plans. The Builder shall align guides in the hull with those of the jack case to insure proper operation of the jacking system. The construction tolerances considered critical are as follows: Pinion/Rack - The placement of the guides should be such that a contact ratio in excess of one is obtainable at all positions of the chord within the guides or as approved by the Classification Society and Designer.


Rev. 0

2


The legs must be manufactured within a tolerance that allows free movement of the legs through the guides as positioned to satisfy the pinion/rack alignment described above. The Builder shall propose a procedure for both installing the jack houses and verifying pinion and guide placement that is to the satisfaction of the Owner, the Designer and the Classification Society.

2.5

SUPERSTRUCTURES AND HELIPORT

The forward superstructure houses all of the accommodation and shall have size, shape and scantlings as shown on the Contract Plans. Headers shall be provided below the main deck for carrying the above deck structures loads into the hull structure. A truss structure forward of the bow leg supports the helicopter deck and the lifeboat davits below the helideck. The helicopter platform shall be designed in accordance with Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies’ rules for a Sikorsky S-92 (gross weight of 12 mt.) or S-61N (gross weight of 9.3 mt). The edges of the deck around the heliport shall be fitted with a 1.52 m wide safety net consisting of chain link type, galvanized or PVC coated, wire fencing supported by a 32 mm galvanized pipe framework. The netting shall be securely lashed with stainless steel wire to the pipe frame to develop the strength of the netting and eliminate unsightly drooping of the netting (excluding the net across the flats). The hull shall be reinforced where the helicopter deck and lifeboat davit supports connect into the hull. The helicopter deck shall be equipped with a landing net suitably tensioned to meet CAP 437, IMO and Classification Society requirements. The helicopter deck shall be equipped with three equal distant placed exits, one of which exits from the outer edge of the deck, complete with vertical ladders and safety railings. Each exit is to have an adjacent manually operated foam monitor and a storage facility for emergency equipment. A periphery drain gutter system with at least three 100 mm (4”) diameter drain pipe shall be provided. Sufficient number of self-draining recessed helicopter tie down pads shall be provided. The helideck is to be completely liquid tight. The drainage collection manifold shall allow single point collection of fluids into a container or direct overboard discharge. The helideck height above main deck shall be such that all structure, deck plating, safety netting, life boats, and peripheral walkways and equipment will not dip into the sea under the maximum field move pitch / roll angle of the Vessel. This angle shall be to the satisfaction of the Classification Society. All superstructures shall be hose tested and proven tight as per Regulatory Body requirements.


Rev. 0

3


2.6

DRILL FLOOR, SUBSTRUCTURE, AND CANTILEVER

The drill floor, substructure and cantilever shall be provided generally as called for on the Contract Plans; however, the final arrangements shall be based on the drilling equipment selected by the Owner. The Builder shall verify all equipment dimensions and local loadings and determine whether or not they are within the allowable loads shown on the Contract Plans. The Builder shall bring to the Owner’s attention any major discrepancies. The Builder shall be responsible for monitoring the final weights, details and adequacy of the deck structure for drill floor / substructure / cantilever. The drill floor shall be moved athwartship on the substructure using a hydraulically operated lift and roll system and shall be capable of being positioned at any rotary well center location 4.6 m port or starboard of the hull centerline. Guides shall be provided to keep the drill floor properly positioned on the substructure transverse skid rails. Movable clamps shall ride with the drill floor to secure the drill floor to the substructure in any location. The cantilever shall slide fore and aft on the main deck using a hydraulically operated skidding system. The Cantilever shall be capable of being secured by the skidding system in any position. The forward cantilever hold down clamp and the stern roller support structure are to be designed and located so as to provide the maximum live drilling loads given in Section 1.5. The drill floor shall support the following and other BFE or OFE equipment, as listed in Sections 17 and 18 of the Specification, installed on the drill floor, including but not limited to the following: ITEM a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) p) q) r) s) t) u) v) w) x) y) z) aa) bb) cc)

Description Derrick Drawworks, including motors and brakes incl. ventilation and cooling. Rotary table Setback area Drawworks house and Wind Walls Dead line anchor Top Drive System Manifolds (C&K, Cement, Mud, Cement Wash down) Iron Roughneck Casing Roughneck SPHS Hydraulic Power Unit Mud Gas Separator Drillers House, including instrumentation and equipment control packages Brake Water Cooling Package PLC room BOP Control Panels Air Hoists LIR and LER, Local Instrument and Local Electric Rooms Mouse Hole Auxiliary Mouse Hole Tong Posts Derrick Lighting Powered Wire Line Reel Wire Line Measuring Unit Choke Manifold Control Panels Rig Floor Hydraulic Manifold Compressed Air Receiver Diverter Control Panel / Manifold


Rev. 0

4

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C dd) ee) ff) gg) hh)

Hydraulic Cathead Diverter with Hydraulic Ball Valves Secondary Conductor Tensioning Cylinders Workbench, lockers, etc. Casing Stabbing Basket

The drill floor in the areas indicated on the Contract Plans shall be strong enough to withstand the impact of a 27.4 m stand of 241.3 mm drill collars (90 ft. stand of 9” drill collars) dropped from a height of 1.0 meter. There shall be provided impact resistant sub-flooring beneath the drill floor as required withstanding such impact. The setback area shall have two (2) 75 mm layer of hardwood decking. This decking is built up in two layers, set apart 90° and lined with bitumen in between the layers of hardwood. Beneath the drill floor a system of access gratings, ladders, rails, etc., shall be provided for access to brake watercooling system, air receiver, mud return system, diverter and other equipment. A 6 mm thick drain pan shall be provided beneath the drawworks and rotary to collect all pollutants and direct them down to the skimmer tank. The drill floor shall be provided with a system of gutters, drains and deluge system as called for in Section 14. The drill floor shall be provided with a wind wall, complete with sliding doors, a drawworks shed and a wind wall at the monkey board level. The Builder shall develop, subject to Owner approval, the structure for these using the design criteria set forth in the specification to meet the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies. The weight of these structures shall be held to a minimum; therefore, the construction need not be similar to that of the superstructure. Top of drawworks house to have minimum slope, design for 0.24 mt./m2 loading and shall be fitted with hand rails. Composite materials shall be used for wind walls, etc. wherever allowed by the Regulatory Bodies and the Classification Society. Access shall be provided, either by walkways at the aft end of the drill floor or removable panels on the aft side of the wind walls, to allow a rig mover a clear view to the stern of the Vessel. There shall be a unitized, enclosed, air-conditioned driller's house installed on the drill floor. The house shall fully enclose all driller's instrumentation and controls for all the drill floor machinery and systems, pipe handling system(s), and other operational panels and alarms. There shall be installed in the derrick a pipe racking system that facilitates racking of pipe on the drill floor, a Top Drive drilling system, a TDS parking system, and a casing stabbing basket, including all of the associated mechanical, electrical, hydraulic, and ventilation systems. The cantilever substructure shall support the following equipment or as otherwise indicated in Sections 17 and 18, including but not limited to: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) p) q)

BOP Handler, Service Bridge Crane and BOP Horizontal Restraint System (HRS) Winches. BOP(s) BOP test unit Primary Conductor Pipe Tensioning Support Cylinders, accumulators and Control System (CTU) Conductor Tensioner Platform (CTP) CTP Support Brackets Movable CTP Walkways Trip and Strip Tanks and Pumps BOP Carts Scalper Shakers Drill floor and All Machinery Mud Processing Equipment and Tanks Mud Lab and Test Equipment BOP Closing Unit and Bottle Storage Racks Cementing Package Simultaneous Pipe Handling System (SPHS®) Skimmer Tank


Rev. 0

5

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C r) s) t) u)

Electric Equipment Room Centrifuges and Pumps Mud Logging Unit Hydraulic Power Unit

A system to support and handle the BOP’s shall be installed consisting of a 125 Ton Bridge Crane, which travels on trolley beams running longitudinally beneath the drill floor. Builder shall install four manually operated BOP stabilizer winches (14,000 lb. capacity) and fairleads. Removable test/assembly stumps for BOP stack(s) shall be installed on provided storage cart(s). The storage carts shall be movable fore and aft from test/assembly area to staging area, using a hydraulic skidding system. Above the BOP test / assembly area a single 35 mt. Service Bridge Crane with two (2) 17.5 mt. trolleys shall be installed that travels on trolley beams running transversely across the full width of the storage area. The BOP closing unit shall be installed under the elevated pipe rack within the forward end of the cantilever structure main and mezzanine decks. All necessary piping and fittings will be furnished by the Builder to locate full function control panels at the unit, on the drill floor, in the toolpusher's office, and on the main deck. The third party cementing package with batch mixing plant, lquid additive tanks, etc. shall be installed under the cantilever pipe rack deck within the forward end of the cantilever structure. The installation shall include all service piping to and discharge or drain piping from the cementation package as well as any instrumentation, electrical or otherwise, control cables, electric power, communication, alarm, lighting, etc. systems. The area surrounding the cementing engine package shall be classed A-60. A pipe rack structure, approximately 30.5 m long x 18.3 m wide will be provided atop the cantilever beams with transverse pipe rack beams and removable pinned socket type stanchions. The details of the pipe rack shall be as shown on the Contract Plans. Easily removable pipe stanchions (with lifting attachments), and sockets shall be provided to subdivide the pipe rack into bays, and a tie-down system shall be provided for securing tubulars while afloat. Hatches shall be installed in the pipe rack to provide access for the removal of cuttings. The elevated pipe rack will be outfitted with a drain system as provided in Section 14.

2.7

BURNER BOOMS

See Section 3.27

2.8

BUILT-IN TANKS

Built-in tanks shall be provided where shown to accommodate fresh water, fuel oil, lube oil, waste oil, base oil, mud, contaminated drains, etc., as required. Mud pits shall be covered and ventilated according to the Contract Plans. All inner bottom voids, preload, brine and drill water tanks shall be fitted with approved ‘docking plugs’. Each plug shall be accessible from inside the tank. The locations of the plugs shall consistently be adjacent to the tank access ladder landing. The design of the plug shall incorporate a cross bar to allow the plug to be struck with a hammer to loosen and remove it. The threaded portion of the plugs shall be generously lubricated with ‘Never-Seize’. Where fittings are required during construction for erecting scaffolding, they shall be designed and arranged so that they can be left installed to facilitate support of scaffolding for future repairs, maintenance or inspection.

2.9

SEA CHEST

Sea chests shall be provided with zinc anodes. The shell plating shall have heavy inserts in way of sea chests to compensate for the openings and all sides of the sea chests shall have a plate thickness equal to the shell thickness. All sea chests shall be fitted with strainer plates of 16 mm stainless steel with 25 mm diameter holes on 38 mm centers.


Rev. 0

6

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Strainers shall be attached with 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts so that the latter is flush with the shell. The free area through the strainer shall be at least twice that of the combined cross sectional area of the connections. Air flushing of the sea chest is to be provided. Valves shall be located as close as possible to the shell. All bolting shall be 316 stainless steel. Two sea chests to be provided in the bottom plate of the hull. Locations shall be shown on the Contract Drawings.

2.10

WELDING

All welding shall be subject to rigid inspection and approval of the Owner, his authorized representatives and the Classification Society. Builder’s welding inspectors (direct employees or subcontractors) shall be currently qualified as ASNT-TC1A Level II for the NDT processes, which they are performing. All NDT processes are to be performed according to approved written procedures. All NDT equipment shall have current calibration certification where applicable. Builder’s welding inspectors performing visual inspection shall be currently qualified according to the requirements of AWS D1.1 or as required by the Classification Society. All welds shall be shown on the working drawings using standard industry symbols and call outs. All welding processes, including repair processes, shall be documented by written procedures (WPS). All WPS shall be qualified (PQR) according to AWS, ANSI/ASME, and the Classification Society. All of Builder’s welders (direct employees or subcontractors) shall be qualified (WQR) to the qualified welding processes they are using. All welds shall be 100% visually inspected, and NDT inspected according to industry standards and Classification Society requirements as detailed below. Industrial radiographic sequences shall be prepared and submitted to the Owner and the Classification Society. Radiographs shall be as per Classification Society requirement. The minimum extent of this inspection shall be as follows: •

Hull structure weldments shall be non-destructively tested in accordance with the requirements of the Classification Society and the Regulatory Bodies.

•

All welds at the attachment of jacks, chock supports, cantilever hold down clamps, supporting structure, and connecting primary bulkheads shall be tested 100 % by Radiographic Testing (RT) or Ultrasonic Testing (UT) as accepted by the Owner, the Classification Society and the Regulatory Bodies.

•

All welds in the crane support structures and their attachments to the hull shall be tested 100 % by RT or UT as accepted by the Owner, the Classification Society and the Regulatory Bodies.

•

Welding inspection of the legs is covered in Section 6 of this specification.

•

The Owner will be allowed 100 additional RT random shots to be taken at locations as directed in the hull, substructure, foundations, etc. For each rejected X-ray, two additional X-rays shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

Should visual inspection show that thickness, surface contour, or appearance of continuity of any strength weld is not in accordance with the applicable approved working drawing or should radiographic, magnetic particle or ultrasonic examination and testing of any weld indicate defect of an unacceptable nature as determined by standards of the Classification Society, the weld shall be carefully cut out over the full extent of the defect, re-welded, and the quality of the final re-weld determined by similar methods of inspection at Builder's expense. All welds shall have adequate penetration and shall be reasonably free from undercutting. A maximum of 3 mm reinforcement will be allowed on butt welds. Intermittent welding of scantlings is not allowed. The welding of all beams, brackets, stiffeners, etc., above or below deck shall be continuously welded on both sides of the member to seal the faying surfaces and prevent corrosion.


Rev. 0

7


2.11

FOUNDATIONS

General It shall explicitly be the responsibility of the Builder to design and provide all needed foundations plus under deck support for proper distribution of loads into the structure for all machinery, equipment, structures and outfitting as shown on the Drawings or listed in Specifications, whether OFE or BFE. The Builder shall submit plans of all equipment foundations to Owner and the Classification Society for their approval and comments, before commencing construction. Layouts of the individual pieces of equipment shown on the Contract Plans are meant for general guidance and are subject to relocation by the Owner and the Builder to suit local conditions and/or operational requirements. Relocation of equipment by the Builder must be approved by the Owner. Relocation of equipment by the Owner, which causes an impact on cost or schedule, must be negotiated with the Builder. Minor relocation of individual equipment after discussion and before construction should not be considered as causing impact on cost and schedule.

Vibration and Deflections Special attention shall be given to providing sufficient rigidity of the foundation support structure, and to the cushioning and restraint of piping, machinery or equipment, so as to minimize or otherwise control vibrations and consequent transmission of noise and/or vibrations through the Vessel's structure to acceptable levels. Particular attention shall also be paid to limiting any relative deflections of foundations to insure positive alignments are maintained on machinery and to avoid any damaging effects on bearings, etc. Foundation Design Foundations shall be designed to act as complete supports, against all loading conditions, independent of the casing, frame bed plate, or other part of the supported panels, equipment, or machinery and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Equipment furnished on oil field skids may be mounted on deck pads with under deck chocking at structural intersection with the specific approval of the Owner. Foundations shall be designed to preclude development of thermal stresses in either the foundation or in supported heat producing equipment. Foundations for equipment shall be designed for a combined static and dynamic load of 1.5 G vertical and 0.5 G horizontal for roll and pitch. Changes to Owner Furnished Equipment Where Contract Plans show details of some foundations, it is to be understood that they are indicated for Builder's guidance at bid stage as to the general principles of design and to show the minimum standard of strength expected for an assumed typical make of the equipment involved. The actual foundations in all details to suit the final selected equipment in each case, shall remain within the Builder's scope of design and supply, and shall be subject to Owner's review and approval as already noted in this Section. The Owner may also change the manufacturer of any equipment specified in these Specifications and substitute a unit of similar size and weight without incurring any extra costs or delays, if this is done prior to issuing certified drawings to shipyard for foundations or within ninety days of the contract date, whichever is later. Any equipment change, which causes an increase in installation cost or schedule, shall be negotiated by the Owner and the Builder.

2.12

DERRICK

The Derrick Vendor shall provide derrick builders to assemble the derrick and supervise its installation on board the Vessel. The Builder shall provide cranes (with operators, riggers, etc.) and services necessary to assist with assembly and installation. The Builder is to outfit the derrick per the Specifications, including miscellaneous structure, lighting, piping, etc.


Rev. 0

8


TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 3.0 - HULL FITTINGS AND ACCESS ....................................................................... 1 3.1

GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 1

3.2

WATERTIGHT DOORS .......................................................................................................... 1

3.3

WEATHER TIGHT DOORS .................................................................................................... 1

3.4

NON-TIGHT DOORS ............................................................................................................... 1

3.5

WIRE MESH DOORS ............................................................................................................... 1

3.6

GAS-TIGHT DOORS ................................................................................................................ 2

3.7

JOINER DOORS ........................................................................................................................ 2

3.8

MANHOLES ............................................................................................................................... 2

3.9

HATCHES ................................................................................................................................... 2

3.10 LADDERS AND STAIRWAYS .............................................................................................. 3 3.11 RAILS .......................................................................................................................................... 3 3.12 WINDOWS ................................................................................................................................. 4 3.13 DECK FITTINGS ....................................................................................................................... 4 3.14 GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES ...................................................................................... 5 3.15 PAD EYES .................................................................................................................................. 5 3.16 LIFE BOATS AND LIFE RAFT DAVITS ............................................................................ 5 3.17 COAMINGS ................................................................................................................................ 6 3.18 PROTECTION FENCES ............................................................................................................ 6 3.19 HOSE HANDLING AND LOADING STATIONS .............................................................. 6 3.20 MUD PIT COVER ..................................................................................................................... 6 3.21 DRAWWORKS HOUSE AND WIND SCREEN ................................................................. 6 3.22 ACCESS PLATFORMS AND LADDERS ............................................................................ 7 3.23 DOCKING PLUGS .................................................................................................................... 7 3.24 CANTILEVER SERVICE HOSE CONNECTION PLATFORM ...................................... 7 3.25 DRAG CHAINS ......................................................................................................................... 7 3.26 BURNER BOOM SUPPORT TOWERS ................................................................................ 7


SECTION 3.0 - HULL FITTINGS AND ACCESS 3.1

GENERAL

Careful consideration must be given to the possible future removal of major equipment items (e.g. main engine-generator sets, mud pumps, etc.). The Builder is to produce plans for such equipment replacement, including provision of “soft patches” in bulkheads and decks and lifting fittings as required. Provisions shall also be made for removal of machinery components, such as parts, pumps, etc., for the purpose of maintenance or repair. Any areas of gratings, ladders, piping, etc., which must be removed for machinery removal, shall be made readily portable for this purpose. Load rated lifting eyes shall be provided and proof load tested in all applicable areas (see 3.15). Provisions shall be made for safe access to any valve or fitting which is to be operated. Builder's standards will be considered for approval of all types of doors, access hatches, manholes, etc., provided they meet the requirements of the regulatory bodies and approval of the Owner. Tops of doors shall be not less than 2.0 m above top of finished deck or step. Doors shall be as shown on the Contract Plans and generally shall be 760 mm minimum width except stateroom doors which may be 660 mm wide. Exterior doors are to have watersheds above the door openings to prevent dripping of water from the top of the doorway.

3.2

WATERTIGHT DOORS

Watertight-hinged doors shall be installed below the main deck and in booby hatches and quarters on the main deck, as indicated on Contract Plans and/or required by regulatory bodies. Doors shall be of marine type, constructed of steel, quick acting, wheel-operated, fitted with six dogs with clips and a rubber gasket. Hinges and dogs shall be fitted with bronze bushings and grease fittings. All doors on the main deck are to be fitted with a 6 mm steel clip with mating clip on bulkheads for locking with a padlock where permitted by the Regulatory Bodies. Where not permitted, a means of securing doors during stacked conditions is to be provided. Doors shall open out.

3.3

WEATHER TIGHT DOORS

Weather tight doors shall be constructed and outfitted similarly to watertight doors except that only four dogs are required.

3.4

NON-TIGHT DOORS

Non-tight doors shall be of flat or dished plate steel construction, and as light as practicable, but offering good resistance to distortion in any direction. Corners and edges shall be well rounded. Non-tight doors shall be fitted to internal lockers, storerooms, etc., except in accommodation and control spaces where joiner doors shall be fitted.

3.5

WIRE MESH DOORS


Rev. 0

1

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Hinged expanded metal doors, with suitable hardware and constructed as described below shall be located where shown on the Contract Plans.

3.6

GAS TIGHT DOORS

Fume-tight self-closing doors shall be fitted in the paint locker, if below deck, bulkhead between mud pump room and the mud pit room, other locations shown below the pipe rack deck and as necessary and/or as required by the regulatory agencies. The doors shall be similar to the metal joiner doors and a soft rubber gasket shall be fit into a recess in the doorframe and sill. Doors shall be 38 mm thick, insulation filled, reinforced for three pairs of butts. Door cladding and hardware shall be stainless steel. Doors between hazardous and safe areas shall be installed in airlocks as shown on the Contract Plans. All hazardous areas are to have gas-tight escape hatches or doors, approximately 750 mm x 750 mm in size, for egress to safe areas.

3.7

JOINER DOORS

All inside doors in accommodation spaces, not otherwise designated, shall be insulation filled, hollow steel and flush type. Doors in passages or where subject to through traffic, such as between mess rooms and recreation rooms and elsewhere as indicated on Contract Plans shall be self-closing and shall be fitted with 250 mm diameter port light with wire inserted glass at eye level. These doors are to be fitted with stainless steel push and kick plates.

3.8

MANHOLES

Oil-tight or watertight flush surface mount or raised manholes, not less than 600 mm x 800 mm elliptical or 900 mm round clear opening large enough to allow access by a man wearing self-contained breathing apparatus, shall be provided for access to void spaces, tanks (preload, brine, drill water, etc.) and other compartments as necessary. Manholes are to have bolted plate covers with appropriate gaskets and be secured with stainless steel studs and bronze nuts. Manholes located on vertical surfaces shall be provided with suitable handles and shall be raised flanged openings so that covers can be removed with nuts and bolts (dowel pin shall be provided to align / support cover during installation). Recessed deck manholes shall be fitted for lifting lugs. Manhole covers shall have a chain welded to underside and inside tank (keeper chain). Coamings on preload tank manholes shall be of a height and size that would be exempt from admeasurements by the Classification Society. Fresh water tanks shall be fitted with raised manholes.

3.9

HATCHES

Water tight hatches for handling stores, sacks, machinery parts, etc., shall be installed on the main deck. The hatches shall have sizes as shown on the Contract Plans and shall be hinged (HRWTH) or bolted (BWTH), steel watertight covers. Covers shall have rubber gaskets and shall be secured with stainless steel bolts and nuts or dogs. Covers shall be flush or mounted on coamings meeting regulatory body requirements for height and scantlings. Ring bolts for lifting covers and hold back hooks shall be provided. The cranes shall handle the covers.


Rev. 0

2

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Hatches installed below the main deck shall be of watertight, non tight or fume tight flush construction as indicated on the integral watertight integrity plan. Hatch sizes shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. The construction of these hatches shall be similar to the watertight hatches, except that a hand winch and pulley system may be used to open and close the hatch covers (other means, such as motor driven, either electrical or hydraulic is also optional). Coamings for the main deck sack storage and main store hatches are to be 1.07 meter high. For other hatches, doors are to be operable on both sides with handles. All hatches with coamings of less than 1.07 meter height shall have permanent sockets affixed for Builder supplied removable handrails.

3.10

LADDERS AND STAIRWAYS 3.10.1

Stairways

Stairways shall be located as shown on the Contract Plans and shall be constructed of composite materials wherever allowed by the Regulatory Bodies and Classification Society. Stairways shall have a slope not greater than 45° in the accommodation and escape ways and 50° in machinery spaces to the horizontal unless specifically approved by Owner. Stairways shall be not less than 920 mm wide. Stairway steps shall be fitted with prefabricated fiberglass treads with anti-slip nosings, and exterior stair treads shall have adequate holes for drainage to prevent ice buildup. The Builder shall furnish removable stairways for each cantilever beam for access from the main deck to the elevated pipe rack walkways. These stairways shall be arranged to accommodate the full range of cantilever travel. Stairways shall have galvanized metal sheet underneath where required for the protection against dust and debris for equipment and personnel. 3.10.2

Vertical Ladders

Vertical ladders shall be provided for access into all tanks and compartments for inspection as required. The ladders shall be located so that they will be placed in line with the access opening above and reasonably recessed under the deck as necessary to keep the ladder clear of the opening. Vertical ladders, hand grabs, individual ladder rungs, etc., which are to be located in salt or freshwater tanks, shall be galvanized prior to installation. Vertical ladders access via manholes shall be positioned towards the short dimension of the manhole (for easier access by personnel wearing SCBA gear). A landing platform, approximately 1850 mm (6’) below the manhole access, shall be located adjacent to the vertical ladder in each deep tank. Platform size should be approximately 900 x 900 mm, with handrail on the three non-access sides. There shall be an inclined ladder from the platform to the bottom of the tank. Particular consideration will be paid to the selection of all ladder materials. Safety cages and landing platforms shall be fitted as per Regulatory Bodies’ requirements (except for preload tank ladders and leg ladders).

3.11

RAILS 3.11.1

Pipe Rails


Rev. 0

3

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Open pipe rails shall be installed on the periphery of all weather decks, inclined ladders, fairleads, life boat stations, stairways and platforms, with the exception of the helicopter platform and areas protected by bulwarks and house sides. Pipe rails shall be fiberglass wherever allowed by the Regulatory bodies and Classification Society. All steel pipe rails shall be fabricated from bent pipe (not welded elbows). Open pipe rails shall be 3 courses, 1.2 meter high, with stanchions and top rail of 40 NB SCH 40 pipe. The two lower rails shall be 25 NB SCH 40 pipe. Rails installed on exterior (weather) areas shall be galvanized. Rails installed in interior areas need not be galvanized. Rails and stanchions at material handling areas shall be 80 NB SCH XS pipe. Machinery spaces shall have rails around all open areas and as necessary for the protection of personnel from hot equipment. Pipe rails and stanchions at the periphery of the main deck, in way of crane loading areas, shall be 80 NB SCH XS galvanized pipe. All pipe rails shall be equipped with 150 mm kick plates (toe boards) as required by Regulatory Bodies. 3.11.2

Chain Rails

Suitable two course railings of chain rail and portable stanchions with all appropriate fittings shall be provided for all access and equipment, which require temporary railings for safety while accesses are in use. The use of chain rails shall generally be avoided as far as possible. 3.11.3

Grab Rails and Storm Rails

Hand grabs of hard wood or non-conductive material shall be provided in way of all electrical switchboards. Storm rails shall be provided in all passageways, outside of deckhouses, and elsewhere as required.

3.12

WINDOWS

Marine windows shall be of a type, fire rating class and placement in accordance with Regulatory Body requirements approved by the Classification Society. Such windows shall be installed according to manufacturers’ requirements and as generally shown on the Contract Plans.

3.13

DECK FITTINGS 3.13.1

Bitts and Chocks

Bitts, chocks, etc., of the size and location as shown on the Contract Plans and as described herein shall be provided by the Builder for mooring or towing as appropriate. All bitts and closed chocks located at the edge of main deck shall be positioned so that the mooring line or towline will not chafe on the deck or other structures at any normal operating angle of incidence to the deck or hull. Chaffing bars are to be provided as required.


Rev. 0

4

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Panama Chocks with a minimum opening of at least 460 mm x 250 mm, ASTM F 936-85, cast steel, type I (deck mounted), grade 2, material ASTM A 27/A 27M grade 60-30 (material marked per ASTM F 936 Section 9), or equivalent as approved by Classification Society. 3.13.2

Towing Pads

Five (5) 82.5 mm chain Smit towing pads, rated at 225 Tonnes SWL, shall be provided on the bow (two port, two starboard, and one on centerline). Two pair of 63.5 mm chain towing pads, rated at 150 mt. SWL, shall be provided on the stern (one pair port and one pair starboard). Nine heavy fairleads for towing bridle are to be installed in line with the towing pads. The aft corner mounted towing line fairlead must have a 180° clear arc with the mid point being at right angles to a line drawn from the fairlead to the centre line of the rig, as shown on the Contract Plans.

3.14

GRATINGS AND FLOOR PLATES

Fiberglass open gratings shall be installed where indicated on the Contract Plans and elsewhere as may be required. Galvanized steel open gratings may only be used where fiberglass is not allowed by the Classification Society or the Regulatory Bodies. Removable galvanized raised pattern floor plates shall be provided in the machinery spaces, on machinery space platforms and as necessary for convenient access to and operation of all machinery and controls. Floor plates, in general, shall be designed for 1.0 mt./m2. Landing platforms shall be designed for the equipment or materials to be handled. Floor plates shall be 42.5 Kg/m2 raised pattern, non-skid plates. Where required to provide maintenance access, floor plates shall be secured to a sub-floor of angle supports with flush stainless steel flat head countersunk machine screws. Nonskid walk ways are to be painted showing the routes to be used for access / egress in an emergency from all locations both above and below deck.

3.15

PAD EYES

Suitable load rated pad eyes and fittings shall be provided and welded on decks, overheads, bulkheads, shell, hatch openings, etc., for the securing of and/or lifting of equipment, crane load testing or other necessary service in all spaces requiring maintenance. Testing and marking of pad eyes shall be in accordance with Sections 1 and 12. Location and size of all pad eyes shall be proposed by the Builder and to be approved by Owner. Recessed pad eyes (tie downs) shall be installed on the helicopter platform for securing helicopters. Locations shall be as directed by the Owner and required by the Regulatory Bodies. Recesses shall be fitted with drains connected to the helicopter deck drain system.

3.16

LIFE BOATS / LIFE RAFT DAVITS

The Builder shall furnish and install foundations and access/handling platforms for the lifeboats and MOB/FRC, davits and associated handling gear described in Section 7 at the locations shown in the Contract Plans. The Builder shall design, fabricate, and install foundations and access/handling platforms for the liferaft launching davits and associated equipment and gear.


Rev. 0

5


3.17

COAMINGS

Water tight coamings shall be provided around all machinery units such as water makers, diesel generators, mud pumps, mud mixing and charging pumps, fire pumps, etc. These coamings shall be 6 mm x 100 mm steel flat bars welded continuously on both sides. Deck drains shall be provided from within coamings. The edge of every floor, gangway and stairway, and all openings from which a person could fall more than 1.8 m, or into the sea, shall where practicable, be provided with a toe board not less than 150 mm high.

3.18

PROTECTION FENCES

A metal structure with wooden inserts, approximately 7.5 meters high, shall be provided at the forward end of all pipe racks to protect ventilators and other equipment and controls on deck from damage by drilling tubulars, when moved by the crane. The structures shall consist of 50 mm oak or similar hardwood timbers attached to the flanges of “H” beam stanchions. The stanchions shall be on approximately 1.8 m centers and shall be suitably braced. All bolting for the fences is to be stainless steel and counter-sunk. Structures of similar construction are to be installed on the main deck as required to protect ventilators, hatches, machinery, etc. from damage.

3.19

HOSE HANDLING AND LOADING STATIONS

The Builder is to design, fabricate and install port and starboard loading stations, generally, as located on the Contract Plans. The loading valves shall be located within easy reach of the rig personnel. Racks for the supply boat end of the hoses shall also be located within easy reach of both rig personnel and cranes.

3.20

MUD PIT COVER

The mud pit is to be covered with a raised deck fabricated from 42 Kg/m² or equal raised pattern, non-skid plate supported by an angle frame. Hinged hatches shall be provided for access into each pit and for access to equipment, mud guns, etc., as required. Flush type hand grabs shall be provided on all hatches. The area between the cover and top of the mud pits is to be ventilated by an independent ventilation system. See Section 10 for a description of the ventilation system. Mud pit access hatches should be fitted with coamings and the lids should have a rubber seal and fitted with securing dogs to allow the carriage of liquid mud when under tow (field moves).

3.21

DRAWWORKS HOUSE AND WIND SCREEN

The Builder shall design, furnish and install a drawworks house. The drawworks house, enclosed on three sides, is to be 4800 mm high and extend the full length of the drill floor and cover the drawworks with a sloping roof over. The drawworks house is to be corrugated steel plate with the corrugations extending away from the drill floor. The drawworks house shall have four (4) commercial heavy duty single hung


Rev. 0

6

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C windows glazed with 10 mm heat treated wire reinforced glass. An H-beam over the centerline of the drawworks drum capable of lifting 5.5 mt. shall be incorporated into the house structure. Foundations shall be provided on the roof of the drawworks house to accommodate the drawworks motor blowers, brake cooling unit radiators, wire line unit, etc. A wind screen shall be designed, fabricated and installed by the Builder around the drill floor. The screen shall be 3000 mm high and is open in way of the V-door ramp and access ladder. The top of the wind screen shall project back and upwards into the derrick. The wind screen is to be corrugated steel plate with the corrugations extending away from the drill floor. Access stairs shall be provided to the top of the drawworks house. Vertical ladders shall provide access to the top of the wind screen. The wind screen shall have six (6) windows similar to the drawworks house.

3.22

ACCESS PLATFORMS AND LADDERS

Platforms with ladders shall be designed, fabricated and installed by Builder to make all vent closures, valves, and other equipment that needs to be frequently maintained or used accessible. A platform to support the well logging unit and tool house shall be provided by the Builder on the starboard side of the cantilever beam generally as shown on the Contract Plans. The well logging unit shall have unobstructed access to the well over the entire drilling pattern.

3.23

DOCKING PLUGS

See Section 2.8

3.24

CANTILEVER SERVICE HOSE CONNECTION PLATFORM

The Builder is to design, fabricate and install a service hose connection platform on the starboard side of the cantilever beam generally as shown on the Contract Plans. This platform is to be elevated above the main deck and of sufficient size and capacity to support all pipe terminations and hoses supplying services to the cantilever and drill floor. The elevation is to be such that the hoses do not contact the main deck when the connections on the platform and cantilever are at minimum offset. The Builder is to provide supports for the cantilever ends of all hoses when the cantilever is the fully retracted.

3.25

DRAG CHAINS

Stainless steel drag chains are to be furnished and installed by the Builder to provide for the longitudinal movement of the cantilever beam and transverse movement of the drill floor. The drag chains are to be sized to accommodate all power, control, instrumentation, communication, etc. services required between the hull, cantilever and drill floor. A spare capacity of 15 % is to be provided in both drag chains. The Builder is to design, fabricate and install the drag chain, support structure, end terminations, etc. to provide a complete and fit for purpose installation.

3.26

BURNER BOOM SUPPORT TOWERS


Rev. 0

7

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Appropriate foundations, supports, reinforcements, support and stowage tower, etc. for the Owner supplied burner booms shall be designed, fabricated and installed by the Builder, on port and starboard aft side of the drilling unit, generally as shown on the Contract Plans. A water curtain pipe system shall be burner boom mounted as well as a handrail nozzle system. Both burner booms shall be stowed in the vertical position when not in use. The deck cranes are used to raise and lower the burner booms. Burner booms are stowed in vertical open frame trussed towers with platform(s) at the securing level for access. Access to the platform(s) is via vertical ladder(s). The burner booms shall be secured to the tower by a system of locking pins and pad eyes when in the stowed position. A universal joint type pivoting foundation shall support the burner booms at the main deck level. This foundation permits the burner boom to hinge vertically for stowage or horizontally for operation or access to the burner head for maintenance or removal. In the horizontal position, the booms are supported by stays attached to the top of the tower. A pivot at the upper end of the stay permits horizontal rotation of the burner boom. Horizontal movement of the burner boom is by wire rope guide lines attached to the forward and aft sides of the boom and connected to air hoists on the main deck.


Rev. 0

8

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11REV. C

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 4.0 - INSULATION, JOINER WORK AND DECK COVERING ............................... 1 4.1

TEMPERATURE INSULATION ............................................................................................. 1

4.2

ACOUSTIC INSULATION....................................................................................................... 1

4.3

REFRIGERATED SPACES ...................................................................................................... 1

4.4

JOINER WORK .......................................................................................................................... 1

4.5

FLOOR COVERING .................................................................................................................. 2

4.6

STRUCTURAL FIRE PROTECTION .................................................................................... 3

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #7700 REV. A

SECTION 4.0 - INSULATION, JOINER WORK AND DECK COVERING 4.1

TEMPERATURE INSULATION

Inside surfaces of all accommodation spaces and other conditioned spaces, which are exposed to the weather or are adjacent to excessively heated spaces, pump rooms, or machinery spaces shall have such exposed portions covered with insulation material. Total thickness of this material shall be equivalent to 50mm thick insulation in vertical and 100 mm thick in overhead spaces with a K value of 0.03 Kcal/mh°C., 16 Kg/m3 density fiberglass or equal. This insulation shall cover the inside surface of the bulkhead and overhead and any flanges bearing on this plating. All surfaces of living or public spaces in way of unheated or excessively heated spaces, such as machinery spaces, galley, etc., shall be insulated to a 150 mm thickness or greater, or as may be required by Regulatory Bodies. Insulation shall be applied on heated side where practical. All blanket or felt type insulation shall be impaled in weld studs with a spacing pattern not over 300 mm on centers in any direction and not more than 75 mm from the edges and secured by speed clips. Exposed insulation shall be covered with heavy fiberglass cloth suitable for paint application without degradation of thermal properties. In areas subject to normal physical contact, a protective metal covering shall be installed over fiberglass cloth.

4.2

ACOUSTIC INSULATION

In way of all noisy spaces adjacent to or within quarters, medic’s stateroom / hospital, or control rooms, such as AHU rooms, etc., insulation shall be provided against sound transmission on bulkheads, decks and overheads. Insulation shall comply with Regulatory Bodies requirements. Builder shall take care to select materials and use design details that will minimize noise levels within the accommodation spaces. Warning notices shall be posted at entrance to such spaces where the noise level is in excess of 85 dB.(A). All windows in acoustically insulated spaces shall be double-glazed.

4.3

REFRIGERATED SPACES

The built-in refrigerated stores boxes shall be in accordance with Section 11, "Ship Service Refrigeration".

4.4

JOINER WORK 4.4.1

General

All joiner work throughout the vessel, including furring and trim, shall meet the requirements of the Classification Society, Regulatory Bodies and as specified herein. 4.4.2

Ceilings

Ceilings shall be at least 2.30 m above the finished floor and of a noise absorption type shall be fitted in all staterooms, galley, public spaces, offices and elsewhere as required to cover all insulation. Where no ceilings are provided, suitable fiberglass cloth or sheet metal shall be provided to protect the insulation.


Rev. 0

1

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #7700 REV. A 4.4.3

Joiner Bulkheads and Lining

Joiner bulkheads and linings for accommodations, including control room, living and working spaces, recreation and mess room, store rooms, passageways, toilet and shower spaces, change rooms, hospital, staterooms and other spaces may be metal or an approved type joiner panel. Removable panels shall be provided in way of areas, which may require future access for maintenance (e.g. piping connections, cable trunks, valves or apparatus). 4.4.4

Galley Sheathing

Galley sheathing shall be stainless steel, attached to galvanized angle furring with stainless steel sheetmetal screws. 4.4.5

Toilet & Shower Modules

All toilet and shower spaces are to be of the prefabricated self-contained construction. The modules are to be made of either FRP or aluminum and shall be completely outfitted and ready for installation in the accommodations. The interior bulkheads, ceiling and deck are to be pre-finished. All fixtures, shower, toilet and lavatory, and their associated shower and lavatory control valves, etc. are to be installed and connected. The modules shall be completely outfitted with such items as, but not limited to, medicine cabinet and shelf, toothbrush and cup holders (2 each), towel bars (2), toilet paper holder, shower curtain rod, hand grabs in shower, clothes hooks, etc. All plumbing fixtures shall be suitable for operation with a vacuum collection system. All services, hot and cold water, sewage, shower, lavatory and scupper drains, electrical and ventilation, shall be installed, connected to their proper component and terminated at a common location for connection to the various rig systems. Units shall be right and left handed so that two modules can be installed adjacent to each other and services from both modules terminate in one location. Exterior services are to be pre-finished to match the adjoining joiner bulkheads or covered with joiner liner panels. All lavatory, shower, scupper, etc. fixtures are to be triple chrome plated brass or stainless steel.

4.5

FLOOR COVERING

The floor base of staterooms, offices, control rooms, recreation rooms, radio room, mess room, helicopter waiting room, hospital, stairway landings, accommodation passageways and lockers in way of passageways, and vestibules in accommodations spaces shall be leveled with PolySpec Fornaft underlayment or an approved equal. All of the wet spaces including change rooms, washrooms, toilets, laundry rooms, galley, cleaning gear lockers, and refrigerated spaces shall be leveled with an epoxy base underlayment such as PolySpec CLAD or equivalent. Any areas requiring a heavy fill (> 12 mm) shall be leveled only with an epoxy base underlayment.


Rev. 0

2

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #7700 REV. A All accommodation spaces shall have a finished floor covering according to the following schedule: Table 4.5.1 - Floor Coverings AREA

SYSTEM

Galley, refrigerated

Homogenous ceramic tiles two component epoxy flooring

Stateroom living area

Vinyl sheet

Offices, Recreation rooms, Gym

Vinyl sheet

Mess hall, main corridors, stairwell landings, helicopter waiting room, stateroom lavatories, laundry rooms, hospital / bathroom, between deck landings, lavatories other than change room..

Generally Vinyl sheet, except for wet spaces where a Terrazzo System shall be used

Change rooms and adjacent lavatory, dirty tea room, laundry area.

Terrazzo or two component epoxy flooring

Closets, linen or mop, Store Rooms

Vinyl sheet

Floor covering in accommodation passageways shall have contrasting color (laminated under the last two clear coats) centerline stripes, 300 mm in width, to indicate escape paths in the event of an emergency. The mess area floor shall have a contrasting 300 mm wide stripe around the perimeter of the space. All terrazzo floor systems shall feature a 100 mm troweled cove strip around the perimeter of the space. All other floor systems shall feature a standard 100 mm perimeter cove. All terrazzo floor systems shall have at least four layers of epoxy clear coat to provide a high sheen, except for bath / toilet areas which only require one clear coat application. Terrazzo or two component epoxy flooring thickness shall be according to the manufacturer’s specification. All floor covering materials and colors are to be selected by the builder.

4.6

STRUCTURAL FIRE PROTECTION

Interior and exterior bulkheads and decks within and around the quarters and machinery spaces shall be A60 class in those areas required by the Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies. The exterior bulkheads of the quarters, the bulkheads bounding the galley, the stairwells, the toolpusher's office, the jacking control room, the fan rooms, the radio room, the emergency generator room and the quarters decks shall be A60 class and as designated by the Contract Plans. The bulkheads, doors and windows bounding the 3d party diesel engine driven cementing package shall be bounded with A-60 class structural fire protection as required by the Classification Society, Regulatory Bodies, and IMO MODU Code. All structural fire protection materials of construction shall be listed in a register with the IMO Fire Test Procedures Code approval certificate provided to Class and the owner.


Rev. 0

3


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5.0 - FURNISHINGS.................................................................................................................... 1 5.1

GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 1

5.2

FURNITURE AND FURNISHING SCHEDULE ......................................................................... 1

5.3

UTILITY SPACES ......................................................................................................................... 3

5.4

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT AND STOWAGE ................................................................. 5

5.5

COMMISSARY SPACES .............................................................................................................. 6

5.6

DIRTY TEA ROOM ...................................................................................................................... 9

5.7

HARDWARE ................................................................................................................................. 9

5.8

SANITARY FIXTURES .............................................................................................................. 10

5.9

CLOCKS ...................................................................................................................................... 10

5.10

ACCOMMODATIONS OUTFITTING ....................................................................................... 10

5.11

HOSPITAL ................................................................................................................................... 10


SECTION 5.0 - FURNISHINGS

5.1

GENERAL

The living quarters shall be outfitted with furnishings and equipment as described in this section and as listed in Section 1.2. All furniture and furnishings shall be subject to approval by the Owner. The Builder shall prepare a complete furniture and furnishings schedule showing each item proposed to be supplied, the manufacturer’s name, model number, size, materials, finish, and other pertinent specifications, including samples of materials as required. These schedules and samples shall be submitted to the Owner for approval within 90 days after execution of the Contract, and the schedules must be approved by the Owner prior to procurement by the Builder. The arrangement and type of furniture, fixtures and other items of equipment and outfit for spaces shall be generally as shown on Contract Plans. The Builder shall prepare his own plans of sufficiently large scale to ensure that all furniture will fit properly into the assigned spaces. These detailed plans must be approved by the Owner prior to procurement of any furniture or furnishings by the Builder. Each space shown on the Contract Plans shall be fitted out completely by the Builder with furnishings as required herein. The furnishings shall be chosen so as to create a pleasant living environment for the crew members while maintaining durability and serviceability. Furniture and fittings shall have substantial construction in harmony with the decorative treatment of the space. All items shall be complete, including hardware, finish molding strips, latches, reinforcements for attaching and securing hardware, sub-bases, etc.. Furniture shall be made in sections or shall be separable so as to readily pass through the accommodation doors. All interior finish materials, including furnishings and furniture, shall meet the flame retarding requirements of the codes. All furniture shall be made in self-contained units of heavy duty, marine quality steel, finished with melamine-baked enamel, subject to Owner approval and in compliance with the Classification Society and other Regulatory Body requirements. All furniture except chairs shall be secured to decks, bulkheads and deck heads as necessary, but furniture legs or bases shall not be welded to decks directly. All necessary fastenings to secure chairs and other portable furniture to the deck shall be provided. These securing devices shall be designed to withstand the forces resulting from occupancy and under the conditions resulting from roll and pitch of vessel when afloat.

5.2

FURNITURE AND FURNISHING SCHEDULE

The following items shall be provided and installed by the Builder: 5.2.1

Upholstery

All upholstery shall be of heavy, marine grade materials; padding shall be solid foam rubber. All upholstery materials shall satisfy the requirements set forth by the applicable Regulatory Bodies. Color and design of upholstery shall be approved by the Owner prior to procurement by the Builder. 5.2.2

Mirrors


Rev. 0

1


Mirrors shall be a minimum 450 mm x 900 mm x 6 mm thick. Sectional mirrors in the shower rooms shall be installed over the full extent of the walls over the lavatories. Complete with 220 VAC AC grounded outlets. 5.2.3

Lights - Berths, Desks, Etc.

Berths, radio shelves (560 mm x 180 mm) shall be provided at the head of each berth. Desks and writing tables shall be provided with lamps. In addition recessed overhead lighting shall be installed to provide sufficient lighting for the space usage. 5.2.4

Shelves, Coat and Hat Hooks

Each stateroom shall be provided with coat hooks, two per man. In addition, a 300 mm continuous shelf shall be installed over change room washbasins and in areas having slop sinks. Coat hooks shall be in change rooms and passageways leading to mess room as required. 5.2.5

Stools

Stools shall be of steel, have steel seats and shall be adjustable. 5.2.6

Filing Cabinets

Filing cabinets, steel, legal size, both vertical four drawer and horizontal double drawer, shall be provided, and as shown on the Contract Plans. 5.2.7

Wastebaskets

Wastebaskets shall be provided in all staterooms, hospital, change room, galley, mess room, offices and radio room, recreation rooms, toilet and shower areas, laundry and in all spaces provided with tissue and folded paper towel dispensers and at each desk.. 5.2.8

Chairs

Chairs for each space shall be provided as shown on the Contract Plans and as described in this Specification. 5.2.9

Built-in Tables and Counters

Built-in tables and counters fitted out as shown shall be in keeping with the decor of the space where located. 5.2.10

Tack boards

Tack boards shall be 900 mm x 1200 mm. 5.2.11

Springs and Mattresses

Berths shall be spacious enough to accommodate the average height person. Mattresses shall be comfortable and at least 200 x 90 cm and Owner approved. Mattresses for hospital shall be covered with water-repellent ticking. Berths shall have solid steel bottoms. 5.2.12

Bookcases


Rev. 0

2


Bookcases shall be located in offices and recreation rooms and as indicated in the Contract Plans. 5.2.13

Window Curtains

Curtains of attractive, heavy drapery cloth shall be provided for each window in staterooms and offices. Curtains shall be of generous fullness, dense enough, and fitted with the necessary hardware so that they can be secured at all edges to completely darken the room during daylight hours. Color and design of curtains shall be approved by the Owner prior to procurement by the Builder. 5.2.14

Schedule

The furniture and furnishings shall be provided as shown on the Contract Plans and as approved by the Owner. 5.2.15

Shelves

Shelves for books and files shall be provided in offices and other spaces as required. Shelves are to be fitted with sea rails. 5.2.16

Medicine Cabinets

Medicine cabinets with mirrored doors shall be provided over lavatories in private (and semi-private) sanitary spaces. 5.2.17

Bunk Curtains

Curtains of heavy drapery cloth shall be provided for each bunk. Color and design shall be as approved by the Owner. 5.2.18

Lockers

Lockers shall be provided as shown on the Contract Plans and shall be a minimum of 610 mm deep and fitted with clothes rod, clothes hooks on sides plus top and bottom shelf. Lockers for the storage of life jackets and survival suits shall be provided in each stateroom. The quantity of lockers for each stateroom shall equal the number of occupants. 5.2.19

Shower Fittings

Each private and semi-private sanitary space shall be provided with towel rails, soap holder and a grab rail adjacent to shower and wash basin. See Section 4. The final layout and equipment selection shall be done in conjunction with the accommodation equipment provider, and the Builder to accomplish a complete and fully operational, ergonomically compliant and comfortable accommodation, which complies with modern comfort and ergonomic standards. The equipment listed is only to be used as an indication of equipment possibly required.

5.3

UTILITY SPACES 5.3.1

General


Rev. 0

3


Each space shown on the Contract Plans shall be completely furnished with articles and equipment shown thereon. 5.3.2

Locker and Change Rooms

Double tier lockers shall be provided in both change rooms. Lockers shall be sheet steel with powder coat paint, approximately 350 x 300 x 1800 mm, arranged as shown on Contract Plans, complete with hardware and fittings. Latches shall have eye for padlock. A total of 15 double coat hooks shall be installed on clear bulkheads in change rooms. Wood benches about 380 mm wide by length as shown shall be provided. Change room to be fitted with central scupper. Lockers to be colored as selected by the Owner. Two wastebaskets shall also be provided. 5.3.3

Laundry Equipment

Laundry equipment shall be installed as shown on the Contract Plans as follows: Dirty Laundry Three Electric clothes washer, commercial heavy-duty type, 20 kg load Two Electric clothes dryer, commercial type, 25 kg load Clean Laundry Two domestic washing machines for personal clothes Two domestic condensation driers (no extra ducting required) for personal clothes Laundry rooms are to be equipped with a central scupper and folding tables, double laundry tubs and laundry baskets on casters and supply locker. Water shutoff valves for washers shall be readily accessible ball valve types, dryer vents to be arranged so as to minimize back pressure and lint accumulation and facilitate periodic clean out. Washers and dryers shall be positioned to provide access to the rear of the machine for equipment hook-up and maintenance. Washers and driers shall be of a modular construction to permit transport through accommodation doors. 5.3.4

Tool Rooms and Store Rooms

Tool rooms and storerooms shall be fitted out with necessary lockers, bins, rack, shelves and battens, etc. Drilling tool storeroom to be fitted with Owner approved, Builder furnished drilling tool storage racks. 5.3.5

Paint Locker

The following shall be provided: -

One Locker, with four shelves and locking device One Trough rack for brushes One Cleaning tank One Set of shelving, 3 high, for storage five gallon cans. One tier of such shelving to be provided with locking doors to contain thinners, solvents, etc. One Can, 30 liter capacity with cover, for clean waste One Can, 3 liter capacity, with foot-operated cover


Rev. 0

4


The paint locker shall be classified as a hazardous area and shall be provided with ventilation, fire detection system, fixed firefighting system (HP water mist) and self-closing vapor-tight door. 5.3.6

Drill Floor

Four steel plate (minimum 6 mm thickness) lockers 1.83 m high x 0.90 m wide x 0.60 m deep complete with shelving shall be provided. A 1.50 m x 0.75 m steel bench complete with 100 mm heavy metal working vise shall be provided. 5.3.7

Mud Pump Room

Builder shall fabricate and install a heavy duty 1.50 m by 0.75 m steel work bench complete with a 125 mm heavy metal working vise and a back panel suitable for the storage of tools. 5.3.8

Helicopter Waiting Room

The helicopter waiting room shall be arranged as shown on the Contract Plans. The room shall be equipped with windows, one weather tight doors, with direct access to the passageway and the helideck. Further the room shall seat 24 people, have a weight scale, cabinets, and a color LCD flat screen TV and a DVD/VCR player with a multi-national format (PAL, NTSC, etc.). Lighting, heating, ventilation and 220 V, 60 Hz electrical outlets shall be to the same general standard as the rest of the accommodation.

5.4

MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT AND STOWAGE 5.4.1

General

Bins, racks, shelves with battens, etc., shall be provided to suit each particular space. Arrangement to be determined depending on the type of material or equipment to be stowed. Spaces not specifically mentioned herein but which normally require shelving, etc., shall be suitably equipped in keeping with the requirements of similar spaces. In storerooms where upper shelves and racks are not readily accessible from the deck, ladders shall be provided. Adequate stowage for ladder, when not in use, shall be provided with the spaces. 5.4.2

Linen Closets

Linen closets shall be provided at each level. Closets shall be provided with No. 16 gauge stiffened shelving, with sea rails. 5.4.3

Dry Stores

The stores spaces shall be finished and outfitted for stowage of Galley and Steward's stores according to the Contract Plans. The spaces shall be fitted with stainless steel plate shelving having sea rails. 5.4.4

Cleaning Gear Lockers

Cleaning gear lockers shall be provided at each level with the following equipment: •

A service sink with roll rim.


Rev. 0

5


5.5

•

Clips and racks for stowage of mops, brooms and buckets.

•

Shelving, 3-high, with bottom shelf 300 mm above deck with 100 mm high raised edges.

COMMISSARY SPACES

The final layout and equipment quantity and selection shall be done in conjunction with the galley and mess room equipment provider. The shipyard and the Builder shall accomplish a complete and fully operational galley and mess room. All galley equipment shall be of a modular design to facilitate transport through the accommodation doors. 5.5.1

General

Messing service shall be furnished as shown on the Contract Plans and as specified herein to be fully adequate in every respect to provide service for the vessel's personnel. Equipment shall be of industrial marine type. Equipment suggestions are mentioned below. 5.5.2

Range, Oven and Broiler

Electric marine range Toastmaster, Model NO G20A2RB, all-purpose, all CRES including back, cooking top and oven under. Model 4172-D back shelf broiler oven, or equal. 5.5.3

Griddle Top Range and Oven

Electric, griddle top range and oven, Toastmaster Model No. G20G1RB, with Model BS36D back shelf or equal. 5.5.4

Deep Fat Fryer

A deep fat frying machine with full size basket, Toastmaster G14C4 or equal. 5.5.5

Sinks

Sinks shall be constructed of not less than 20 gauge stainless steel, ground flush and polished. Sinks shall be provided with stainless steel lever type waste outlet with overflow, with CRES perforated strainers. Sanitizing sink shall be fitted with heater and thermostat. Undersides of sinks to be coated with a sound deadening material. 5.5.6

Racks

Stainless steel racks or shelves for pots, pans, utensils, etc., with sea rails, shall be provided as necessary. 5.5.7

Cabinets

Overhead cabinets measuring 380 mm deep x 610 mm high with length as required for proper stowage of items or as indicated in the Contract Plans. Cabinets shall be provided with shelves and doors where indicated. Doors shall be capable of being secured during transit. 5.5.8

Refrigerators


Rev. 0

6

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Galley - Hobart Model No HS-1, 0.614 cubic meters, stainless steel or equal. Mess room - Hobart Model No. JI, 0.215 cubic meters, under counter type stainless steel or equal. 5.5.9

Freezer

Hobart Model No. HSF-1, 0.614 cubic feet, stainless steel or equal. 5.5.10

Icemaker

Scotsman Model No. 205JSS, 91 kg per day capacity or equal. 5.5.11

Slicing Machine

Hobart Model No. 512TMS or equal. 5.5.12

Can Opener

Table style, Edlund Model No. 1 or equal. 5.5.13

Mixer

Hobart Model D-300 or equal. Mixer shall have CRES mixing bowl with standard 30-quart equipment, including all standard attachments. Stowage for attachments shall be provided. Unit shall be mounted on a stainless steel pipe pedestal. 5.5.14

Coffee Maker

Vaculator, Model No. VAC NKLP1/J with warmer unit Model No. J, complete with CRES decanters, or equal. CRES sea rails are to be provided. 5.5.15

Toaster

Toastmaster ID2-2 or equal complete with a 3-wire cord and plug shall be provided. The toaster shall have a 4-slice capacity and be bulkhead mounted (on a shelf). 5.5.16

Water Cooler

Halsey Taylor, Model SW-13-A or equal, stainless steel finish, wall hung, electric, self-contained, drinking fountains shall be provided as shown on the Contract Plans. All units to be fitted with external replaceable cartridge type filters. 5.5.17

Food Waste Disposer Unit

Red Goat or equal under counter type, stainless steel casing. 5.5.18

Dishwasher

Hobart Model AM-12 straight through or equal. Automatically timed, with CRES electric hot water booster heater. 5.5.19

Galley Hoods


Rev. 0

7


Hoods shall be provided over the griddle, deep fat fryer and range. An exhaust fan shall be provided in the hood. The fan shall be controlled by a switch conveniently installed. Hoods are to be of stainless steel. A fixed fire extinguisher system shall be installed in the hoods over the ranges and deep fat fryer. 5.5.20

Ice Cream Maker

Taylormate 152 or equal. 5.5.21

Milk Dispenser

Electric with self-contained refrigeration unit, CRES interior and exterior. 5.5.22

Beverage Dispenser

2 x 2 Compartment, Electric with self-contained refrigeration unit 5.5.23

Garbage Can with Cover

75 Liter, galvanized steel. 5.5.24

Hot Food and Cold Food Tables

Stainless steel construction and located as per the Contract Plans, self-contained with built in heating or cooling units. 5.5.25

Equipment Supplied by Owner

Silverware, glassware, chinaware, linen (sheet, blankets, pillowcase, towels, etc.), galley utensils. 5.5.26

Serving and Dirty Dish Return Hatch

To be self-released operable from either side. To be as per Regulatory Body requirements. 5.5.27

Potato Peeler

12.7 kg Potato peeler to be installed in galley. 5.5.28

Eye Wash Unit

An eye wash unit is to be installed in the galley and as listed in Section 7 of this specification. 5.5.29

Trash Compactor

A trash compactor is to be installed on the main deck. Worktables and dressers, stainless steel with drawers and shelves underneath, battens, etc., as required to provide adequate and ergonomic workspace for food preparation.


Rev. 0

8


5.6

DIRTY TEA ROOMS (SMOKING AND NON-SMOKING)

The dirty tea room shall be arranged according to the Contract Plans and shall be outfitted with the following furnishings:

5.7

•

Table and benches for eight persons.

•

Coffee Maker

•

Hot Water Dispenser

•

Beverage Dispenser

•

Sink, wash hand basin and towel dispenser

•

Counter with cabinets below and shelves above

•

Wall Shelf

•

A total of sixteen double coat hooks shall be installed on a clear bulkhead

HARDWARE 5.7.1

Locks, Keys, Etc.

All hardware shall be of heavy-duty severe service marine type. All doors shall be provided with locks, hold-back hooks, rubber tipped bumpers, knobs, handles, butts and hinges, escutcheons, roses, push plates, kick plates, etc., as required to serve the space intended. Special consideration shall be paid to noise prevention from the selection of the doors models. All doors in accommodation spaces shall be provided with locks and latch sets with mortise, cylindrical or rim type cases. All locks shall be keyed differently except where there is more than one door to the same compartment, in which case these doors shall be keyed alike. Each door lock to living spaces shall be provided with one key for each occupant plus two spares. All other spaces requiring keys shall be provided with total of three keys. Two master keys shall be provided, one for all accommodation spaces and the other for machinery spaces, etc. Both master keys shall be keyed to one grand master key. Two spares shall be provided for each master key and grand master key. Steel lockers and chests are to be provided with facilities for padlocks. 5.7.2

Door Closers

All door closers shall be provided with "magnetic hold open" feature, except access ladder doors and those leading to restricted spaces. Door closers for air locks and external areas shall be extra heavyduty severe service duty. The door holders shall be connected to the fire detection system. All held open doors shall be released upon detection of fire or smoke by the fire detection system.


Rev. 0

9


5.8

SANITARY FIXTURES

Sanitary fixtures shall be furnished and installed as specified herein and in the approximate locations as shown on Contract Plans. See Section 4. The fixtures and accessories described herein are those of Toto, INA or Owner approval equal. All sanitary fixture piping within the accommodations shall be concealed where practicable.

5.9

CLOCKS

The Builders shall provide and install wall mounted battery operated electric clocks with approximately 300 mm diameter faces, which will be synchronized from a master clock system, in the following locations: • Mess Room • Galley • Radio Room • Engine Control Room • Offices • Recreation Rooms • Jacking Control Room • Helicopter Waiting Room • Dirty Tea Room The radio room shall be provided with a mariner’s clock, showing radio silence periods.

5.10

ACCOMMODATIONS OUTFITTING

The Builder shall furnish and install the following, but not limited to, items to complete the outfitting of the accommodations. All items are subject to the Owner’s review and approval. • • • • • •

5.11

Galley utensils and cook’s tools Silverware, china, glassware, etc. Linens, blankets, towels, pillows, etc. Gym equipment Library items Entertainment equipment, i.e. LCD flat screen TV, VCR, DVD, radios, etc.

HOSPITAL

The Builder shall furnish and install the following furniture, equipment, medical supplies, etc., to provide a hospital that meets all Regulatory Body requirements and the Owner’s approval: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Berth, – minimum 200 x 90 cm, 3 drawers below berth Examination table Medicine locker with medical supplies as approved by the Owner Medicine safe with medical supplies as approved by the Owner Radio shelf, CRES – 560 mm (22”) x 180 mm (7”) Table, night – approximately 380 mm (15”) x 300 mm (12”) bulkhead mounted with table lamp Bookrack, single


Rev. 0

10

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Steel locker – double, 460 mm (18”) x 530 mm (21”) x 1.830 m (72”), enclosed base Examination lamp, floor pedestal type Chair, side Waste receptacle – foot pedal, removable liner, all CRES Wastebasket Writing desk w/desk lamp Tissue dispenser Refrigerator (170 liters)


Rev. 0

11


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 6.0 - LEGS - STRUCTURE, SUPPORTS, JACKS, & HANDLING ........................... 1 6.1

LEG STRUCTURE ..................................................................................................................... 1

6.2

JACKS AND RACK CHOCKS ................................................................................................ 2

6.3

MISCELLANEOUS.................................................................................................................... 4


SECTION 6.0 - LEGS - STRUCTURE, SUPPORTS, JACKS, & HANDLING 6.1

LEG STRUCTURE

The three triangular cross-section leg structures shall be of size, configuration, and scantlings as shown on the Contract Plans. All components shall be of steel with properties generally as indicated below and confirmed suitable by the Classification Society for Class. 6.1.1

Leg Racks

Material - Quenched and tempered steel ASTM A517 GR Q Modified, level A UT inspection, 690 MPa yield, 790/965 MPa tensile, Charpy V-Notch (CVN) minimum average, longitudinal direction 69 J at T/4 thickness at -37 °C and 69 J at T/2 thickness at -27 °C, flame cut teeth free of cracks and laminations. Quarter depth hardness 260 Brinell minimum to 286 Brinell maximum, vacuum degassed, fine grained practice, sulfur content maximum 0.01 %, Carbon content maximum 0.18 %. Rack flame cut tolerances shall be as follows: • • • • • • • • • • • • •

tooth to tooth (pitch) -304.8 mm ± 0.20 mm tip to tip (teeth) - 838.2 mm + 0.76 mm root to root (teeth) - 464.7 mm + 0.76 mm offset opposite teeth - ± 0.20 mm rack flatness – 3 mm in 4 teeth along a zero datum line rack length – 3 mm in 4 teeth rack length - (304.8 mm ± 0.14 mm) x number of teeth camber less than 3 mm in 36 teeth tooth cut - square with edge within 0.01 mm/mm rack thickness tooth cut surface finish - 250 micro inch pressure angle - 30°± 5 minutes rack thickness – 177.8 mm ± plate mill tolerances of ± 1.52 mm rack butt welds shall maintain tooth pitch (304.8 mm) within ± 1.27 mm

6.1.2

Leg Chords

Material - Quenched and tempered steel ASTM A517 GR Q Modified, level A UT inspection, 690 MPa yield, 790/965 MPa tensile, Charpy V-Notch (CVN) minimum average, longitudinal direction 69 J at T/4 thickness at -37 °C and 69 J at T/2 thickness at -27 °C, fine grained practice, 0.010 % sulfur maximum, Carbon content maximum 0.18 %. Leg chords are to be heat-treated or stress relieved after forming. Chord Tolerance - ½ round, height and width - ± 3 mm 6.1.3

Diagonal Braces and Horizontal Braces

Material – 520 MPa minimum yield, minimum longitudinal CVN impact test 41 J at -40 °C or 45 J at -37 °C, Carbon content maximum 0.18 %, seamless pipe. 6.1.4

Internal Braces

Material - ASTM A106 GR B or C. •

Minimum longitudinal CVN impact test 27 J at -27 °C, seamless pipe.

The diamond braces must also meet the below listed ABS requirements:


Rev. 0

1

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C • • •

Carbon content maximum 0.21 % Mn minimum 0.60 % fine grain treatment for t>25 mm

6.1.5

Spud Cans

Material - as shown on the Contract Plans The spud cans at the bottom of the legs are to be watertight. The spud cans are designed and constructed so they are capable of providing full structural support independent of their contents. Bolted manhole covers shall be provided in the top of each spudcan so that each segment or compartment can be properly ventilated and accessed in case repairs are necessary. 6.1.6

Leg Fabrication

All chord and rack butt welds, including butt welds of racks, are to be fully ultrasonically tested and X-rayed. All other welds are to be fully ultrasonically tested. All welds are to be of a quality that meets the approval of the Classification Society. All non-destructive testing of repairs of defective welds shall employ the same methods of testing which proved it defective. The chord sections are to be watertight throughout, and are to be proven sound by UT and MPI. Welding and repair procedures shall be developed by Builder in accordance with consideration of hydrogen induced cracking in high strength steels as may be caused by H2S. The completed leg assemblies shall be true to dimension, as described in the Contract Plans. The rack sections shall be carefully installed to maintain accurate tooth pitch through the entire vertical range. Rack teeth in way of upper guides, with legs in all towing positions, shall be built-up to remove clearance between guide and teeth tips.

6.2

JACKS ASSEMBLIES AND RACK CHOCKS 6.2.1

Jacks

There shall be provided nine (9) elevating jack assemblies, each consisting of six (6) pinions (total 54) with necessary gearing and AC motors and integral rack chock assemblies. The pinion, gearbox, electric motor and brake assemblies shall be provided by the Designer (Friede and Goldman, Ltd.). The jack house assemblies shall be installed in the leg well with jigs to maintain leg to guide tolerance. Guide to leg tolerances shall be verified during installation and after the installation is complete. Jacking and rack chock drive assemblies shall be watertight. There shall be provided a Jacking Control console in the jacking control room of the vessel. Builder shall furnish and install all necessary power and control wiring, motor ducting, etc., as required by these Specifications and the jacking system designer (Friede and Goldman, Ltd.) to complete the installation of the system. Jack Lifting Ratings Normal Jacking


340 tonnes/Pinion @ 500 hours

Rev. 0

2


Preload Jacking

521 tonnes/Pinion @ 55 hours

Normal Holding

544 tonnes/Pinion

Storm Holding

646 tonnes/Pinion

Jacking Speed

0.46 m/min.

The jacking unit shall be of an F&G-type cartridge arrangement and the method of attachment to the jackcase shall permit easy installation and removal. . The primary drive pinions shall be manufactured from a through-hardened material with sufficient strength and hardness to ensure the rack and not the pinion is subject to wear during normal operation. The width of the primary drive pinions shall be at least 277 mm. The jack houses shall be reinforced with 50 mm x 200 mm steel flat bars to compensate for the rack chock access cutouts, if such cutouts are found to be necessary. The safety factor against failure for the maximum static holding condition shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies. 6.2.2

F&G Rack Chock® System The leg fixation system (rack chock® system) is to be provided by the Designer (Friede and Goldman, Ltd).

The leg fixation system shall consist of: QUANTITY

DESCRIPTION

18

6-TOOTH CHOCKS

36

VERTICAL SCREW JACKS

36

HORIZONTAL SCREW JACKS

1

RIG SET RETRACTING UNITS

1

RIG SET MISCELLANEOUS FASTENINGS

36

VERTICAL SCREW JACK DRIVES

36

HORIZONTAL SCREW JACK DRIVES

3

HYDRAULIC POWER UNITS

1

RIG SET VALVES, CONTROL HOSES

9

CONTROL CONSOLES

Greasing points are to be provided with grease lines manifolded to convenient locations where necessary. A means of releasing stuck chock elements is to be provided with the rack chock® system.


Rev. 0

3


The screw jacks are to be fully tested to demonstrate adequate strength under maximum design loads and satisfactory performance under operational loads.

6.3

MISCELLANEOUS 6.3.1

Leg Markings

On each leg, 25 mm high x 150 mm wide markings shall be provided at 300 mm intervals, from 9.0 meters above the bottom of the spud cans to the top of the legs. Arabic numerals 6" high shall indicate the height above bottom of cans on 1.5 meter intervals. In addition, a prominent mark shall be placed on each leg that lines up with an indicator on the adjacent jack tower to indicate the required leg position(s) for towing. These marks and indicators shall be easily visible from the jacking control console. Marking shall be painted in bright contrasting colors of same type coating as applied to the legs. Markings shall be located as to be visible on all legs from the jacking control room. 6.3.2

Jet Piping

Piping for jetting systems shall be as specified in Section 14 and as shown on the Contract Plans. All piping shall be securely attached to the bracing members of the legs in an approved manner. Spudcans will be fitted with top and bottom jets, and both systems, including jetting lines, are to be rated for a working pressure of 104 bar. All jetting lines shall be of the same size. Piping shall be structurally adequate and suitably arranged to guide and support deep well pumps. 6.3.3

Jack Access

There shall be provided walkways on the jack bracing between each jack case of a leg. 6.3.4

Leg Ladders and Platforms

There shall be provided one leg ladder in each leg in a configuration that complies with Regulatory Bodies requirements. Builder shall also fabricate and install work platforms at the top of each leg. The platforms are to be safely accessible from the leg ladder and provided with standard three tier pipe handrails. It shall be possible to service all hazard and other lights located at the top of the leg while standing on the platform. 6.3.5

Cathodic Protection

There shall be provided sacrificial anodes on the legs. Installation shall provide for an eight-year (minimum) service life. 6.3.6

Leg-Mounted Sea Water Towers

Three (3) single sea water towers shall be provided, one on each aft leg well and one in the forward leg well. The sea water tower support/guide arrangement shall utilize the hull for vertical support and the leg spudcan jetting lines for lateral support (i.e. as a guide and restraint). The spudcan shall feature a pump support pad should the pump be allowed to rest on the spud can. The placement of the sea water piping shall be as shown on the Contract Plans. The pumps and sea water towers shall be capable of being handled by Vessel’s cranes or other Builder furnished system.


Rev. 0

4

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Each sea water pump shall be capable of obtaining electrical supply from the emergency generator MCC. At each sea water connection point, the Builder will install cathodic / anti-fouling protection spool unit(s). The selected unit(s) provided will not affect the design performance of the pumps or the sea water tower system.


Rev. 0

5


TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 7.0 - SAFETY EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................................... 1

7.1

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1

7.2

LIFE RAFTS..................................................................................................................... 1

7.3

LIFE BOATS .................................................................................................................... 1

7.4

LIFE PRESERVERS ........................................................................................................ 1

7.5

LIFE BUOYS ................................................................................................................... 2

7.6

FIRE MAINS AND STATIONS ...................................................................................... 2

7.7

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ................................................................................................. 2

7.8

PERSONNEL TRANSFER NET ..................................................................................... 2

7.9

BREATHING APPARATUS ........................................................................................... 3

7.10 STRETCHERS ................................................................................................................. 3 7.11 FIREMAN'S OUTFIT ...................................................................................................... 3 7.12 POLLUTION ABATEMENT SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT ...................................... 3 7.13 GAS DETECTION SYSTEMS (H2S and CH4)................................................................ 3 7.14 RESCUE EQUIPMENT FOR HELICOPTER PLATFORM ........................................... 6 7.15 MISCELLANEOUS SAFETY EQUIPMENT ................................................................. 6 7.16 LINE THROWING APPARATUS .................................................................................. 7 7.17 ROCKET PARACHUTE SIGNAL .................................................................................. 7 7.18 SMOKE AND FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM ................................................................. 7 7.19 BREATHING AIR SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................... 8 7.20 SHOWER / EYEWASH STATIONS ............................................................................. 10 7.21 SURVIVAL SUITS ........................................................................................................ 10 7.22 PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT .................................................................. 10


SECTION 7.0 - SAFETY EQUIPMENT 7.1

GENERAL

Safety equipment shall be provided and installed on the Vessel as specified herein, and the equipment and its installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies for a self-elevating drilling unit with a crew as stated in section 1.2. The location of all safety equipment shall be generally shown on the Contract Plans and the rig’s safety, escape way and fire plans.

7.2

LIFE RAFTS

Davit-launchable, inflatable life rafts, sufficient for the total rig crew as per Regulatory Body rules and as stated in Section 1.2 and two slewing launching davits shall be installed. Rafts shall be self-inflating, complete with cover and survival gear, and suitably outfitted for launching at high air gaps.

7.3

LIFE BOATS

Three (3) life boats shall be installed, sufficient for the total rig crew as per Regulatory Body rules and as stated in Section 1.2, that are of reinforced fiberglass construction, totally enclosed, diesel propelled with electric-hydraulic start, engine block heaters (oil) and saltwater cooling. Each life boat shall be fitted with fuel tank, life lines, row locks, rudder and tiller, built-in plastic foam filled buoyancy compartments, builtin provision compartments, independent equipment locker, handrails, grab rails, H2S breathing air system and releasing gear. Full ocean equipment and provisions shall be in accordance with the ABS, IMO, and SOLAS requirements. The unitized gravity davits for the life boats shall be of an appropriate type fitted with blocks, sheaves, wire rope falls, galvanized turnbuckles, holding devices, winch and drive system and installed on superstructure foundations that provide access for entry and handling (see Section 3). The winch drives shall be electrically driven fitted with brakes, clutches, and hand cranks. Starters and switches shall also be waterproof. The hoist speed shall be in accordance with ABS and SOLAS requirements. A standalone MOB/FRC (man overboard / fast rescue craft) rubber tube, aluminum bottom, complete with an inboard diesel engine, water jet propelled unit. The MOB/FRC shall be launched and retrieved by its own davit. The MOB/FRC and launching system shall comply with the IMO-LSA code.

7.4

LIFE PRESERVERS

Stowage for sufficient for the total rig crew as per Regulatory Body rules and as stated in Section 1.2, life jackets and work vests shall be provided. One life jacket shall be stowed in the staterooms of the Vessel’s accommodations for each occupant. An additional 50 % of the required number of the life jackets shall be stored in lockers at the lifeboats and other commonly occupied work areas. Sufficient deck mounted Fiberglass lockers with stainless steel hinges and hardware shall be provided for the lifeboat and work area life jackets. The lockers shall be clearly labeled and located by the builder.


Rev. 0

1


7.5

LIFE BUOYS

Stowage for ten life buoys shall be provided. The buoys shall be stowed in suitable galvanized steel brackets secured to the railings and/or bulwark. The buoys shall be provided with a life line and water lights. Two of the buoys shall be arranged with smoke signals and quick release.

7.6

FIRE MAINS AND STATIONS

Fire mains and stations shall be provided and installed as specified under Sections 13 and 14, "Piping Systems" of these Specifications. Each hydrant shall be equipped with cotton/polyester jacket rubber lined hose, combination fog / stream nozzles and spanner. Two (2) applicators with mounting clips are to be installed as directed by the Owner. One (1) of 1.2 m (4 ft.) and one (1) of 3 m (10 ft.) in length

7.7

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 7.7.1

Fixed Systems

For the spaces listed in Section 14.16 of the Specification, a water mist smothering system shall be provided with distribution piping for dousing fires in each individual space. The number, type and location of discharge outlets shall be such as to give a uniform distribution throughout the space as required by the Classification Society and the Regulatory Bodies. The monitoring of the system shall be furnished as per the Regulatory Bodies and consist of a complete control panel located in the radio room or another continuously manned office as selected by the Owner. Pneumatically operated automatic ventilation shut down dampers shall be provided. These are to be tied into the fire detection system. All equipment shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer with experience in the production of marine firefighting equipment. Instruction plates shall be posted at suitable locations. For a more detailed description of the water mist system and other firefighting systems, see Section 14. 7.7.2

Portable Equipment

Portable fire extinguishers shall be mounted in fiberglass or approved molded plastic boxes with stainless steel hardware or in protected areas on suitable brackets. All portable extinguisher locations shall be clearly marked and numbered. Spare charges for extinguishers shall be furnished as required by Regulatory Bodies. Portable extinguishers shall be provided in machinery spaces and living quarters and at fire stations where practicable as shown in the Contract Plans and as may be additionally required by the Classification Society or the Regulatory Bodies.

7.8

PERSONNEL TRANSFER NET

Two ring bottom nets suitable for transferring personnel to and from boats, by means of the deck cranes, shall be provided and stowed on the Vessel. The net shall be padded and covered with strong canvas fabric to provide a floor to store baggage on. The edges of the net shall be attached to a sturdy steel frame for Friede & Goldman, Ltd., Houston, TX USA

Rev. 0

2

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C lifting the net. The height of the net when lifting shall be about 2 m and the net shall be designed to safely and comfortably handle four persons and their gear. Each net shall have a 4 m long polypropylene tag line with no knots or loops and safety sling.

7.9

BREATHING APPARATUS

A minimum of six (6) complete compressed air 30-minute self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) shall be supplied per Section 18 and installed on the Vessel. Apparatus shall be of a pressure demand type suitable for rescue operations in contaminated compartments on the Vessel. A spare cylinder shall be provided and stowed with the equipment. The total number, location, and stowage of SCBA shall meet with the approval of the Regulatory Bodies.

7.10

STRETCHERS

Two aluminum frame, Stokes, wire basket litters, suitable for handling injured personnel at sea and one aluminum frame scoop/break apart stretcher for immobilization of personnel with spinal injuries, shall be provided per Section 18 and stowed on the Vessel.

7.11

FIREMAN'S OUTFIT

A minimum of six firemen's outfits shall be installed in fiberglass storage cabinets and/or fixtures, placed and mounted as required by the Regulatory Bodies.

7.12

POLLUTION ABATEMENT SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

Appropriate equipment, systems, and control measures to contain, treat and control pollution from the Vessel to permit the operation of the Vessel without restrictions on all navigable waters in accordance with Regulatory Body requirements shall be provided. The systems and equipment shall be comprised of, but not be limited to, the following:

7.13

•

Contaminated Drain System

•

Sewage Collection and Treatment System

•

Oily Water Separator System

•

Cuttings Cleaning System - space to be provided

•

Zero Pollution / Single Point Discharge System

•

Shale Shaker ‘Running’ Lights

•

Pollution “SPILL KITS”

GAS DETECTION SYSTEMS (H2S AND CH4) 7.13.1

General

A builder furnished combustible gas and H2S monitoring and alarm system as described below shall be installed which will be capable of detecting the presence of combustible gas and H2S in the areas described. The monitoring and alarm system shall be a self-contained gas detection panel and shall comply with the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies. 7.14.2

Sensors


Rev. 0

3


The sensors will be of the 4-20 mA type and shall be individually wired to the gas detection system analog input module. The three type of sensors and areas of application are described as follows: Primary Locations: Primary sensors are those placed along the route of the well return flow to detect either combustible gas or H2S if it breaks into the atmosphere. There will be voting system with multiple sensors in various locations that are prone to gas exposure and the detectors will give a pre-alarm to the addressable fire and gas system if one out of three detects gas, when two out of three detect gas, then an alarm will be given on the main fire and gas panel. Once three gas detectors detect gas, the appropriate alarm will sound on the unit’s PA/GA system. The following lists the locations of primary sensors: •

BOP Area

•

Drill Floor

•

Mud Return Trough

•

Mud Pit Room

•

Gumbo Shaker Area

•

Mud Processing Room

•

Derrick Gas Vent Line

•

3d party units

•

All accommodation air intakes

•

Breathing air compressor intake(s)

Secondary Locations: Secondary sensors are those positioned in areas where gas, if present, is likely to migrate from the well fluids to the adjacent spaces. These include but are not limited to: •

Mud Pump Room

•

Engine Room

•

Switchgear / Engine Control Rooms

Safety Locations: Safety sensors are those placed at locations where gas, if present, necessitates the operation of the ventilation emergency shutdown. The following are the locations of the safety sensors:

7.13.3

•

Galley Ventilation Intake Fan

•

Machinery Space Ventilation Intake Fans

•

Radiator(s) adjacent to cantilever which fall into the Zone 1 or 2 area classification)

Sensor Location


Rev. 0

4

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Where sensors are not easily accessible for “hands free” calibration, e.g. ventilation intake plenums, they shall be provided with fixed 6 mm stainless steel tubing from deck level to the sensor head for application of the calibration gas test sample. Sensors shall not be located where they are continually subjected to contamination by oil-based mud. Where such locations are unavoidable, sensor heads shall be provided with louvered covers suitably designed for ease of removal and to eliminate direct contact with the contaminant. All sensors shall be fit for installation in a hazardous area (ATEX approved) and all outdoor sensors shall be fitted with weather guards. 7.13.4

Calibration and Testing

The gas detection system will provide a software calibration mode for maintenance purposes. When in calibration mode, a visual alarm shall be generated the main gas detection panel indicating that the sensor has been disabled. The alarm shall remain active until such time as the sensor has been returned to service. The calibration mode shall provide a graphical display of the application of the gas test sample and shall inform the technician of any sensor head which is not within tolerance. 7.13.5

Alarms

The gas detection system panel shall continuously monitor each 4-20mA sensor input for detection of an alarm condition at a frequency no less than one sample per second. The panel shall generate an alarm on detection of any of the following conditions: •

7 ppm H2S - Low level H2S

•

14 ppm H2S - High level H2S

•

20 % LEL - Low level combustible gas

•

50 % LEL - High level combustible gas

On detection of an alarm condition, the gas detection panel shall indicate the location of the alarm on its display field. Audible and visual alarms shall be generated at each manned control station, i.e. the engine room alarm panel, toolpusher’s office and the drill floor. The alarm shall display the type of gas detected and the alert level. Additionally, an audible and visual alarm at the main gas detection panel shall be generated should any sensor or alarm indicator, PC board, etc. develop a detectable fault condition. Public Address: An interface shall be provided to the Public Address System, which shall automatically generate the appropriate preset audible alarms according to the aforementioned voting sequence. Visual Alarms: Visual alarm lights (blue for toxic gas, yellow for explosive gas) shall be provided in high noise areas and shall be suitably mounted and grouped for high visibility. The visual alarm system shall be fully integrated within the PA/GA system and shall be wired directly to the digital output or alarm module.


Rev. 0

5


7.14

RESCUE EQUIPMENT FOR HELICOPTER PLATFORM

The following minimum rescue equipment complying with Cap 437 and other Regulatory Bodies shall be provided and placed in crash boxes within easy access on or near the helicopter platform: •

fire axes, Elkhart, 2.7 Kg

•

1 crow bar (large)

•

1 hack saw with 6 spare blades

•

1 metal hook

•

1 harness knife and sheath

•

1 fire blanket

•

1 cutting pliers/metal cutter

•

1 adjustable wrench

•

1 bolt cutters

•

2 piece ladder

•

1 set of assorted screw drivers

•

1 set of fire resistant gloves

•

life line

•

self contained breathing apparatus (complete)

•

power cutting tool

Other equipment as especially required: • •

1 set of instructions in use of emergency equipment First aid equipment in a metal waterproof case.

The Builder shall provide a labeled fiberglass locker with stainless steel hardware to stow the above equipment.

7.15

MISCELLANEOUS SAFETY EQUIPMENT

The following minimum safety equipment, and as required by the Regulatory Bodies shall be provided and installed by the Builder: 2 2 4 6 1 2 1 4 1 Lot Lot

Portable combination gas detectors, explosive gas, H2S and oxygen level Flame safety lamps Embarkation ladders of rope or light weight chain construction Breathing apparatus Safety belt (harness type) with 100 m (300’) of 9.5 mm (3/8”) Dacron line Safety belts (monkey board) Resuscitator Climbing belts Derrick escape system Fire axes Sand


Rev. 0

6


7.16

LINE THROWING APPARATUS

A line-throwing appliance shall be provided and stowed on the Vessel per Section 18.

7.17

ROCKET PARACHUTE SIGNAL

Twelve (12) rocket parachute flares shall be provided and stowed on the Vessel per Section 18.

7.18

SMOKE AND FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM 7.18.1

General

The smoke and fire detection and alarm system shall be Builder furnished. The system shall provide coverage for all spaces on the entire drilling unit. 7.18.2

Sensors

The sensors shall be of the addressable type and shall be wired in loops to the fire detection panel. Various types of sensor shall be used depending on the area to be monitored and in accordance with regulatory body requirements. There will be multiple smoke or fire detectors in various locations and the detectors will give a pre-alarm to the addressable fire and gas system if one out of three detects smoke or fire, when two out of three detect smoke or fire, then an alarm will be given on the main fire and gas panel. Once three smoke or fire detectors detect smoke, the appropriate alarm will sound on the unit’s PA/GA system. A manual call station pushbutton, when activated will always give a direct fire alarm to the main fire and gas panel as well as the PA/GA system and start the main fire pump. The sensor types to be used are:

7.18.3

•

Smoke detectors

•

Rate of rise heat detectors

•

Flame (UV) detectors

•

Manual call stations

•

Sprinkler system flow switches (Water Mist system)

Sensor Locations

An appropriate type of sensor shall be mounted in areas taking into consideration the following: •

Likelihood of smoke or fire detection

•

Possible vibration problems

•

Dust or corrosive atmospheres

•

Accessibility for calibration

The location of each sensor head shall be determined by the Builder and approved by the Regulatory Bodies and the Owner. 7.18.4

Calibration and Testing


Rev. 0

7


The fire detection panel shall provide a test mode for maintenance purposes. When in calibration mode, a visual alert shall be activated on the fire detection panel that the sensor has been disabled. The alert shall remain active until such time as the sensor is returned to normal service. The calibration mode shall provide a visual reaction to the application of the test sample. 7.18.5 Alarms The fire detection system shall continuously monitor each addressable loop for detection of an alarm condition at a frequency no less than one sample per second. On detection of an alarm condition, audio and visual alarms shall be activated at the fire detection panel and at each manned control station, i.e. the engine room alarm panel, toolpusher’s office and the drill floor. The fire detection system shall indicate the location of the alarm. The alarm display shall also provide a description of the exact location of the active alarm. Additionally, the program shall generate an audible and visual alarm at each control station should any sensor develop a detectable fault condition. Public Address: An interface shall be provided to the Public Address System, which shall automatically generate the appropriate preset audible alarms. Visual Alarms: Visual alarm lights (red) shall be provided in high noise areas and shall be suitably mounted and grouped for high visibility. The visual alarm system shall be fully integrated within the PA/GA system and shall be wired directly in the fire detection systems addressable loops.

7.19

BREATHING AIR SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 7.19.1

Purpose

The purpose of the system is to provide an adequate amount of breathing air, from manifolds at the TSR (Temporary Safe Refuge) and other selected locations, to allow all personnel to muster, work and/or evacuate the rig in the event of a hazardous concentration of H2S in the atmosphere. 7.19.2

Compressors

Two breathing air compressors are proposed to be furnished by the Builder. Space must be reserved for these compressors to be located port and starboard on the machinery deck. The compressors to be provided shall have 3 phase, AC motors. Separate sections shall be reserved in the MCC with cable runs from the MCC to the compressor locations. One of the compressors shall also be tied into the emergency generator MCC. The compressors shall have automatic condensate dumps, drain lines shall also be provided at each location. Air intake lines of sufficient size non-metal pipe shall run from the compressors to the forward corner quarter’s roof. A shut down of this system on detection of any combustible or hazardous gas at the compressor air inlets shall be provided. 7.19.3

Cascade Storage Cylinders

The future location for 50 DOT cascade cylinders (builder furnished) is on the main deck, adjacent to the forward accommodation bulkhead. When provided, these shall be in racks. The footprint shall be approximately 12 m long by 1 m wide. Foundations for the gas racks shall be required to be provided by Builder during the construction phase.


Rev. 0

8

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C 7.19.4

Distribution Piping

A system of breathing air system piping shall be furnished and installed by Builder throughout the rig to work areas and places identified as mustering/working/ briefing/evacuation areas. This piping shall be routed in conformance with the general arrangement layout review and shall be physically protected by an angle iron cover where exposed to damage. The locations to be serviced by this piping system include: Machinery Deck •

Engine Room

•

Switchgear / Engine Control Rooms

•

Mud Pump Room

•

Mud Pit Room

•

Sack Store Room

•

Mud Mixing Area

Main Deck •

Cranes

•

Mud Logging Unit

•

Cement Unit

•

Upper Mud Processing Area

•

Pipe Deck/Main Deck/Substructure

•

BOP Area/BOP Control System Area

•

Jacking Control Room

•

Radio Room

•

Life Boat Stations

•

Muster Stations

Drill Floor •

Drill Floor

•

Driller’s cabin

•

Casing Stabbing Basket (portable)

•

Monkey Board

All piping is specified as 12 mm NB diameter, 1.65 mm wall thickness, 310 Bar working pressure with a 4:1 safety factor. It shall be fully annealed type 316 seamless, stainless hydraulic tubing to ASTM A269 or ASTM A213 or equivalent. Hardness to be RB 80 or less.


Rev. 0

9

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C All connections are to be properly applied Swagelok stainless steel fittings. All terminations are to be plugged. The entire system to be pressure/leak tested to 465 Bar with a dry medium. Tubing runs shall be arranged to avoid creating traps for water accumulation. Where traps are unavoidable, a means shall be provided for draining the section without compromising system integrity.

7.20

SHOWER / EYEWASH STATIONS Combination shower / eyewash stations are to be installed in the sack storage rooms, the mud pump room, engine room, upper and lower cantilever mud process rooms, drill floor and elsewhere as indicated on the Contract Plans and as required by the Owner, Classification Societies or Regulatory Bodies. A portable eyewash kit is to be installed near the monkey board and the casing stabbing basket.

7.21

SURVIVAL SUITS Builder shall furnish Regulatory Body approved survival suits. One (1) suit for each occupant shall be stored in lockers in all staterooms. Additional suits shall be stored in lockers at the lifeboats and other commonly occupied work areas. Sufficient deck mounted fiberglass lockers with stainless steel hinges and hardware shall be provided by the Builder for the lifeboat and work area survival suits. The lockers shall be clearly labeled and located as determined by the builder.

7.22

PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT Appropriate personal protection equipment shall be provided in all areas where personnel are working with hazardous materials, such as mud additives in the mud mixing area. Rubber apron, rubber mud resistant boots, rubber long sleeved gloves and protective face masks with a breathing filter shall be made available and kept in lockers close to the working areas. For personnel working on the drill floor during “wet” trips, adequate protective clothing should be available to protect the individual from the splashing of drilling fluids. Eye wash stations and safety showers shall be located in strategic locations where personnel are working with mud fluids and chemicals. See section 7.20. In the electrical switchboard rooms, equipment shall be available to safely work with electrical equipment; this may not be limited to rubber aprons, rubber boots, long sleeved rubber gloves, specially insulated fuse pullers, grab hook and certified rubber mats in front of all switchboards.


Rev. 0

10


TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 8.0 - PAINTING AND MARKING ............................................................................................................. 1 8.1

GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................... 1

8.2

PAINT SYSTEM - INTERIOR, EXTERIOR, TANKS .................................................................................. 2

8.3

MARKINGS - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................ 13

8.4

VESSEL'S NAME......................................................................................................................................... 13

8.5

BUILDER'S NAMEPLATES ....................................................................................................................... 13

8.6

DRAFT NUMERALS ................................................................................................................................... 13

8.7

LOAD LINE MARKINGS ........................................................................................................................... 13

8.8

LEG AND SEA WATER TOWER MARKINGS......................................................................................... 13

8.9

CANTILEVER MARKINGS........................................................................................................................ 13

8.10 COMPARTMENT LABELS ........................................................................................................................ 14 8.11 SAFETY MARKINGS.................................................................................................................................. 14 8.12 HVAC LABEL PLATES AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................... 14 8.13 NOTICE FRAMES ....................................................................................................................................... 14 8.14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND PLANS ........................................................................................... 14 8.15 MISCELLANEOUS...................................................................................................................................... 14 8.16 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM ........................................................................................................ 15


SECTION 8.0 - PAINTING AND MARKING 8.1

GENERAL

All paint, coatings, and finishing materials shall be high-grade commercial products of a quality satisfactory to the builder. The colors shall be in accordance with the builder’s color scheme. The Builder shall prepare and a painting and decorative schedule which shall include types and colors of coating material including sample of colors (color chips). The paints and coatings employed shall be those manufactured by Akzo Nobel (International Protective Coatings) or approved equal. Paint employed in a given coating system shall be from the same manufacturer. Methods and techniques of painting shall conform to good painting practice as described in the Steel Structures Painting Council manual, - Paint Application Specification #1- SSPC-PA-1-2011. When more than one coat is specified, subsequent coats shall not be applied until the preceding coating has become properly dry and hard and/or as recommended by the manufacturer. All intermediate coats shall contrast in color relative to the primer, each other and the topcoat. The topcoat color of all hull tanks and voids shall be a light color (i.e. not black, etc.) Angles, beams, brackets and flanges internal to tanks shall be stripe coated with brush application before applying each paint layer by conventional spray. Internal paint system requiring multiple coats to allow verification shall be coated in contrasting colors to allow verification of even coating. Stripe coats shall be applied by brush prior to application of full coats. Paint for stripe coating shall be brushing quality. Rollers may be used only for the application of the stripe coat and then only if they are of sufficient quality so as to prevent inclusions of roller wool. No priming or painting shall be done on the erection welds and fillet welds affecting water tightness of compartments or tanks required to be tested until completion of such tests, except as may be provided herein. All fixtures, display instrumentation, adjacent surfaces, label plates (including machinery), gaskets, walking treads, etc., shall be properly protected during painting. After completion of the work all dirt, smudges, paint and varnish, etc. shall be removed from the glass, plumbing fixtures, deck coverings, etc. Gouges or dents in exposed steel surfaces shall be smoothed by fairing or grinding of welds on non-structural bulkheads. Where gouges or dents are excessive an approved glazing compound may be employed after normal procedures have been used to their fullest possibilities. All parts or spaces not specifically mentioned or covered by the general clauses herein shall be cleaned and painted to conform to the surroundings or to comparable spaces. All interior and exterior steel surfaces of the spud cans at the bottom of each leg shall be left without blasting and left uncoated; protection shall be provided by a cathodic protection system as outlined in clause 18 of this section. All surfaces are to undergo pre-preparation by degreasing with an emulsion type solvent and pressure washing with fresh water, prior to primary and secondary preparation. BFE valves and loose items of equipment in ballast/preload tanks and void areas are to be supplied pre-coated in a compatible system to its surrounding area. All surface preparation is to be inspected and approved by the builder’s Representative before coating.


Rev. 0

1


8.2

PAINT SYSTEM - INTERIOR, EXTERIOR, TANKS

The schedule of preparation, type and buildup of the paint systems to be used throughout the rig are presented in Table 8.1 - Paint System, below.


Rev. 0

2

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Table 8.1 - Paint System INTERVAL BETWEEN COATS

LOCATION

NO. OF COATS

SHOP STEEL

1 A) HULL 1) LOAD WATERLINE TO KEEL (BOTTOM PLATING AND LEG WELLS) 2) MAIN DECK, SIDE TO LOAD WATERLINE, LEG WELLS, ELEVATING UNITS, BRACING AND PLATFORM

SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING SPECIFICATION AT SHOP ALL STEEL SURFACES SHALL BE ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANED TO SA 2.5 AND APPLY : ZINC SILICATE SHOP PRIMER (SEE NOTE 5) AFTER FABRICATION & ERECTION SPOT BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO SA 2.5. LIGHT SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS TO REMOVE SALT AND CONTAMINANTS, ETC.

MIN. HRS SEE NOTE 6

MAX. DAYS SEE NOTE 6 -

SEE NOTE 6

MINIMUM DRY FILM THICKNESS PER COAT MICRON

15

SEE NOTE 6

AND SPOT PRIME WITH ZINC RICH EPOXY PRIMER ON THE UNDERSIDE OF HULL ONLY.

1 1 1

ZINC-RICH EPOXY H.B. EPOXY MID COAT POLYURETHANE FINISH COAT, (COLOR TBD)

-

85 100 100

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, ETC. 3) WORKING DECKS A) DRILL FLOOR B) PIPE RACKS, MAIN DECK AND CANTILEVER 1 1

ULTRA HIGH BUILD / HIGH ABRASION EPOXY POLYURETHANE FINISH COAT, (COLOR TBD) NOTE: 1) 75 TO 100 MICRON ANCHOR PROFILE 2) NON SKID AGGREGATE ON DECK


Rev. 0

1500 75

3


LOCATION

NO. OF COATS

B) HELIPORT 1) TOPSIDE

SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING SPECIFICATION AFTER FABRICATION & ERECTION SPOT BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO SA 2.5. LIGHT SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS TO REMOVE SALT AND CONTAMINANTS, ETC. AND SPOT PRIME WITH ZINC RICH EPOXY PRIMER

1 1 1

MIN. HRS SEE NOTE 6

ZINC RICH EPOXY HB EPOXY MID COAT HB EPOXY FINISH COAT, (COLOR TBD)

MAX. DAYS SEE NOTE 6

-


65 100 100

NOTE: 1) APPLY NON-FLAMMABLE NON-SKID AGGREGATE ON MAIN DECK AND HELIPORT DECK, AT A RATE TO BE AGREED. (SAMPLE TO BE SUPPLIED) 2) HELIDECK MARKING PER CAP437 STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, ETC. 2) UNDERSIDE AND STRUCTURAL

AFTER FABRICATION & ERECTION SPOT BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO SA 2.5. LIGHT SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS TO REMOVE SALT AND CONTAMINANTS, ETC. AND SPOT PRIME WITH ZINC RICH EPOXY PRIMER 1 1 1

ZINC RICH EPOXY H.B. EPOXY MID-COAT POLYURETHANE FINISH, (COLOR TBD)

Rev. 0

SEE NOTE 6

-

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, ETC.


SEE NOTE 6

4

65 100 100


LOCATION

NO. OF COATS

C) SUBSTRUCTURE / SUPERSTRUCTURE 1) DRILL FLOOR, SUBSTRUCTURE AND CANTILEVER A) WORKING AREAS B) PERIPHERY 2) DECK HOUSE BULKHEADS 3) DECK HOUSE TOPS OR DECKS 4) DRAWWORKS HOUSE (OUTSIDE) 5) WIND WALL AROUND DRILL FLOOR (OUTSIDE)


MIN. HRS SEE NOTE 6



1

ZINC RICH EPOXY

-

75

1

H.B. EPOXY MID-COAT

-

150

1

POLYURETHANE FINISH COAT (COLOR TBD)

-

65

NOTE: INSIDE OF CANTILEVER TO HAVE WHITE FINISH COAT

-

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, ETC. D) LEGS & SEA WATER TOWER

AFTER FABRICATION & ERECTION SPOT BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO SA 2.5. LIGHT SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS TO REMOVE SALT AND CONTAMINANTS, ETC. AND SPOT PRIME WITH ZINC RICH EPOXY PRIMER

SEE NOTE 6

SEE NOTE 6

BASELINE TO 140 M. ABL 1 1

H.B. EPOXY H.B. EPOXY ALTERNATE: THIS SYSTEM MAY BE USED FOR THE ENTIRE LEG.

1 1 1

ZINC RICH EPOXY HB EPOXY MID COAT POLYURETHANE FINISH COAT, (COLOR TBD) NOTE: OBSTACLES SHALL BE MARKED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE REGULATORY BODY REQUIREMENTS. BOW LEG TO BE PAINTED ALTERNATING RED/WHITE BANDS 20' LENGTH FOR A DISTANCE FROM TOP AS REQUIRED BY REGULATORY BODY.

140 M. ABL TO TOP OF

175 175

LEGS

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, ETC.


Rev. 0

5

-

65 100 100


LOCATION

NO. OF COATS

E) EXTERIOR DECK FITTINGS, PIPE, VENT TRUNKS, HATCHES, ETC.


1 1 1

MIN. HRS SEE NOTE 6

ZINC RICH EPOXY HB EPOXY MID COAT POLYURETHANE FINISH COAT. (COLOR TBD)


-


75 150 65

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, ETC. F) CRANE FOUNDATION (ABOVE MAIN DECK) / HAND RAILS


SEE NOTE 6

ZINC RICH EPOXY HB EPOXY MID-COAT POLYURETHANE FINISH COAT, (COLOR TBD) (HAND RAILS TO BE YELLOW)

SEE NOTE 6

-

75 150 65

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, ETC. G) VOID SPACES


H.B. EPOXY PRIMER (OPTIONAL) H.B. EPOXY MID COAT H.B. EPOXY FINISH COAT WHITE

SEE NOTE 6

40 125 125

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS, BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC


SEE NOTE 6

Rev. 0

6


LOCATION

NO. OF COATS

H) FRESH WATER TANKS

SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING SPECIFICATION AFTER FABRICATION & ERECTION ROUND WELDS AND SHARP EDGES AND REMOVE WELD SPLATTER / UNNECESSARY BRACKETS. H.P. WASH @ 3000 PSI MINIMUM. BLAST CLEAN TO SA2.5.

1 1 1

MIN. HRS SEE NOTE 6


EPOXY PRIMER (OPTIONAL) H.B. EPOXY, H.B. EPOXY, WHITE


40 125 125

SYSTEM TO BE CERTIFIED FOR THE CARRIAGE OF POTABLE WATER. STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS, BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC I) MUD PITS (ACTIVE, RESERVE AND PROCESSING)

1 1

AFTER FABRICATION & ERECTION ROUND WELD AND SHARP EDGES AND REMOVE WELD SPLATTER / UNNECESSARY BRACKETS. SPOT BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO SA2.5. MINIMUM 75 TO 100 MICRON ANCHOR PROFILE SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS AND SPOT PRIME WITH EPOXY GLASS FLAKE PRIMER NOTE: PRODUCTS PROVIDED ARE REQUIRED TO BE FACTORY MIXED AND SHALL CONTAIN A MINIMUM OF 0.34 (0.85 LB) PER GALLON OF GLASS FLAKE MATERIAL. GLASS FLAKE EPOXY GLASS FLAKE EPOXY STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS, BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC.


Rev. 0

7

SEE NOTE 6

SEE NOTE 6

375 375


LOCATION

NO. OF COATS

J) MUD PIT ROOM, SACK STORAGE, PROCESS MUD ROOM AND MUD PUMP ROOM

SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING SPECIFICATION AFTER FABRICATION & ERECTION SPOT BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO SA 2.5. LIGHT SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS TO REMOVE SALT AND CONTAMINANTS, ETC.

1 1 1

MIN. HRS SEE NOTE 6

ZINC RICH EPOXY H.B. EPOXY MID-COAT POLYURETHANE FINISH, WHITE (DECK TO BE MID-GREY)


-


75 150 65

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS, BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC. K) MACHINERY / STORAGE SPACE 1) BULKHEADS AND OVERHEADS 1 1

AFTER FABRICATION & ERECTION SPOT BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO SA 2.5. LIGHT SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS TO REMOVE SALT AND CONTAMINANTS, SPOT PRIME WITH H.B. EPOXY H.B. EPOXY H.B. EPOXY WHITE

SEE NOTE 6

SEE NOTE 6

125 125

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS, BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC. 2) DECK (INSIDE & OUTSIDE COAMINGS) 1 1

SPOT BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO SA 2.5. LIGHT SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS TO REMOVE SALT & CONTAMINANTS, ETC. SPOT PRIME WITH H.B. EPOXY H.B. EPOXY H.B. EPOXY (COLOR TBD) (EXTERNAL DECK) MID GREY (INTERNAL DECK) ESCAPE ROUTES MAIN DECK NOTE: APPLY NON-FLAMMABLE NON-SKID AGGREGATE. AT A RATE TO BE AGREED (SAMPLE TO BE SUPPLIED) STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS, BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC.


Rev. 0

8

SEE NOTE 6

SEE NOTE 6 100 100


LOCATION

NO. OF COATS

L) PRELOAD TANKS AND DRILL WATER TANKS

SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING SPECIFICATION AFTER FABRICATION & ERECTION ROUND WELDS AND SHARP EDGES AND REMOVE WELD SPLATTER / UNNECESSARY BRACKETS. SPOT BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO SA2.5. SWEEP BLAST OTHER AREAS, SPOT PRIME WITH ZINC RICH EPOXY PRIMER OR H.B. EPOXY

1 1 1

ZINC RICH EPOXY PRIMER (OPTIONAL) H.B. EPOXY H.B. EPOXY WHITE

AFTER FABRICATION & ERECTION ROUND WELDS AND SHARP EDGES AND REMOVE WELD SPLATTER / UNNECESSARY BRACKETS. POWER TOOL CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO St.3 APPLY PRESERVATIVE OIL.


Rev. 0


40 150 150

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS, BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC M) FUEL OIL, BASE OIL, AND LUBE OIL TANKS (INTERIORS)

MIN. HRS SEE NOTE 6


9


LOCATION

NO. OF COATS

N) ALL STEEL PIPE LOCATED IN TANKS

SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING SPECIFICATION

MIN. HRS

MAX. DAYS

SEE NOTE 6

SEE NOTE 6


SURFACE PREPARATION AS PER SURROUNDING AREAS SUBSEQUENT SYSTEMS SHALL BE AS PER SURROUNDING AREAS

ALL STEEL PIPE OUTSIDE OF TANKS, INCLUDING PIPE LOCATED IN WEATHER EXPOSED AREAS INSULATED AND NON-INSULATED

SURFACE PREPARATION

REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR FIELD JOINTS / DAMAGED AREAS BLAST TO SA 2-1/2, WHERE POSSIBLE, OTHERWISE POWER TOOL CLEAN ALL CORRODED AREAS TO St3 AND COAT AS PER SURROUNDING AREAS. TOP-COATING REQUIRED FOR NON-INSULATED PIPEWORK (COLOR: AS PER THE SURROUNDING AREA) NOTE: ALL PIPING AND PIPE COVERING EXPOSED TO VIEW SHALL BE COATED TO MATCH THE SPACE IN WHICH IT IS LOCATED. EACH PIPE SHALL BE COLOR CODED AT BULKHEAD PENETRATIONS, AT THE EQUIPMENT OR MACHINERY AND AT 20' MAXIMUM SPAN INTERVALS. STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS, BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC EXHAUST PIPES (EXPOSED)

1 1 1

INTERNATIONAL INTERZINC 22 INTERNATIONAL INTERTHERM 50 INTERNATIONAL INTERTHERM 50


Rev. 0

75 25 25

10


LOCATION

NO. OF COATS

O) AREAS BEHIND INSULATION AND PANELING

PLATES, STIFFENERS

SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING SPECIFICATION SURFACE PREPARATION SPOT-BLAST CLEAN ALL RUSTED, DAMAGED AND WELDED AREAS TO SA2½ , AND SPOT COAT WITH H.B. EPOXY

1

MIN. HRS SEE NOTE 6


HIGH BOND EPOXY, WHITE


150

THE EPOXY COATING APPLIED TO THE SURROUNDING AREAS SHALL HAVE FIRE CERTIFICATES DEFINED AS ‘CLASS 1 BS 476:PART 7:1987: SURFACE SPREAD OF FLAME.

P) 1) BILGE HOLDING TANKS 2) SANITARY HOLDING TANKS 3) WASTE OIL TANKS 4) DIRTY OIL TANKS 5) CONTAMINATED DRAIN TANKS

1 1

Q) 1) GALVANIZED HANDRAILS

2) STRUCTURAL DUCTING INTERNALS

STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS, BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC “WET ON WET” STRIPE COATING WILL BE CONSIDERED IN LIEU OF BRUSH COATING IN THESE AREAS. SURFACE PREPARATION ALL WELDS SEAMS, CORRODED, DAMAGED / BURNT AREAS TO BE SPOT BLASTED TO SA2.5 AND REMAINING INTACT SHOP PRIMER TO BE GRIT SWEPT AND SPOT COAT WITH EPOXY PHENOLIC EPOXY PHENOLIC EPOXY PHENOLIC STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS, BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC

SEE NOTE 6

SEE NOTE 6

125 125

SURFACE PREPARATION DEGREASE WHERE NECESSARY, FRESH WATER WASH 1

ETCH SOLUTION OR LIGHT SWEEP BLAST FOLLOWED BY SYSTEM AS PER SURROUNDING AREAS

N/A

1 1

ZINC RICH EPOXY H.B. EPOXY – FIRST 5 METERS FROM EXTERIOR OPENING STRIPE COATS TO BE APPLIED TO ALL WELDS, EDGES, CORNERS, SEAMS , BEHIND STIFFENERS, ETC

75 150


Rev. 0

11


LOCATION

NO. OF COATS

SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING SPECIFICATION

MIN. HRS

MAX. DAYS


GENERAL NOTES: 1. AIRLESS SPRAY APPLICATION (AS) IS NECESSARY IN ORDER TO ACHIEVE THE REQUIRED DRY FILM THICKNESS / BUILD SPECIFIED. BRUSHING, ROLLING AND CONVENTIONAL SPRAY APPLICATIONS MAY NOT ACHIEVE THE REQUIRED THICKNESS. 2. THINNING OF THE PRODUCTS SPECIFIED IS NOT RECOMMENDED WITHOUT PRIOR CONSULTATION WITH REPRESENTATIVE OF PAINT MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATIVE. 3. WHEN USING ANY TYPE OF PAINT IN SPACES, FORCED VENTILATION IS REQUIRED; FOR FURTHER INFORMATION, THE PAINT MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATIVE SHALL BE CONTACTED FOR RECOMMENDATIONS. 4. WHERE THERE IS OIL OR GREASE, REMOVE IT WITH PAINT MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED EMULSIFIABLE DEGREASER. HIGH PRESSURE FRESH WATER BLAST AT 3000 PSI TO REMOVE THE EMULSIFIED RESIDUES, SALT, DIRT, SOOT AND OTHER CONTAMINANTS, ETC. ALLOW SURFACE TO DRY THOROUGHLY 5. PRIMER TO BE “WELD THROUGH” TYPE. APPROVED BY THE CERTIFYING AUTHORITY, 6. OVER-COATING INTERVALS ARE TO COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS.


Rev. 0

12


8.3

MARKINGS - GENERAL

All equipment installed on the Vessel shall have an legible name plate with a (according to the numbering system selected by the Owner) tag number and description. Letters and numbers on all signs, notices, etc., shall be in English. All nameplates and notices to Builder's standard shall be of one of the following materials, appropriate to the location where used however, all exterior nameplates shall be brass: • • •

8.4

Anodized aluminum with image imbedded in the anodized layer photographically ("Metalphoto" process, or equal). Laminated plastic with engraved characters. Brass plates with engraved characters.

VESSEL'S NAME

The Vessel's name and hailing port, in block letters, shall be placed on the transom side shell in accordance with customs regulations. Name letters shall be 300 mm minimum in height. The Vessel's name shall also be on each side of the bow vertical shell at side and on four sides of the derrick wind wall at the monkey board level. All helicopter deck navigation markings shall be according to CAP 437, including Vessel's name, insignia, etc. All letters shall be outlined by continuous weld bead (not for aluminum helidecks) and painted in contrasting color.

8.5

BUILDER'S NAMEPLATES

Two Builder's nameplates shall be provided and of an attractive design and located determined by the builder and in accordance with applicable Regulatory Requirements. The nameplates shall contain the Vessel's name, the Builder's name, the Builder's hull number, year built and Designer’s name.

8.6

DRAFT NUMERALS

Draft numerals shall be Arabic, 150 mm (6”) projected height, of simple outline and good proportion, the bottom of each figure being the height in meters above the bottom of the keel. Draft figures shall be painted in a contrasting color to each side of the hull at the bow and stern and onto the three leg wells’ shell.

8.7

LOAD LINE MARKINGS

Load line markings are to be installed on the hull, port and starboard, in accordance with the Classification Society and Regulatory Body Requirements. All markings are to be outlined with a 5mm weld bead and painted a contrasting color.

8.8

LEG AND SEA WATER TOWER MARKINGS

Leg elevations shall be marked on one chord of each leg that is visible from the Jacking Control Room. See Section 6.3.1 for details. A similar system of markings shall be used to indicate the elevation of the sea water towers below the bottom of the hull.

8.9

CANTILEVER MARKINGS


Rev. 0

13

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C On each cantilever beam, 25 mm wide x 150 mm high marks shall be provided at 250 mm intervals, to indicate the distance from the well center to the transom. Arabic numerals 100 mm high shall indicate the distance on 1500 mm intervals. In addition, a prominent mark shall be placed on the hold down clamp which aligns with a mark on the cantilever beam to indicate when the cantilever beam is fully retracted. All marks shall be outlined with a weld bead and painted in bright contrasting colors.

8.10

COMPARTMENT LABELS

All rooms or compartments shall be provided with label plates over entrance doors, designating compartment/room number and function or use. Staterooms shall be further labeled to indicate occupants assigned to the room.

8.11

SAFETY MARKINGS

Markings of the Vessel's equipment, lifesaving equipment, fire extinguishers, fire stations, fire hoses, emergency lights, etc., and provision of warning signals and flags, shall comply with Regulatory Bodies requirements. Lifeboat station directional signs and other markings shall be provided and located as required. Lifeboat instruction cards, firefighting and access plan general notice cards shall be of anodized aluminum with the image imbedded in the anodized layer photographically. They shall be securely mounted mechanically or by an approved adhesive and shall be installed as required.

8.12

HVAC LABEL PLATES AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Label plates shall be provided to clearly identify each fan, controller, heater, cooling coil, motor access plate, thermostat, damper, supply, and exhaust outlet and other major components of the systems. In the quarters/offices area, these shall be located on or adjacent to ceiling panels required for removal to access these components. Instruction label plates shall be provided for dampers and outlets and other equipment required only for intermittent ventilation, or requiring periodic cleaning. Instructions for operating the system shall be provided and posted in fan rooms.

8.13

NOTICE FRAMES

Notice frames shall be provided for and comply with any notice requirements of the Regulatory Bodies.

8.14

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND PLANS

The following Plans and operating instructions shall be reproduced by Metalphoto process and mounted in builder and Regulatory Body designated locations on the vessel: • • •

8.15

Firefighting and safety control system and escape routes Principal piping systems (fuel oil transfer system, dirty oil discharge system, and bilge and ballast system, fixed foam system, Water Mist system) Detail wiring diagram of main switchboard (located adjacent to main switchboard) (690 volt and 480 volt One Line Diagrams only)

MISCELLANEOUS A white board lined off for tank soundings and metal chalk tray shall be provided in a location near the jacking control room entrance as directed by Owner.


Rev. 0

14

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C A white board with the schematic of the bulk mud system and liquid mud pits shall be provided in the toolpusher’s office, the barge engineer’s office and the company man’s office. Watertight closures, doors, hatches, covers, etc., shall be labeled:

THIS DOOR, (HATCH, COVER, ETC.) MUST BE KEPT CLOSED DURING AFLOAT OPERATIONS

OR

THIS DOOR, (HATCH, COVER, ETC.) MUST BE LOCKED CLOSED DURING AFLOAT OPERATIONS

as required by the Operations Manual. In a clearly visible location, all preload tank hatch covers and spud can hatch covers shall be labeled:

WARNING: COMPLETE CONFINED SPACE PROCEDURES AND PERMIT BEFORE ENTERING TANK 8.16

CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM 8.16.1

Spud Cans and Legs

A sacrificial anode type system for the legs and spud cans (interior and exterior) shall be provided designed for a service life of ten (10) years. Calculations shall be furnished to the Designer. Coverage is to be from the bottom of the can to an elevation of 129.5 m (425’-0”) above the bottom of the can. Care must be taken to avoid cathodic “hot spots” and to provide uniform coverage for all surfaces. Legs will be coated. Interior and exterior of spud cans will be unblasted and uncoated. 8.16.2

Piping

An electrical cathodic protection system shall be installed by Builder at each (total 3) sea water pump discharge connection point. 8.16.3

Sea Chests

See Section 2.9


Rev. 0

15


Table of contents SECTION 9.0 - DECK MACHINERY .......................................................................................................... 1 9.1

GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 1

9.2

CRANES ........................................................................................................................................ 1

9.3

MOORING SYSTEM .................................................................................................................... 2

9.4

TOWING SYSTEM ....................................................................................................................... 3

9.5

TOWING BRIDLE RETRIEVING SYSTEM ............................................................................... 4

9.6

CANTILEVER AND DRILL FLOOR SKIDDING UNITS .......................................................... 4

9.7

CANTILEVER HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT ............................................................................. 5


SECTION 9.0 - DECK MACHINERY 9.1

GENERAL

The Builder shall install, connect, and align, etc., all items of deck machinery and test to demonstrate performance as required by these Specifications and as required by the regulatory Bodies for certification. The Owner shall provide only those specific items of deck machinery as listed in Section 18 as being OFE.

9.2

CRANES

Three cranes, two (2) rated at 55 tons @ 25 ft. (7.5 m) and one (1) rated at 65 tons @ 25 ft. (7.5 m), electrohydraulic (alternatively diesel-hydraulic), with 36.5 m (120 ft.) boom, load monitoring and alarm system and pedestal adapters shall be installed where shown on the Contract Plans. The minimum height of the lowest projecting part of the cranes shall be about 9 meters above the main deck or at sufficient height to clear any structures adjacent to the crane. Load monitoring and safety system shall be installed on each crane. Each crane will also be equipped with an approved communication system (VHF and UHF radio, telephone, deck loud hailer), anti-pollution system and a slack rope tensioner. The cranes shall comply with Class safety requirements and shall be certified for man riding as well. Crane pedestals shall be provided with access platform and access from the main deck. In the event the Owner supplies cranes, which require raising for roller/bearing maintenance, Builder shall fabricate and install necessary jacking structure in/on the pedestals. Hoisting speed shall be as follows: Main hoist: 21~24m/min. Auxiliary hoist: 30~35m/min. Main power supply: 690 V/ 60Hz / 3Ph for two cranes and 480 V/ 60Hz /3 Ph for one crane. Crane boom supports shall be provided with timber layer and pad eyes for sea fastening. Securing lugs for hook and block to be provided for towing. Heavy tool store hatch shall be served by one of the cranes. STBD crane is accessed from the Living Quarters. The AFT crane from the jack house, and PORT crane from the main deck by spiral ladders. Maintenance of cranes to be performed as close to delivery as applicable: A. Annual inspection to be performed by OEM representative, inspection to be performed, but shall not be limited to the latest edition (at the time of Contract signing) of API RP2D. Note: Manufactures' requirements may exceed API requirement, however API to be used as a minimum standard. B. Oils and fluids 1. Oil samples to be taken and analysis to be performed. Analysis is to include ISO particle count. This includes all hydraulic, gear oil, engine oil and cooling fluids. 2. Slew bearing grease sample to be taken and analysis performed. 3. Slew bearing deflection to be taken and recorded. Prior to delivery crane must be inspected. C. Wire rope and replace all wire rope. D. Hooks and wire rope sockets and perform NDE inspection on main and auxiliary hoist hooks and all wire rope sockets, items must meet components manufacturer’s requirements.


Rev. 0

1

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C One pipe handling knuckle boom crane shall be installed on the cantilever for handling tubulars and other tools and parts to and from the drill floor. The capacity shall be 9.9 mt. @ 22 m (73 ft.). Provisions for sea fastening shall be provided to suit the selected crane.

9.3

MOORING SYSTEM

Four sets of mooring winches, line load measuring and display systems, swivel fairleads, deck sheaves, cables, anchors, buoys, and pennant lines shall be installed. Winches, turning sheaves, and fairleads shall be arranged to ensure proper cable winding on the drums, as well as to provide the maximum amount of unobstructed deck area possible. Winch, deck turning sheave, and fairlead foundations shall be designed and built based on the breaking strength of the cable. Four suitable anchor racks shall be provided with suitable stowage for anchor buoys and pennant lines. Stern anchor racks shall be located on the port and starboard sides near the stern. 9.3.1

Mooring Winches (4 each) • • • • • •

Stall pull - 80 mt. Brake capacity - 240 mt. Drum capacity - 914 m of 51mm wire rope Electric drive - Frequency conversion, 480 or 690 Volt Local control as well as Remote control, from the jacking (barge) control room Level winder (if required by equipment layout)

Line load monitoring system / amperage gauge (visible at the winch controls and barge control room) 9.3.2

Cables (4 each) • • •

9.3.3

Swivel Fairleads and Deck Sheaves • •

9.3.4

Four each 7,500 kg each, Flipper Delta With shackles, anchor connecting link, Baldt No. 7 and other required jewelry

Anchor Buoys •

9.3.6

Swivel type fairleads, four each, for 51mm wire rope Fixed type, horizontal turning deck sheaves, pedestal mounted, 4 each for 51 mm wire rope.

Anchors • • •

9.3.5

Diameter 51mm EIPS, 6 x 37WS+WRC, RRL, Galvanized Length - 914 m Terminated with a closed spelter socket

Five each, non-metallic, non-rigid buoys, to support 150 meters of 32 mm dia. wire rope and remain 50 % above sea surface.

Pennant Lines •

Ten each, pennant lines, 44 mm dia x 46 meters long, 6 x 11 IWRC EIPS galvanized wire rope with thimble eyes both ends


Rev. 0

2


9.3.7

9.4

•

Ten each, pennant lines, 44 mm dia x 30 meters long, 6 x 41 IWRC EIPS galvanized wire rope with thimble eyes both ends

•

Ten each, pennant chains, 51 mm nominal dia ORQ x 5.0 meters long stud link chain with end link one end

•

25 each, shackles, 51 mm nominal dia.

Miscellaneous •

Four each, mooring lines, 75 mm dia x 46 meters long, 8 strand braided nylon rope with 4 foot leather/canvas covered eye on one end

•

Four each, mooring chains, 38 mm nominal dia x 6 meters long ORQ chain

•

Four each, mooring shackles, 63 mm nominal dia safety shackle

•

Four each, mooring shackles, 38 mm nominal dia safety shackle

TOWING SYSTEM

Towing pads, chocks, fairleads, and brackets shall be provided and located as shown on the Contract Plans. All pads, chocks, fairleads, and brackets shall be rated for 150 mt. SWL except for the five bow-mounted Smit towing pads which shall be rated for 225 mt. SWL. Also see Section 3.13. The following towing equipment shall be furnished by the Owner and installed by the Builder: •

2 each, bridle chains, 76 mm nominal dia ORQ x 25 meters long stud link chain with end link each end

•

2 each, towing chains, 76 mm nominal dia ORQ x 10 meters long stud link chain w/end link each end rig to cut to suit

•

2 each, towing pennants, 63 mm dia x 40 meters wire rope, 6 x 41 IWRC EIPS galvanized with thimble eyes both ends.

•

2 each, towing pennants, 51 mm dia x 40 meters wire rope, 6 x 41 IWRC EIPS galvanized with thimble eyes both ends.

•

1 each, towing plate, Delta plate for 76mm chain, Marquip number 3 or equivalent, suitable for the capacity of the wire SWL + 10 % as a minimum.

•

5 each, towing shackles, 75 mt. SWL anchor safety.

•

4 each, chain links, 76 mm nominal detachable chain connecting link, Baldt.

Emergency towline, consisting of: •

1 each, 14 m x 76 mm ORQ chain

•

61 meters x 63 mm dia, IWRC EIPS, wire rope thimble eye both ends.


Rev. 0

3


9.5

•

2 each, 75 mt. SWL anchor safety shackle

•

1 each, 76 mm nominal dia chain end link

•

125 meters x 51 mm dia 8 strand braided polypropylene rope, color orange

•

1 each, orange marker buoy, 1 meter in dia w/attachment point

TOWING BRIDLE RETRIEVING SYSTEM

A towing bridle retrieving system shall be provided consisting of: Two snatch blocks suspended from the helideck support structure with two 4.5 mt. air-driven winches, rated at 8.6 bar operating pressure, arranged on an elevated platform mounted on the helideck support structure above the main deck, and two recovery lines (19 mm dia., 125 meters long wire rope, IWRC EIPS galvanized with thimble eye on one end). Two additional 4.5 mt. air-driven winches mounted on the main deck, behind the forward towing pad eyes, and two 4.5 mt. air-driven winches on the main deck aft, to handle towing lines. Personnel access shall be provided to all equipment and fixtures in accordance with good marine practice. Builder is to fully install towing bridle and ensure all interferences with the helideck and forward lifeboat are removed. All winches to have spooling devices.

9.6

CANTILEVER AND DRILL FLOOR SKIDDING UNITS

The system will consist of one complete set of Friede and Goldman hydraulically powered cantilever and drill floor skidding systems, cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU) cantilever rollers, shims, pads and service jack system, etc. and associated equipment complete with control consoles. Cantilever skidding system The cantilever skidding system consists of a control stand and four jacks with capacity sufficient to skid the cantilever with the most onerous combination of drill floor position, pipe rack load and setback load through the full longitudinal range of skidding, subject to verification of Builder calculations for the cantilever weight and static friction and approval of same by Designer. The Builder is to provide and install all interconnecting piping, fittings, valves, hoses, etc. to complete the system.

Each skidding cylinder is connected to the cantilever skidding beam by means of one sliding locking pin housing. The locking pin housing contains the locking pin and transfers all loads between the cylinders and skidding beam. The locking pins are hydraulically actuated and are to be sequenced so that one pin is always engaged in the skidding when the cylinders are cycling. This positive engagement is necessary to prevent a run-away situation of the cantilever beam. Drill floor skidding system For the drill floor transverse skidding system, the Builder shall provide for and install control console (1 unit) and lift and roll skidding system (4 assemblies).


Rev. 0

4


Each lift and roll skidding assembly consists of a base plate, Hilman Roller, lift cylinders and skidding cylinders. The base or skidding plate is supported by the substructure upper flange. A Hilman Roller rests on the upper surface of the base plate. Short stroke lift cylinders, attached to the top of the Hilman Roller, lift the drill floor off of the substructure upper flange. While elevated, the skid cylinders which are attached to both the base plate and drill floor leg are extended, thus moving the drill floor. When the skid cylinder reaches the end of its stroke, the lift cylinders are retracted, lowering the drill floor to the substructure. The skid cylinders are retracted and the process is repeated. The four (4) assemblies operate in unison to move the drill floor to port or starboard. The control console shall control and synchronize the operation of the four (4) lift and roll skidding assemblies. Hydraulic power shall be supplied from the drill floor HPU. The Builder is to provide and install all interconnecting piping, fittings, valves, hoses, etc. to complete the system. Operating pressure for the lift and roll skidding system is 207 bar.

9.7

CANTILEVER HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT

The Builder shall install an independent Cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit, connect, test and prove operational. The Cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit is designed to power the Cantilever Skidding System and consists of the following: Electric motors and variable delivery piston pumps, complete with power limiting controls, are mounted vertically for compactness. The pumps and motors are mounted on rubber housings to reduce vibration and noise to acceptable levels. The pumps and motors are connected together with flexible couplings and bell housings. The oil reservoir tank, constructed from stainless steel, is mounted above the height of the pumps, to facilitate gravity feed, and is complete with isolation valves. The isolation valves allow the pumps to be removed without having to drain the tank. The tank acts as a reservoir for reserve hydraulic oil and as a catchment for return oil from the system. The following items are fitted to the reservoir: • Air breather complete with filter • Temperature gauge with probe, which monitors the oil temperature • Immersion heater, controlled automatically by the temperature gauge, keeps the oil temperature constant when the unit is idle. • Oil level sight glass and level switch • Fill and drain line filters • All coupling and hose connections to be suitable for marine environment The whole unit is incorporated within a bump frame with certified lifting lugs at each comer. The bottom of the unit is fitted with a sloping drip tray, which leads to a drain socket. A stainless steel control panel is mounted on the side of the unit.


Rev. 0

5


TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 10.0 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM............................................ 1 10.1 GENERAL..................................................................................................................................................... 1 10.2 SYSTEMS ..................................................................................................................................................... 1 10.3 AIR CONDITIONING COOLING COILS ................................................................................................... 6 10.4 PIPING .......................................................................................................................................................... 6 10.5 FANS AND MOTORS .................................................................................................................................. 6 10.6 TRUNKS, DUCTS, ACCESS AND HOODS ............................................................................................... 6 10.7 INSULATION AND LAGGING .................................................................................................................. 8


SECTION 10.0 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM 10.1

GENERAL

The Builder shall design, furnish and install a complete new ventilation, air conditioning system for the vessel. Builder shall perform the engineering design, including heat load/gain analyses and submit the results to the Owner for review and approval. The requirements of this Section apply to all spaces, including accommodation, engine room, auxiliary machinery room, VFD room, mud pump room, mud pits room, store rooms, and other working spaces. In the accommodation spaces, including recreation rooms, offices, etc., corridors shall not be used to collect return air. Return air from these spaces shall be ducted back from each space served. Air conditioning shall also cover stairways /wells in the accommodation block to stop condensation due to large temperature differentials.

10.2

SYSTEMS 10.2.1

Air-Conditioning

All staterooms, recreation rooms, mess room, the hospital treatment room, the radio room, the jacking control room, offices, etc., and the VFD room shall be air-conditioned using chilled water for each system. Heat shall be provided using an electric heat system located in air handling unit. The air conditioning system shall consist of (2) centralized chilled water units (chillers) each sized for 100% of the total rig load. The chillers shall be sea water cooled, utilizing screw-type compressors, and all equipment is to be of Carrier manufacture or equivalent. The system shall have redundant pumps for circulation of the chilled water. Accommodations: Air handling rooms shall be located on each level for servicing of those areas. Medium or high pressure air distribution is to be utilized so as to reduce ducting sizes and number of air handling units (AHU). There shall be no more than (1) air handler room for each level of the quarters; preference is for an air handler room to serve multiple levels. Temperature control of individual spaces shall be provided by volume adjustment of supply air terminals using opposed blade dampers. Each stateroom, office and public area shall have individual temperature control. The relative humidity within the accommodation spaces shall be maintained between 30 % and 70 % regardless of external conditions Machinery Deck: Additional air handler room(s) shall be located on the machinery deck to serve the drilling and jacking VFD rooms, warehouse, electrical workshop, mechanical workshop, and maintenance office. The driller’s cabin as well as the LER/LIR (Local Equipment Room/Local Instrument Room) shall be airconditioned with an air-conditioning unit, suitable for this application and the hazardous area classification. Each air handler room shall be designed so as to provide at least 100 % redundancy for the designated heat load. For isolated spaces that are to be air conditioned, individual unit air-conditioners/heaters will be installed.


Rev. 0

1

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C 10.2.2

System Design Requirements

The machinery providing the air-conditioning to the quarters shall consist essentially of one central chilled water unit. The condenser shall be air or water cooled. The compressor and associated equipment capacity shall be capable of handling peak requirements of all air-conditioned spaces with all air-handler units operating. The system refrigerant shall be an environmentally friendly type, like HFC-134a or an approved equivalent. Air-handler shall be designed with copper tube and copper fins with epoxy coating. Each air-handler unit’s capacity shall be capable of handling peak requirements of the air-conditioned space or zone being served. Air handlers shall be fitted with moisture indicators, over-sized dryers and cleanable filters as well as a UV disinfectant system. Air handler system is to be designed for boost cooling and load fluctuations flow capacity to support areas such as mess and recreation rooms, high exhaust air volume loads such as galley and smoking areas, and other areas. In the design of the system, provisions shall be made to ensure performance is maintained even under low ambient temperature (e.g. cooling VFD room under outdoor winter conditions). Air-handlers shall be fully unitized equipment, complete with (isolatable) gauges, flow indicators, sensors, safety devices, instrumentation and controls. All materials used shall be suitable for a marine environment. All outside air vent supply registers for the quarters shall be equipped with a positive action screw down means of closure, watertight as required by Class. The air-conditioning and heating system shall be sized for the following conditions: Highest outside ambient air temperature design condition: Wet bulb temperature design condition Lowest outside ambient air temperature design condition: Highest outside ambient humidity design condition: Lowest outside ambient humidity design condition: Seawater: Lowest: -2 °C Highest: 35 °C

Table 10.1 - HVAC Performance Requirement Area Summer Quarters, staterooms, hospital treatment room, 24 °C jacking control room and offices Other space (machinery stopped) N/A

45 °C 38 °C -20 °C 90 % R.H. 30 % R.H.

Winter 22 °C

Rel Humidity <70 %, >30 % Avg. 50 %

10 °C

The system shall be certified by Classification Society. 10.2.3

Package Units

A split level unit style air cooled air conditioning unit shall be installed in the rubber storeroom, P.E. lab, and similar isolated spaces. The driller’s house shall feature a roof mounted air-conditioning unit. The unit for the Driller’s Cabin shall be suitable for the respective hazardous area classification. Each unit shall feature copper


Rev. 0

2

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C tube and fin condenser and exchangers with epoxy coating. Each unitized package shall be complete with all controls, indicators and safety devices. All materials used shall be suitable for a marine environment. Driller's Cabin, LIR/LER and cantilever MCC room packaged air conditioning units outdoor sections shall be stainless steel frame. Drillers cabin air conditioner unit to be mounted on top of cabin or outside cabin, not inside. 10.2.4

Ventilation System

The ventilation requirements of a space shall be the largest of the three quantities determined by: the rate of air change, the required fresh air flow per occupants and equipment (e.g., engines, air compressors) and the limiting temperature rise. Note that the combustion air to the diesel sets and air compressors should be directed through a dedicated pipe line with gas detection and fire dampers, to shut down in case of an explosive gas mixture in the intake air. The required maximum temperature rise, minimum ventilation flow and rate of outside air changes for all spaces is generally given in Table 10.2 as a guidance, the Builder is responsible to adjust the guidelines for air changes or fan flow rates based on the actual volume or size of the spaces to be ventilated to achieve the air changes as required to meet current Class or Regulatory requirements. For the accommodation spaces the minimum number of air changes shall be at least 30 m3/h per person. All enclosed living and working non-hazardous spaces are to be maintained under a positive pressure. Access corridors and escape routes should be maintained at a pressure above that of adjacent cabins and other areas in order to provide smoke control in event of fire in an occupied space. The galley, laundries, change rooms and hospital treatment room shall have exhaust systems that are ducted directly to the weather away from other ventilation intakes. Ductwork connections to outside atmosphere and through fire barriers should be provided with fire / gas dampers rated to that of the fire barrier. Spaces not covered by the quarters HVAC, requiring natural supply or exhaust ventilation, without direct connection to the weather, shall have doors fitted with louvers (520 mm² minimum) in the lower panel. Where door louvers or door undercuts are not desired or are impractical, a bulkhead opening fitted with fixed louver, wire mesh or deflection grill, shall be used. Toilet and shower space doors, without louvers, shall be undercut (130 m³/h maximum). The maximum air velocity through free openings shall not exceed 2 m/sec. Common supply with a separate exhaust fan for the smoking recreation room shall be arranged. As required, silencers shall be installed in the ventilation system to reduce noise levels.


Rev. 0

3

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. JOB #032-11 Table 10.2 SPACE

ENGINE ROOM

MECHANICAL

NATURAL

VENTILATION

VENTILATION

SUP.

EXH.

SUP.

X

X

EXH.

TEMP.

AIR

REMARKS

RISE °C

CHG.

SEE NOTES & ABBREVIATIONS BELOW

10°

1/MIN.

2-ONE SPEED SUPPLY FAN 2-ONE SPEED EXHAUST FAN

VFD ROOM

X

X

5.5°

NATURAL EXHAUST TO ENGINE ROOM

EMER. VENT. SYSTEM AUXILIARY ROOMS

MACHINE

X

X

10°

1/MIN.

CIRCULATING FAN - SUPPLY FROM ENGINE ROOM NATURAL EXHAUST TO ENGINE ROOM

SACK STOWAGE ROOMS

X

X

10°

1/MIN.


STOWAGE ROOM & WORKSHOPS

X

“P” TANK ROOMS, PORT & STARBOARD

X

MUD PIT ROOM

X

X

10°

3/MIN.


X

X

10°

1/MIN.

1-ONE SPEED SUPPLY FAN

10°

2/MIN.

1-ONE SPEED SUPPLY FAN 1-ONE SPEED EXHAUST FAN EXPLOSION PROOF FANS & HEATERS (SEE NOTE 2)

MUD PITS

X

MUD PUMP ROOM

X

X

X

10°

1/MIN.

SEE SECTION DESCRIPTION BELOW & NOTE 2

1/MIN.

1-TWO SPEED SUPPLY FAN 1-TWO SPEED EXHAUST FAN (SEE NOTE 2)

MUD PROCESS LOWER LEVEL

ROOM

X

X

10°

2/MIN

2-ONE SPEED SUPPLY FANS

MUD PROCESS UPPER LEVEL

ROOM

X

X

10°

1/MIN

2-ONE SPEED EXHAUST FANS


(SEE NOTE 2)

Rev. 0

4

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. JOB #032-11 SPACE

MECHANICAL

NATURAL

VENTILATION

VENTILATION

SUP.

EXH.

SUP.

X

X

SHALE SHAKER HOOD

EXH.

TEMP.

AIR

REMARKS

RISE °C

CHG.

SEE NOTES & ABBREVIATIONS BELOW

100

1/MIN

RADIO ROOM

X

10 / HR

(2) ONE -SPEED EXHAUST FANS. OBJECTIVE IS TO HAVE ENOUGH AIRFLOW TO REMOVE THE FUMES WITHOUT PULLING THE LIQUID. USE OF CURTAINS AND CONTROLLED AIRFLOW IS RECOMMENDED (SEE NOTE 2) A/C SYSTEM

MESS AND REC. ROOMS

X

6/HR

A/C SYSTEM

DRY STORES

X

10/HR

GALLEYS

X

EXPLOSION PROOF FANS AND HEATERS A/C SYSTEM

PLC ROOM SWITCHGEAR ROOM

X

X X X

20 /HR MS 30 /HR ME 1/HR 2/HR

A/C SYSTEM A/C SYSTEM

Notes: 1) Abbreviations used in the table are as follows: 2) Hazardous area. CHG EC EMER EXH. ME MS NE NS SUP. VENT.

Change Electric Convection Heater Emergency Exhaust Mechanical Exhaust Mechanical Supply Natural Exhaust Natural Supply Supply Ventilation


Rev. 0

5

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. JOB #032-11 10.3

AIR CONDITIONING COOLING COILS

Pre-heaters for air-conditioning systems shall be selected to suit design requirements. The condenser and evaporator coils shall be of good commercial quality. Tubes shall be copper and fins shall be copper, condenser coil shall be with epoxy coating for marine service. Cooling coils shall be provided with suitable drip pans fitted with a 25 mm drain and water seal at each end of the pan. Coils and pans shall be easily accessible for periodic cleaning.

10.4

PIPING

All interconnection piping shall be in carbon steel with valves and fittings. The ends shall be flanged in according the class requirements and operation conditions. The piping systems shall be carefully installed and every precaution taken to keep the system absolutely clean internally during erection. Before operating the chiller’s compressors, the system shall be cleaned by means of a special surge drum containing a filter, screen, and large quantity of desiccant, connected into the suction side of the system. Prior to cleaning and pressure tightness tests, the system shall be dehydrated by means of special vacuum pumps capable of developing a vacuum of at least –752 mm Hg. at -1 °C on a wet bulb vacuum indicator. All piping shall be insulated for design compliance and prevention of surface condensations. Insulation shall be by use of preformed closed cell half sections.

10.5

FANS AND MOTORS

All fans shall be marine type as made by Hartzell Inc., Woods or equal. Motors shall be directly connected with enclosures to suit location on the vessel. Fan HP, quantity and static pressure developed shall be suitable for the duct systems, as installed, to provide the design quantities in each compartment. Fans shall be selected to insure minimum noise levels are attained throughout the system(s). Main deck and other areas not otherwise subject to high ambient noise are to be maintained at 85 dBA or less by use of silencers and similar means. (Zones 1 and 2) shall be ATEX certified EEx motors and anti-static, non-sparking fans, certified for use in the area of application.

10.6

TRUNKS, DUCTS, ACCESS AND HOODS 10.6.1

Air-Conditioning System

Medium or high pressure air distribution is to be utilized so as to reduce ducting sizes or the ducts shall be sized for conventional flow velocities (460 MPM) to meet SMACNA/ASHRAE requirements. Air-conditioning ducts shall have 25 mm insulation on supply and 12.5 mm insulation on return air. Rectangular ducts shall be installed with a minimum 48 kg/m3 density fiberglass insulation board, 25 mm thick with a factory applied aluminum foil vapor barrier, minimum thickness 0.05 mm. All joints and seams of vapor barrier shall be lapped 75 mm whenever possible, and sealed with an aluminum foil tape 75 mm wide. To further ensure vapor barrier integrity, all seams and joints


Rev. 0

6

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. JOB #032-11 shall be sealed with an approved sealer. Round ducts shall be installed in the same manner using foil faced blanket insulation 25 mm thick with a minimum density 24 kg/m3. 10.6.2

Mechanical Ventilation Systems (Supply and Exhaust)

Where space conditions limit duct cross-sectional area (circular or rectangular), velocities may be as high as 12.5 m/sec, provided ventilation noise does not exceed recommended levels for the space being ventilated, or in the vicinity of the fan. All materials used shall be suitable for a marine environment. 10.6.3

Mechanical Supply System

Where space conditions limit duct cross-sectional area, velocities may be as high as 12.5 m/sec, provided ventilation noise does not exceed recommended levels for the space being ventilated, or in the vicinity of the fan. 10.6.4

Machinery Ventilation Systems (Supply and Exhaust)

Where space conditions limit duct cross-sectional area, velocities may be as high as 12.5 m/sec, provided ventilation noise does not exceed recommended levels for the space being ventilated, or in the vicinity of the fan. 10.6.5

Natural Vent Ducts - Serving Mechanically Ventilated Spaces (Supply or Exhaust Direct or Indirect) • • •

10.6.6

Natural Vent Ducts - Serving Naturally Ventilated Spaces •

10.6.7

5 m/sec for less than 6,800 m³/h 6.3 m/sec for between 6,800-10,200 m³/h 7.5 m/sec for more than 10,200 m³/h

1,360 m³/h (assumed for sizing of ducts)

Construction

Trunks, ducts, covers, louvers, etc., exposed to the weather shall not be less than 6.5 mm steel plate and shall be watertight. All other duct construction shall be in accordance with the Classification Society or specifications requirements (i.e. wall thickness, materials, etc.). Composite ducting materials shall be used wherever allowed by the Regulatory Bodies and Classification Society. 10.6.8

Shaker Hood

Close fitting exhaust vent hoods shall be provided over each shale shaker, fabricated from stiffened 5 mm 316L stainless steel plate or suitable composite material.


Rev. 0

7

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. JOB #032-11 Exhaust ducting, fabricated from 3.5 mm 316L stainless steel, shall be run from each shaker to a discharge location as approved by the Regulatory Bodies. Exhaust ducts shall be fitted with a vapor collector for handling oil based mud vapors.

10.7

INSULATION AND LAGGING Air-conditioning ducts shall have 25 mm insulation on supply and 12.5 mm insulation on return air. Rectangular ducts shall be installed with a minimum 48 kg/m3 density fiberglass insulation board, 25 mm thick with a factory applied aluminum foil vapor barrier, minimum thickness 0.05 mm. Round ducts shall be installed in the same manner using foil faced blanket insulation 25 mm thick with a minimum density 24 kg/m3. All joints in insulation are to be taped with foil adhesive tape.


Rev. 0

8


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 11.0 - SHIP SERVICE REFRIGERATION .................................................................. 1 11.1 SHIP SERVICE REFRIGERATION MACHINERY ............................................................ 1 11.2 REFRIGERATED WALK-IN COMPARTMENTS .............................................................. 1 11.3 PIPING .......................................................................................................................................... 2


SECTION 11.0 – REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 11.1

REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 11.1.1

General

A ship's service refrigerating system consisting of cooler and freezer and designed for the direct expansion of an environmentally friendly refrigerant like HFC-134a or an Owner approved equivalent. All equipment shall be designed for completely automatic operation and shall be supplied by the manufacturer as packaged units, complete with refrigerant piping and a holding charge of refrigerant. Each refrigerated walk-in Compartment shall have two condensing unit and two evaporator unit, each one redundant. Condensing unit shall have ventilator-motor, compressor, condenser coil. Condenser and evaporator coils shall be copper tube and copper fin, and epoxy coated. 11.1.2

Equipment - Condensing Units

Each unit shall have ample capacity to lower the refrigerated compartments temperature to the design temperature within 72 hours after loading. The refrigeration capacity of each unit shall be sized based on -29 °C suction temperature and 49 0C condensing temperature. Units shall be complete with pre-wired control panels, containing incoming power lugs, circuit breakers, control transformers, defrost timer, terminal strip, starters, high and low pressure switches and evaporator motor manual starters. Units to be complete with gauge isolation valves and refrigerant sight gauges. The alarms of the refrigerating units shall be routed to the DCS.

11.2

REFRIGERATED WALK-IN COMPARTMENTS 11.2.1

General

The refrigerated walk-in shall be provided with location and size as per the specifications. The temperature and methods of cooling shall be as indicated in Table 11.1 below. Table 11.1 - Refrigeration Requirements Compartment

Temperature °C

Loading Temp. °C.

Method of Cooling

Cooler & Dairy

4

13

Air Cooler

Freezer (fish and meat)

-21

-9.5

Air Cooler

Condensers shall have a purge valve and a relief valve. Walk-in shall be prefabricated with smooth finish 1 mm thick stainless steel interior. Sections shall have tongue and groove edges with non-asbestos gaskets and fitted with


Rev. 0

1


locking devices for connecting adjoining sections. Doors shall be stainless steel clad both sides. Hardware shall be cadmium plated. Doors shall be equipped with safety release latches. Door heaters shall be provided in freezer box door. Remote indicating thermometers shall be provided on outside of the freezer and chill boxes and high temperature alarm and lighting inside. All hardware is to be triple chrome plated steel or stainless steel. 11.2.2

Refrigerated Compartment Equipment Air Coolers The air coolers shall be self-contained type. Fans shall be direct drive and to be protected by guard. The fan capacity shall be sufficient to change the air once a minute with the compartment empty. Defrosting of compartments below 2 °C shall be automatically accomplished by electric heating elements built into the cooler coils and drip pans. Shelving and Miscellaneous Equipment The freezer and cooler rooms shall be provided with adjustable stainless steel shelves with battens, arranged four tiers high. Each compartment shall be equipped with overhead light with exterior switch and pilot light and a 75 mm deck drain with removable wooden plug.

11.3

PIPING The piping systems shall be carefully installed and every precaution taken to keep the system absolutely clean internally during erection. Before operating the compressors, the system shall be cleaned by means of a special surge drum containing a filter, screen, and large quantity of desiccant, connected into the suction side of the system. Prior to cleaning and pressure tightness tests, the system shall be dehydrated by means of special vacuum pumps capable of developing a vacuum of at least –750 mm Hg. at -1 °C on a wet bulb vacuum indicator. All piping shall be insulated for design compliance and prevention of surface condensations. Insulation shall be by use of preformed, closed cell half sections.


Rev. 0

2


Table of contents SECTION 12.0 - MAIN AND AUXILIARY MACHINERY ....................................................................................... 2 12.1

GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................. 2

12.2

MAIN ENGINES AND GENERATORS .................................................................................................. 2

12.3

EMERGENCY GENERATOR.................................................................................................................. 2

12.4

PUMPS ...................................................................................................................................................... 3

12.5

WATERMAKERS ..................................................................................................................................... 3

12.6

WATER HEATERS .................................................................................................................................. 3

12.7

AIR COMPRESSORS AND TANKS ....................................................................................................... 3

12.8

WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................................... 4

12.9

SEWAGE COLLECTION & TREATMENT EQUIPMENT .................................................................... 5

12.10

AIR HOISTS.............................................................................................................................................. 5

12.11

MACHINERY HANDLING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................. 5

12.12

DIESEL OIL PURIFIER, OILY WATER SEPARATOR ......................................................................... 5

12.13

SPARE PARTS.......................................................................................................................................... 6

12.14

CANTILEVER AND DRILL FLOOR SKIDDING UNITS ..................................................................... 6

12.15

SEA WATER SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS ..................................................................................................7

12.16

PRELOAD SUBMERSIBLE PUMP ......................................................................................................... 8

12.17

SEA WATER PUMP TOWERS & ELEVATING SYSTEMS ................................................................. 8

12.18

MISCELLANEOUS TANKS .................................................................................................................... 8

12.19

HELICOPTER REFUELING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................ 9

12.20

BOP WORK PLATFORM ........................................................................................................................ 9

12.21

ELEVATORS (PERSONNEL)................................................................................................................ 10

12.22

FORK LIFT TRUCK ............................................................................................................................... 10


SECTION 12.0 ‐ MAIN AND AUXILIARY MACHINERY 12.1

GENERAL

This Section describes the proposed main, auxiliary and deck machinery, including all necessary auxiliaries for the Vessel described in Section 1 of these Specifications and covers substantial machinery of first class design, material and good marine practice. All ratings in the specification and on the one line drawings are considered as a minimum requirement. It will be the Builder’s responsibility to size the equipment for the required services and to demonstrate the rating by calculations, load analysis, load flow calculations and selectivity study. Machinery is to be installed and mounted on Builder furnished foundations with noise and vibration absorbers so as to minimize vibration and structure-borne noise (ref. ISO 6954, “Guidelines for the Overall Evaluation of Merchant Ships). In general, noise levels shall be in accordance with Classification Society requirements. Low noise equipment and machinery shall be selected if available, and all methods of noise reduction shall be considered (acoustic baffles, sound-absorbing insulation, sound dampers on ventilation trunks, isolated duct mounts, etc.). Special consideration shall be given to any equipment near the accommodation block. In high noise areas (drill floor, mud pump room, engine room, shale shaker area, compressor room, etc.) special noise reduction methods and precautions shall be evaluated. Measurement of global and local vibrations in the accommodations, drill floor, and machinery spaces shall be carried out by an independent third party analyst. The performance of the main engine vibration mounts shall be evaluated. The access for maintenance and installation of equipment shall be arranged keeping in mind the subsequent need for removal of that equipment for repair or replacement. The placement of equipment shall, in general, be in accordance with the arrangement shown on the Contract Plans with deviations made as necessary to suit the development of detailed engineering.

12.2

MAIN ENGINES AND GENERATORS

The engine room shall be designed for the placement of six (6) diesel generator sets, each furnished and installed by the Builder, air-cooled, 690 volt, 3 phase and 60 Hz alternators. The main engines shall be mounted on vibration isolators recommended by the engine manufacturer and in accordance with the specifications. The isolation mountings shall consist of all steel welded top and bottom housings incorporating two or more steel springs and shall be provided with built-in leveling bolts and built-in resilient stops to control oscillation and withstand lateral forces in all directions, with one spring isolator at each mounting bolt. The engines and alternators shall be unitized on a common skid complete with pumps, oil coolers, control panels, compressed air starters, silencers with spark arrestors and all other required accessories. All engines shall be capable of being started with 8.6 bar air pressure from the rig air system. Prior to delivery, all engines to be serviced and have the oil and filters changed and maintain less than 100 running hours on new oil as per OEM.

12.3

EMERGENCY GENERATOR

The Builder shall furnish and install one 480 volt, 3 phase and 60 Hz diesel electric generator set. Unattached accessories include: exciter field rheostat and resistors, voltage regulator, starting battery, battery charger, control panel, and silencer with spark arrestor and expansion joint. The radiator shall be equipped with


Rev. 0

2

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C a normally-closed, automatically operating damper. The fuel tank for the unit is to be sufficiently sized by the Builder for the intended service. The unit shall be capable of 24 volt DC electric (battery) and air motor starting, radiator cooled with after-cooler, turbo-charger, and all standard accessories as listed in Section 18, and in compliance with the Regulatory Body requirements. The emergency unit shall be able to be started from 2 (two) different sources (air and electric).

12.4

PUMPS

The pumps shall be generally as specified on the Contract Plans. In all cases for the final design, the pumping equipment selected shall be suitable and adequate for the service intended. Power and head values are for guidance only and shall be confirmed by Builder during final detail design calculations.

12.5

WATERMAKERS

Builder shall furnish and shall install two fresh water makers 60 m3 per day capacity equipped with heaters and an automatic chlorination system (0.5 to 1.5 ppm throughout the distribution network), inlet filtration system, ion sterilizer and full redundancy continuous service auxiliaries. Water makers can either be reverse osmosis or regenerative heat recovery types.

12.6

WATER HEATERS

The Builder shall install two (2) electric heaters for supplying hot water to showers, lavatories and all other equipment requiring hot water. The system shall be the recirculating type, sized to accommodate the demand by the rig’s complement. The size and capacity for the electric water heaters shall be determined during detailed engineering. Each hot water heating tank shall be fitted with a combination pressure/temperature relief valve, inspection hand hole, drain, electric heater control thermostat and low water level and low flow heater cutout switch.

12.7

AIR COMPRESSORS AND TANKS

Consisting of three unitized skid mounted compressor units including: rotary screw type air compressors, rated at 15.3 m³/min at 8.6 bar, including flexible coupling, dry type inlet air filter, pneumatic inlet control valve, oil pump, oil level gauge, oil filter, ASME coded oil separator and sump, water cooled oil cooler, TEFC motor driven fan and air cooled after-cooler with separator and trap c/w starter, sequential panel and acoustic enclosure. The Builder shall furnish and install two (2) refrigeration type air dryer, rated at 51 m³/min for pressure dew point of -40 °C with inlet air temperature of 37.8 °C, air cooled. The air dryer shall have a separate skid base. The Builder shall furnish and install one (1) cold start, air compressor with V-belt drive, driven by a manually started air cooled diesel engine complete with fuel tank and exhaust muffler. The unit shall be complete with all standard equipment and shall be unitized on individual skid bases. The compressor shall have a minimum rating of 0.9m³/min at 8.6 bar and shall be equipped with suction unloading valve, pilot valve, filters, etc. The Builder shall furnish and install one pressure reducing valve bulk air system c/w water trap system capable of 22.6 m³/min flow regulation and reducing 8.6 bar rig air service to 2.5~4.5 bar. Both pressure reducing valves need to have isolation valves.


Rev. 0

3

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Six (6) ASME coded approved air receiver tanks shall be installed. The Builder shall provide receivers as indicated below. The capacity of the air receivers is a minimum and is to be confirmed by the Builder after the selection of all consumers. Location and size of the air receiver tanks is as follows: a)

Two 3.4 cu. m. capacity service air tanks with a relief valve setting of 9.5 Bar shall be installed in the compressor room, or convenient adjacent compartment.

b) One 3.2 cu. m. capacity service air tank with a relief valve setting of 9.5 Bar shall be installed on the drill floor. An isolation check valve shall be fitted to this receiver supply line. c)

One 1.0 cu. m. capacity service air tank with a relief valve setting of 9.5 Bar shall be installed on the cantilever. An isolation check valve shall be fitted to this receiver supply line.

d) One 2.0 cu. m. capacity air tank with a relief valve setting of 9.5 Bar shall be installed in the emergency generator room. e)

One engine starting air receiver sized as required.

Starting air tank capacities are for guidance and shall be sized in conformance with requirements of the engines supplied and the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies. Air receiver tanks shall be rated for 8.6 bar working pressure, fitted with relief valves, automatic water traps and necessary gauges. Prior to rig delivery, all compressors to be serviced and have the oil and filters changed and maintain less than 100 running hours on new oil as per OEM.

12.8

WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT

Builder shall furnish and install two, 480 volt AC, 400 AMP DC rectifier-type welding machines. The two machines shall be arranged one over the other in the mechanical workshop. A minimum of eight two wire welding outlets shall be provided by the Builder, distributed in working areas as directed by Designer. Outlets shall be arranged so that any of these locations may be reached by a welding cable 100' in length. Builder shall provide four sets of 30 m. (100') welding cables, 30 m. (100') ground cables, electrode holders, helmets, etc., which shall be stowed in the mechanical workshop by the Builder. Hull return system shall not be used. In addition, the following workshop machines shall be furnished and installed by the Builder. •

Drill press

•

Power hacksaw

•

Grinder

•

Hydraulic press

•

Pipe threader

•

Lathe

•

Universal Milling M/C

•

Hydraulic hose crimping machine


Rev. 0

4


12.9

SEWAGE COLLECTION & TREATMENT EQUIPMENT

One sewage treatment plant(s), of the electrolytic type, having a total capacity suitable for a complement of total amount of persons on board shall be provided and installed by the Builder with a vacuum collection system. Each unit shall be unitized with automatic briner unit, pumps, cell, and all standard accessories. A collection tank high level alarm shall be integrated into the engine room alarm system.

12.10

AIR HOISTS

Air hoists in a compliment of both single and double drum design shall be installed as indicated on the specifications. All air hoists shall be fitted with an air regulator, water trap, lubricators, silencer and a spooling device consistent with design specifications of each air hoist, as well as a quick acting air supply valve (ball valve type). A sufficient number of air or hydraulic hoists shall be installed to enable safe and efficient work on the drilling unit, the total amount and location of the hoists may be determined during detailed engineering.

12.11

MACHINERY HANDLING EQUIPMENT

Adequate load rated pad eye plates shall be provided above all pieces of major equipment such as motors, compressors, engines, pumps, generators, and miscellaneous machinery. Load rated lifting pads shall be provided at the head of all ladders, and above hatch openings of space containing equipment. Two lengths of trolley rail with a 10 mt. trolley shall be installed above the fluid end and motors of each mud pump to facilitate maintenance and overhaul. Other trolleys shall be installed over the drawworks motors and drum and elsewhere as shown on the specifications, and sized in accordance with the component or assembly weight of the equipment, engines, etc., to be serviced. A system of transverse and longitudinal trolley beams and geared hoists is to be installed in the engine room generally as shown on the specifications. Trolley beams for removing pistons and liners shall be installed over each cylinder bank. When used in tandem the trolley beams with their hoists shall have the capacity to service any part on the engine or remove the generator. The longitudinal trolley beams and hoists shall have the capacity and shall be arranged to move any generator to the removal hatch area. All lifting gear shall be trial fitted and functionally tested in place prior to delivery and demonstrated to be satisfactory for the purpose intended and in compliance with all Specifications. All weight handling equipment and permanent fittings, including all pad eyes, are to be proof load tested at 150 % of the intended safe working load capacity and to be permanently marked on and in the vicinity of each item, with unique I.D. number and load rating. Regulatory Body certification shall be provided by Builder for each tested item. All Builder furnished lifting equipment is to be stowed on bulkheads near machinery served unless stowage is provided at lifting point.

12.12

DIESEL OIL PURIFIER, OILY WATER SEPARATOR 12.12.1 Diesel Oil Purifier The diesel oil purifying equipment should consist of two 4 m³/h purifiers. Each unit shall be complete with stainless steel bowl assembly, inlet and outlet pumps, electric motor and all standard equipment.


Rev. 0

5

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Each unit shall be equipped with an excessive water detector to shut down the purifier upon excessive water discharge. 12.12.2 Oily Water Separator A system consisting of one oily water separator with a process capacity of 10 m³/h, one oil-inwater monitor and one strip chart recorder to be installed by the Builder. The single stage separator shall be fitted with an automatic oil drain control, oil drain sight glass, relief valve and other required connections. The separator shall have a treated liquid discharge process capacity to reduce oil contamination down to at least 15 ppm. Oily water supply to the separator shall be provided using an electric pump with a maximum capacity of 45 m³/h at 5 m head.

12.13

SPARE PARTS

All spare parts shall be Builder-furnished and shall meet the Vendor's recommendation for one year's service. The Vendor's recommendation shall be final. Spare parts shall be inventoried and delivered on board the Vessel at time of Vessel delivery. Spares over and above those recommended by Vendor but required by the Regulatory Bodies shall be additionally supplied by Builder.

12.14

CANTILEVER AND DRILL FLOOR SKIDDING UNITS

The system will consist of one complete set of Friede and Goldman hydraulically powered cantilever and drill floor skidding systems, cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU), cantilever rollers, shims, pads and service jack system, etc. and associated equipment complete with control consoles. Cantilever skidding system The cantilever skidding system shall consist of a control stand and four jacks with capacity sufficient to skid the cantilever with the most onerous combination of drill floor position, pipe rack load, and setback load through the full longitudinal range of skidding, subject to verification of Builder calculations for the cantilever weight and static friction and approval of same by Designer. The Builder is to provide and install all interconnecting piping, fittings, valves, hoses, etc. to complete the system. Each skidding cylinder is to be connected to the cantilever skidding beam by means of a sliding locking pin housing. The locking pin housing contains the locking pin and transfers all loads between the cylinders and skidding beam. The locking pins are hydraulically actuated and are to be sequenced so that one pin is always engaged in the skidding beam when the cylinders are cycling. This positive engagement is necessary to prevent a run-away situation of the cantilever beam.

Cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit The Builder shall install a Cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit, connect, test and prove operational. The Cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit is designed to power the Cantilever Skidding System. The Cantilever Hydraulic Power Unit is composed of two vertically mounted main electric motors with variable hydraulic piston pumps, a stainless steel oil reservoir tank, an air cooling system, a return line filter, frame and electrical control panel.


Rev. 0

6

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C The control panel provides manual control of the two main pumps and automatic control of the cooler pump. Either pump 1 or pump 2 or both pumps together may be run by pressing the appropriate ‘PUMP START’ buttons. All wires and operators to be wire tagged and labeled. Other features: Low Oil Level Switch Low Low Oil Level Switch Cooler On/Off Temperature Switches High Oil Temperature Switch Immersion heater with integral thermostatic and high/over temperature control Stainless Steel Suction Lines Return Line Filter with Visual and Electrical By-Pass Inidcation All Hose Ends and Piping to be Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Control Panel Motor to Pump Adaptors

Drill floor skidding system For the drill floor transverse skidding system, the Builder shall provide for and install the control console (1 unit) and lift and roll skidding system (4 assemblies). Each lift and roll skidding assembly consists of a base plate, Hilman Roller, lift cylinders and skidding cylinders. The base or skidding plate is supported by the substructure upper flange. A Hilman Roller rests on the upper surface of the base plate. Short stroke lift cylinders, attached to the top of the Hilman Roller, lift the drill floor off of the substructure upper flange. While elevated, the skid cylinders which are attached to both the base plate and drill floor leg are extended, thus moving the drill floor. When the skid cylinder reaches the end of its stroke, the lift cylinders are retracted, lowering the drill floor to the substructure. The skid cylinders are retracted and the process is repeated. The four (4) assemblies operate in unison to move the drill floor port or starboard. The control console shall control and synchronize the operation of the four (4) lift and roll skidding assemblies. Hydraulic power shall be supplied from the drill floor HPU. The Builder is to provide and install all interconnecting piping, fittings, valves, hoses, etc. to complete the system. Operating pressure for the lift and roll skidding system is 207 bar.

12.15

SEA WATER SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

Submersible pumps, suitable for continuous operation while submerged in salt water, with a capacity of 400 m³/h at a head of 60 meters. The pump and motor shall be one assembly consisting of a 60 HZ, three phase electric motor, multiple stage impellers and discharge pipe. Motor details and horsepower is to be determined by the vendor to suit the preceding requirements. The unit is to comply with the applicable attached classification society. Total maximum rig demand shall be met by 2 pumps. The third pump should be provided for redundancy as required by Class. Submersible motors are to be designed for continuous operation under any thrust that may develop. Thrust bearings are to be the high load tilting shoe type. Motor starter will be the reduced voltage type. Motor housing is to be made of bronze. The motor is to be removable from the pump column without the need to disassemble the pump bowls. The motor is to be supplied with a continuous length of electrical cable. The exact length will be determined at a later date.


Rev. 0

7

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C All pump impellers and internal components are to be protected by stainless steel suction strainers. The pump shaft is to be AISI 316 stainless steel. Heavy duty self-lubricating bronze bearings are to be used throughout the assembly. Bowls are to be individually flanged and bolted for positive alignment and assembly and disassembly. The discharge bowl is to have a standard flange connection for attachment to the pump tower. All bowls and impellers are to be fitted with wear rings. Impellers are to be attached to the pump shaft with taper locks. The discharge bowl bearing is to be protected with a sand collar.

12.16

PRELOAD SUBMERSIBLE PUMP

Submersible pump, suitable for continuous operation while submerged in salt water, with a capacity of 500 m³/h at a head of 50 meters. The pump and motor shall be one assembly consisting of a 60 HZ, three phase electric motor, multiple stage impellers and discharge pipe. Motor details and horsepower is to be determined by the vendor to suit the preceding requirements. The unit is to comply with the applicable attached classification society and regulatory body regulations. Pump construction and material specifications are the same as the Sea Water Submersible Pumps.

12.17

SEA WATER PUMP TOWERS & ELEVATING SYSTEMS

The Builder shall provide and install three (3) movable submersible raw water pumps (as mentioned in section 12.5) and tubular pump towers complete with leg mounted guides and elevating systems. One (1) Sea water pump and tower shall be installed on the inboard face of each leg and consists of a series of guides mounted on the pump tower, a pump tower support structure, installed on top of the spud can and two (2) guide rails mounted on the leg bracing tubulars. In the transit mode, the pump tower is supported by the spud can support structure and the guide rails. The rails, guides and fork are shown on the Contract Plans. The Builder shall supply adequate pad eyes on the Sea water pump towers for lifting using the rig cranes, or other suitable means for removal for maintenance. A fixed cable storage / deployment reel with locking dogs and overhead turning sheave support system shall be provided for the Sea water pump power supply cables. The power supply cable shall be of sufficient strength to support the cable weight at working depth.

12.18

MISCELLANEOUS TANKS

The tanks listed in table 12.2 are to be located and connected as outlined on the Contract Plans and/or Specifications. Tanks shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements and/or manufacturer's recommendations for proper operation in the system they serve. The tanks shall be supported on suitable foundations and provided with the required connections for fill, discharge, gauge drains, relief, sounding, access manholes, inspection openings and alarms where required. Tank capacities shall be suitable for the service requirements.


Rev. 0

8


12.19

HELICOPTER REFUELING EQUIPMENT

Consisting of a pumping unit, filtration, metering and delivery hose system and two offshore type fuel tanks with quick release platform for jettisoning of tanks overboard shall be installed. All necessary piping, wiring, drains and coamings shall meet the Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies requirements. Storage tanks shall be located so as to be fully serviceable by the rig cranes in their loaded condition. 12.18.1 Helicopter Refueling Equipment 1 lot Two Portable offshore fuel tank(s), fuel pump, metering and filtration system(s), control(s), discharge hose and ground strap reels. Table 12.2 Independent Tanks QTY

SERVICE

CAPACITY

Remarks

2

RIG AIR

3.4 m³ EACH

SEE POINT 12.7

1

DRILL FLOOR AIR

3.2 m³

SEE POINT 12.7

1

STARTING AIR, MAIN ENGINE

1.0 m³.*

SEE POINT 12.7

1

STARTING AIR, EMERGENCY GENERATOR

2.0 m³

SEE POINT 12.7

1

CANTILEVER AIR

1.0 m³

SEE POINT 12.7

1

LUBRICATING OIL STORAGE (ENGINE ROOM)

4550 LITERS TOTAL

TWO COMPARTMENT 1

LUBRICATING OIL STORAGE (MUD PUMP ROOM) TWO COMPARTMENT

1500 LITERS TOTAL

3

SURGE – 2 MUD – 1 CEMENT

1.98 CU. M. EACH

1

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

1000 LITERS

1

DIESEL OIL DAY TANK

25,300 LITERS *

1

DIESEL OIL SETTLING

25,300 LITERS *

1

EMERGENCY GEN. DIESEL OIL DAY TANK

2270 LITERS *

1

COMPRESSOR LUBE OIL TANK

230 LITERS.

1

POTABLE WATER PRESSURE TANK

760 LITERS

* Final sizes to suit engines furnished and the requirements to be shown on PID’s.

12.20

BOP WORK PLATFORM

The BOP work platform(s) shall be installed on the BOP(s) to provide access to the various levels of the BOP stack. The platforms are of a construction of steel frame with fiberglass grating and handrails with


Rev. 0

9

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C sufficient space to allow work to be carried out on the BOP rams. Each frame attaches to the BOP body lower flange. Where multiple levels are used, a ladder way between each platform level will be included. The platforms also serve to support the BOP control hose umbilical to the BOP stack. In lieu of the working platform, an access basket can be provided.

12.21

ELEVATORS (PERSONNEL)

The Builder is to furnish and install two electrically driven (rack and pinion) elevators in the accommodations as shown on the Contract Plans. The elevator shall have a capacity of 1500 Kg (3300 lbs.). The elevator, equipment and controls shall conform to ANSI A17 and specifications and other applicable regulatory specifications for ship board elevator installations and include alarms and telephones as per ABS MODU rules.

12.22

FORK LIFT TRUCK

A 2.5 mt. electric fork truck shall be furnished by the builder and installed on the lower level of the sack storage room. The forklift shall be of the narrow aisle, free lift uprights type. The Builder shall furnish charging points in the sack storage area, tie-down rings, etc. for securing in the transit condition.


Rev. 0

10


TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 13.0 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS ............................................................... 1

13.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1 13.2 MATERIALS .................................................................................................................... 1 13.3 DESIGN ............................................................................................................................ 2 13.4 IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................................... 3 13.5 INSULATION AND LAGGING ...................................................................................... 3 13.6 OPERATING GEAR ........................................................................................................ 4 13.7 SEA CHEST ...................................................................................................................... 4 13.8 DECK CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................... 4 13.9 MATERIAL SCHEDULE ................................................................................................ 6 13.10 HEAT TRACING SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 6


SECTION 13.0 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS

13.1

GENERAL

The Builder shall verify the information shown on the Contract Drawings to be in accordance with these Drawings and with the information provided by the selected manufacturer of the equipment concerned and the Classification Society and Regulatory Body Requirements. Piping systems, where Contract Drawings are not clear or not available, shall be in accordance with the Specifications, including the general piping requirements in this Section, the Classification Society and Regulatory Body requirements, Industrial Standards and equipment manufacturer's recommendations. All pumps in all piping systems will have to be able to be locally as well as remotely controlled. Where automated systems are installed, there should be a possibility to control the pump from at least one remote location. The pressures in various vital systems may be monitored through the engine room alarm and control panel, systems and locations to be chosen during detailed engineering. The builder shall make a matrix, showing all piping systems, control and monitoring devices for the Owner to approve. The piping systems shall be designed, installed and tested in accordance with the requirements of these Specifications, the Contract Plans, Regulatory Body Requirements, the Requirements of API, ANSI and ASME. All bolts and nuts are to be hot dip or electro-galvanized as a minimum. Some applications may warrant the use of stainless steel bolting. All bolted connections in tanks shall be fitted with lock washers. All gate type valves 50 mm (2 inch) and under shall be bronze or stainless steel, rising stem and union bonnet. Stainless ball valves may also be used for special applications. Pumps to generally have flexible connections at suction and discharge (except fire pumps and diesel oil pumps). Branch circuits and bends are not to be mitered. All fittings (elbows, tees, reducers, etc.) shall be of material grade compatible with the pipe. All elbows are to be standard ‘long radius’ minimum, unless space dictates the use of short radius elbows. All Pressure Reducing valves (PRV) and Pressure Safety Valves (PSV) shall have certificates and shall be recalibrated as necessary such that the validity of the certificates is 6 months from delivery.

13.2

MATERIALS

Piping materials shall be as called for on the Contract Plans and the following: 1.

Slip-on flanges shall be limited to 10 bar (Class ANSI #150) rating.

2.

Butterfly valves size 500 mm (20 inches) and smaller are to be lug type, unless otherwise specified by the owner. Valves 600 mm (24 inches) and larger shall be flanged, unless otherwise required by the Classification Society or Regulatory agency.

3.

Gaskets shall be in accordance the pipe specification for the service intended. Asbestos free gaskets shall be used.

4.

To the maximum extent possible/practical, all valves in a system, or like systems, shall be from the same manufacturer.


Rev. 0

1


5.

To the extent permitted by the Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies, plastic or composite material pipe shall be used.

6.

Plastic or composite material, Fiber-Reinforced Plastic (e.g., “Bondstrand”) shall be used to the extent permitted by Regulatory Bodies and as noted in these Specifications.

7.

All fittings (elbows, tees, etc.) shall conform to ANSI standards (B16.9, etc.). The use of fabricated fittings, including lateral connections in drains, shall be subject to prior approval by the Builder.

13.3

DESIGN

All piping systems shall be designed to provide sufficient rigidity to the system to control deflection due to fluid shock or pulsation and to ensure piping system harmonics are outside of the operational harmonics of the fluid systems. This would generally be applied to high-pressure hydraulics, mud, cementation and choke & kill piping systems. Likewise sufficient compliance shall be provided at joints, support points, and equipment connections through the incorporation of bends, loops, and offset in arrangements, to allow for all stresses resulting from expansion, contraction, bending, vibration, shock and deflection of the machinery and vessel’s structure. Gauges with isolation valves shall be fitted on pump suction and discharge lines. Where subject to high vibrations, gauges shall be remotely mounted free of induced vibrations. In all cases, valves should be positioned in pipe runs so as to make access for their operation and maintenance as simple as practicable. Fresh water velocity in constantly running systems shall not exceed 5 m/s free-stream velocity. Sea water and/or brine velocity, m/s, in all applications other than heat exchangers shall not exceed K times the square root of D where K is 0.30 and D is the actual inside diameter of the pipe in mm. However, in no case shall this velocity exceed 3.7 m/s. Sea water and/or brine velocity at inlet nozzles of and within tubular heat exchangers shall not exceed 1.83 m/s. Maximum inlet velocities to plate type heat exchangers shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. Diesel oil system velocity shall be limited generally to a maximum of 4.57 m/s for onboard operations (suction, discharge and transfer). However, for “On-loading and Off-loading” operations the maximum velocity shall not exceed 7.6 m/s. Lube oil suction velocity shall be limited to a maximum of 1.2 m/s and discharge and transfer piping shall be designed for a maximum velocity of 7.25 m/s. Compressed air pipe velocities shall be limited to 35 m/s. The size and arrangement of suction-side piping shall be designed with consideration to avoiding potential for pump cavitations. In general, all continuous duty pumps shall be sized for lowest speeds possible that result in the proper discharge head for the system. No bilge and drain piping shall pass through fresh water tanks. No piping shall pass through refrigerated, medical, commissary and/or predominantly electrically equipped spaces, unless directly associated with and/or servicing such spaces. Such piping shall be one length throughout unless installation dictates otherwise; necessary joints shall either be welded or brazed sleeve joints or otherwise shielded as approved. Suitable anti-sweat type insulation shall be applied to all exposed or concealed pipes to prevent drips, which will cause damage to equipment and/or discomfort to personnel.


Rev. 0

2

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Piping conveying flammable media shall be routed to avoid being located near hot surfaces or electrical equipment, unless adequately shielded. Gate type valves shall not be used for throttling services, nor shall resilient-seated butterfly type valves be used where close controllable throttling is mandatory. Valve seat and disc material for non-lubricating services shall be of different hardness of material as approved.

13.4

IDENTIFICATION

Systems, associated components and/or equipment, piping and appurtenances, shall be readily identifiable to indicate its service and direction of flow. On drawings the identification shall be: Nominal line size – Material class – System code – line number. Example: 10”-FW-AA4-001. Identification methods shall comply with the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies with color markings in accordance with the Builder’s piping standards. Color-coding shall be banding or solid with direction of flow marked. Label plates shall be brass or stainless steel (stainless steel on and above main deck). Label plates must be securely attached and located adjacent to all valves and components requiring identification. Also, they shall be located so that they will not be easily damaged or be a hazard to an operator's hands. No label plate shall be attached to handrails or in a location where they may be hazardous to any personnel using said handrail. Sounding pipes shall have brass or stainless steel label plates welded or screwed to a base plate, welded adjacent to the pipes. Vent terminals shall have brass or stainless steel label plates screwed to a base plate, welded on the terminal or on an adjacent piece of structure.

13.5

INSULATION AND LAGGING

Insulation materials are to be of an approved type having proven service experience in the marine industry. All insulation materials shall be properly secured and permit ready removal for maintenance, inspection and repair. Selected materials shall not absorb water. Material and thickness of insulation applied shall be selected in order to keep the surface temperature of all insulated and lagged piping and machinery below 66° C. Insulation systems should be designed such that surface temperatures do not exceed 52° C when used in areas susceptible to personnel contract. Calcium silicate or Rockwool insulation in preformed blocks shall be applied to the exhaust piping from all diesel engines and secured with stainless steel wire and covered with aluminum sheeting in interior compartments, and stainless steel sheeting on insulated exhaust in exterior areas. Gaps in insulation are to be filled with suitable insulation material. Hot water piping shall be insulated with mineral wool type material. Refrigerant piping shall be insulated using a pre-formed closed cell foam or equivalent material. Suitable anti-sweat type insulation shall be applied to all exposed or concealed pipes to prevent drips which will cause damage to equipment and/or discomfort to personnel. Such areas would include the overhead of the quarters, galley and other humid spaces. Special attention should be given to refrigeration piping. All insulation surfaces on cold services shall be coated with a vapor sealer at the time of application.


Rev. 0

3


13.6

OPERATING GEAR

Remote operation of valves shall be as shown on the Contract Plans, listed in Builder Furnished Equipment, and as required by Regulatory Bodies. Valve operators shall be open-close or throttling as dictated by the service requirements. Butterfly valve operators shall be electro-pneumatic or electro-hydraulic type. Remote operated pump discharge valves shall be of the throttling type. Valve operators for gate or globe valves shall be electric type, Limitorque or equal. Valves in the bulk material systems will be electro-pneumatic operated butterfly valves fitted with proximity sensors according to the Contract Plans. Owner will furnish the electro-pneumatic butterfly valves fitted with proximity sensors at bulk tanks. Reach rods in tanks shall be solid steel fitted with bronze bearings and bronze universal joints. Reach rods outside of tanks may be solid or flexible, utilizing knuckle type joints and bronze bearings. All bearings and universal joints shall have lubrication points. Extension stems shall be provided on valves as required for ease of operation from gratings, decks and walkways. All power-operated valves shall be remotely and locally operated by power as well as by local manual means. Local manual operations shall be with a hand wheel or lever attached or stored adjacent to the valve. All remotely operated valves shall have local and remote valve position indicators.

13.7

SEA CHEST

See Section 2 for description of sea chest construction. Air flushing of the sea chest is to be provided. Sea chest vents are to be provided. Valves shall be located as close as possible to the shell. All bolting shall be 316 stainless steel. The bilge/preload pumps and the drill water/emergency fire/general service pump via the sea chest shall provide the sea water service requirements, when afloat.

13.8

DECK CONNECTIONS

Deck connections for the transfer of liquid and bulk materials shall be provided by the Builder. All piping systems shown below shall have port and starboard loading/discharge deck connections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Diesel Oil with flow meter (to be fitted with sampling spool at fill station) Drill Water (to be fitted with sampling spool at fill station) Fresh Water (to be fitted with sampling spool at fill station) Bulk Mud (to be fitted with “rock trap” at fill stations) Bulk Cement (to be fitted with “rock trap” at fill stations) Liquid mud with flow meter


Rev. 0

4

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C 7. 8. 9.

Sewage Base Oil (to be fitted with sampling spool at fill station) Brine (to be fitted with sampling spool at fill station)

The Builder shall provide all required valves, goosenecks, flanges and fittings. All loose fittings shall be attached with a keeper chain. All connections shall be permanently and boldly marked. Means shall be provided at the fill connections to contain oil spills in accordance with the Regulatory Body requirements. STOP-START stations for the oil transfer pumps shall be provided at the deck connection in accordance with Regulatory Body requirements. At each Port and Starboard loading station there shall be an extended platform with a facility to drape and hang–off each of the loading hoses. A rub bar shall be installed at the bottom of the side shell in line with the loading station to prevent chafing of the hoses. All bulk loading and discharge hoses shall be provided by the Builder, with a suitable support and securing arrangement, including: 2ea.

Diesel Fuel. 100 mm bore. Platform connection Anson 4" fig 200. connection Todo 4" quick release self sealing hose unit with dust cap.

Boat

2ea.

Base Oil. 100 mm bore. Platform connection Anson 4" fig 200. Boat connection Todo 4" quick release self sealing hose unit with dust cap.

2ea.

Fresh Water. 100 mm bore. Platform connection Anson 4" fig 200. Boat connection Anson Fig 200 male sub and nut hammer with dust cap.

2ea.

Drill Water. 100 mm bore. Platform connection Anson 4" fig 200. connection Todo 4" quick release self sealing hose unit with dust cap.

2ea.

Dry Barite. 100 mm bore. Platform connection Anson 5" FIG 200 female sub with dust cap and 5" male x 4" female API reducing adaptor. Boat connection Anson 5" FIG 200 male sub and nut with dust cap and 5" male API x 4" female API reducing adaptor.

2ea.

Dry Cement. 100 mm bore. Platform connection Anson 5" FIG 200 female sub with dust cap and 5" male x 4" female API reducing adaptor. Boat connection Anson 5" FIG 200 male sub and nut with dust cap and 5" male API x 4" female API reducing adaptor.

2ea.

Liquid Mud. 100 mm bore. Platform connection Anson 4" FIG 200 with dust cap. Boat connection Anson Fig 100 male sub and nut with dust cap and 3" ball valve c/w 4" API to 3" API reducing adaptors either side.

2ea.

Sewage. 100 mm bore. Platform connection Anson 5" FIG 200 female sub with dust cap and 5" male x 4" female API reducing adaptor. Boat connection Anson 5" FIG 200 male sub and nut with dust cap and 5" male API x 4" female API reducing adaptor.

2ea.

Brine. 100 mm bore. Platform connection Anson 4" fig 200. Boat connection Anson Fig 200 male sub and nut with dust cap and 3" ball valve c/w 4" API to 3" API reducing adaptors either side.

Boat

The supply boat end of all hoses to be fitted with Anson Hose Lifter. All hoses to be color-coded according to Regulatory Body requirements.


Rev. 0

5

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C A filling station on rooftop will be provided for the emergency generator lube oil.

13.9

MATERIAL SCHEDULE

The material schedules for piping systems shown on the Contract Plans are for guidance and subject to the requirements developed during the detail design phase. If conflict arises with respect to Classification Society, Regulatory Body, Industrial Standards, or Equipment Manufacture requirements with respect to the tables on the Plans, the former shall prevail. Any other deviations are subject to Licensor approval. All systems in addition to those on the Contract Plans that are required to complete the vessel for intended service shall be in accordance with the piping specifications provided by the Licensor, fabricated and installed by the Builder in accordance with Classification Society, Regulatory Body, Industrial Standards, or Equipment Manufacture requirements.

13.10

HEAT TRACING SYSTEM

The fire main and other essential piping systems (Fire water, Deluge, External Fresh or Potable Water and Grey Water) shall have freeze protection installed. Generally freeze protection in these systems shall be accomplished by using electric heat tracing tape and insulation. In areas where piping runs through hazardous areas, the trace heating system shall be of a type which is suitable for use in hazardous areas. Other piping systems subject to freezing or freeze damage shall be insulated and heat traced as may be required by the Owner or the Regulatory Bodies.


Rev. 0

6


TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 14.0 - PIPING SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................ 1

14.1

GENERAL ......................................................................................................... 1

14.2

PRELOAD SYSTEM ......................................................................................... 1

14.3

BILGE SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 1

14.4

SEA WATER SERVICE SYSTEM ................................................................... 2

14.5

FRESH WATER SYSTEMS ............................................................................. 2

14.6

GENERAL FIREFIGHTING SYSTEM ............................................................ 4

14.7

FRESH WATER GENERATING PLANT SYSTEM ....................................... 5

14.8

LOW PRESSURE MUD SYSTEM ................................................................... 5

14.9

HIGH PRESSURE MUD AND CEMENT SYSTEM ....................................... 5

14.10 DIESEL OIL PURIFYING, TRANSFER AND SERVICE SYSTEM .............. 5 14.11 LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM ........................................................................ 6 14.12 DRAINS ............................................................................................................. 6 14.13 VENTS, SOUND AND OVERFLOWS ............................................................ 8 14.14 DIESEL EXHAUSTS ........................................................................................ 9 14.15 SERVICE AIR ................................................................................................... 9 14.16 FIXED FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS ................................................. 10 14.17 BULK SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 11 14.18 TANK LEVEL MEASURING ........................................................................ 11 14.19 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS ............................................................................... 12 14.27 LEG JETTING SYSTEM ................................................................................ 13


SECTION 14.0 - PIPING SYSTEMS 14.1

GENERAL

The piping systems shall be in accordance with the Contract Plans, and as required to meet the Classification Society and Regulatory Body requirements. The Builder shall verify the information shown on the Contract Plans with the information provided by the selected manufacturer of the equipment concerned and the Classification Society and Regulatory Body Requirements. Piping systems, where Contract Plans are not available, shall be in accordance with these Specifications, including the general requirements in Section 13, the Classification Society and Regulatory Body requirements, Industrial Standards and equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

14.2

PRELOAD SYSTEM

The preload system shall be in accordance with Contract Plans. A saltwater preload/ballast system shall permit filling or emptying any of the saltwater preload/ballast tanks. Pumps for the system shall consist of: 1. 2.

3.

Three remote operated tower sea water pumps, one located in each leg well. One high-volume tower sea water pump located outboard, on the aft starboard side shell. It is intended that this pump will be utilized for early preloading when the vessel has arrived on its site of operation prior to the three leg well tower pumps being placed in operation. Builder shall fabricate and install stowage facilities for the pump when it not in operation; i.e., when the Vessel is elevated greater than 3 m above the waterline. Pump lowering and raising shall be by the starboard crane. Two bilge/preload pumps that can be utilized independently or with the high-volume pump when the vessel is afloat.

The submersible pumps located in each leg well shall also supply the sea water service system, jetting system, and fire system when the Vessel is elevated. Operation of the pumps shall be via the DCS. The preload fill valves shall be arranged in a manifold and located inside inner-bottom void spaces as shown on the Plans. The fill valves shall be grouped to limit the quantity of manifolds to a maximum of three. Isolation valves shall be arranged in optimum locations in the ring main to ensure best preload performance from the various pumps. Preload dump system valves shall be submersible electro-hydraulically operated with valves appropriately located within each preload tank. The valves shall be fitted with limit switches and indicators to provide open or closed position indication. A non-return valve shall be located outboard of each tank dump valve. Control and monitoring of the dump valves shall be via the rig DCS. A manual operated valve stripping system shall be provided with preload tank suction tailpipes are to be located at the optimum low points so that with the rig trimmed aft all tanks can be stripped. Remote controlled valve stripping system is optional.

14.3

BILGE SYSTEM

The bilge system shall be in accordance with the Contract Plans, Classification and Regulatory Body requirements. All preload tanks shall be fitted with 100 mm stripping lines. Bilge lines shall be 100 mm (minimum) from all drained spaces, and no less than 75 mm in all other areas.


Rev. 0

1

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C The bilge system shall be serviced by the two bilge/preload pumps. Connection to the bilge suction manifold shall be via a single bilge main provided with a simplex strainer and independent valve connections at the pumps. All valves in the bilge manifolds shall be of the stop check type. The port firemain pump shall be provided with an emergency bilge suction. The bilge sumps shall be fitted with stainless steel float switches which shall be monitored via the rig DCS. All collected fluids shall be cycled through the oily water separator.

14.4

SEA WATER SERVICE SYSTEM

The seawater service shall be in accordance with the Contract Plans. The submersible pumps, one located in each leg well shall supply the saltwater service requirements of the Vessel, when elevated. The pumps shall be sized to accommodate air gaps up to 20.0 m and consider environmental criteria. The pumps are to be sized to provide their full required water demand with one pump out of service. The sea water service system shall be equipped with basket strainers at the locations of the sea water tower inlets to the drilling unit as well as an anti-fouling system per sea water intake. The bilge/preload pumps and the drill water/emergency fire/general service pump via the sea chest shall provide the seawater service requirements, when afloat. The sea water service system shall supply feed water to the water makers and other heat exchangers requiring salt water. The sea water service system shall also supply water to various drilling services, including the mud ditch, cementing unit and auxiliary equipment, shale shakers, mud charging pumps, mud logging unit, drill floor, sack storage room, mud mixing area, mud pit room, mud pump room, heat exchangers and other areas and equipment as may be necessary.

14.5

FRESH WATER SYSTEMS

The fresh water systems shall be connected as shown on Contract Plans. 14.5.1

Engine Cooling System

The fresh water cooling piping for each main diesel engine is to be developed by the Builder in accordance with the requirements of the selected engine manufacturer. The system shall consist of radiator(s), expansion tank(s), fresh water circulating pump(s), thermostatic control valve(s) and connecting piping. Final arrangement is to be approved by the engine manufacturer and calculations of piping system flow and head losses shall be furnished to manufacturer. The engines shall be unitized with fresh water pumps, thermostatic control valves, water temperature alarms, oil coolers, turbo after coolers and associated piping. A vent line shall be led from the highest point in the fresh water discharge piping on each engine to its respective expansion tank on radiator. Each expansion tank shall be fitted with a vent valve, and make-up water connection which shall be provided via a chemical mixing tank. The expansion tanks shall be fitted with a valve funnel for the introduction of chemicals, potable water connection, sight glass and outlet lines.


Rev. 0

2

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Independent deck mounted radiators shall be configured for parallel operations but will be connected to a manifold in such a way that each one can be isolated. If independent deck mounted radiators cannot be provided alternatively the main engines can be cooled by seawater to freshwater plate coolers. 14.5.2

Regenerative Brake Cooling System (if applicable)

There shall be a sea water/fresh water cooled regenerative brake cooling system, to be fed from the seawater system, complete with fresh water pumps. The resistors will be located in the hull, on the same level as the VFD system. All pumps statuses, temperatures, pressure in/out, delta P and flow to be displayed on the DCS. 14.5.3

Drill Water System

The drill water system shall be connected as shown on the Contract Plans and shall consist of two drill water pumps, drill water tanks and the necessary piping from the pumps to the drill water supply header. The drill water tanks shall be arranged for filling from the main deck through port and starboard valve connections or from the water makers. Water from the drill water supply header shall be piped to the mud pits, mud mix pumps, de-silter pumps, mud process pumps, cementing unit and auxiliary equipment, shale shaker, sand trap and various wash down connections as shown on the Contract Plans. A drill water service line shall also be piped to the mud pumps and into the mud pump room. Three lengths of suitable rubber hose for wash down purposes shall be Builder furnished and installed on dedicated racks. The drill water pumps and all system valves located in the auxiliary machinery room shall be locally and manually operated. All drill water tanks shall be provided with tank level indicators with a level indication display in the jacking control room.

Builder to furnish and install high pressure wash down ring main to cover drill floor main deck, cellar deck, BOP storage area, mud pit room etc. 14.5.4

Central fresh water cooling System

The Central fresh water cooling water system shall be connected as shown on the Contract Plans and shall consist of two auxiliary cooling pumps, plate heat exchangers, expansion tanks and the necessary piping from the pumps to Main engine after coolers, VFD’s, HP mud pumps, air compressors. 14.5.5 Potable water system The potable water supply shall be connected as shown on the Contract Drawings. The potable water system shall provide hot and cold water for drinking, cooking and washing on the Vessel. Discharge from the fresh water pressure set shall be through a properly sized in line UV bacteria treatment, charcoal filter and other chemical injection system as required by the sanitation regulator. The non-treated cold water supply shall also provide make-up for all diesel engine jacket cooling water systems and other machinery services. Wash down outlets suitable for the attachment of 20 mm hose shall be provided in the galley and on the aft sides of the house, port and starboard.


Rev. 0

3


The fresh water pressure sets consisting of pumps and hydrophore tanks shall take suction from the fresh water tanks and discharge through the treatment system to make it into potable water to the various fixtures and services throughout the vessel. Start and stop of the hydrophore pressure pumps shall be arranged such that under normal conditions only one pump is in operation. Hot water heaters shall be as specified in Section 12 of these Specifications. The potable water supply shall be provided with isolation valves as required to facilitate maintenance of system. Isolation valves shall be located in normally accessible spaces such as passageways. The return line of the hot water system from each deck shall be piped back to the hot water circulating pump and each return shall be fitted with ball valve. The pressure side of that pump will feed into the water heaters and supply the hot water back to each level. 14.5.6

Sanitary system

The sanitary system shall be served by two motor driven centrifugal pumps supplying flushing water to all urinals and water closets. An insertable spool shall be supplied to alternatively connect the suction piping of the sanitary pumps to the drill water or fresh water suction piping. The fresh water header at this joint shall be protected with a check valve to prevent the ingress of drill water into the fresh water system. There shall be manually operated isolation valves to ensure isolation between the fresh water or drill water suction headers. The pumps shall normally be arranged to take suction from the drill water tanks. The sanitary pumps shall discharge to a pair (the second unit shall be installed at the 3rd or 4th accommodation level) of 0.76 cubic meter galvanized or epoxy coated hydro- pneumatic tank fitted with a relief valve, gauge glass, air charging connection, manhole and drain connection. Special care shall be taken in the sizing of the pumps and system components to ensure that sufficient pressure and flow is available for toilet flushing in the upper levels of the accommodation, with ample allowance for future fouling of the lines. Likewise, adequate cleanouts shall be provided for cleaning lines. The pumps shall be pressure actuated so that under normal circumstances only one pump is in operation. 14.5.7

Chilled Water Piping for Air Conditioners

Builder shall supply and install interconnecting chilled water piping between the air conditioning system components. Lagging shall be performed according to Section 13, and as addressed below. Any external chilled water piping shall be lagged and covered with stainless steel sheeting. Internal (accommodation and machinery deck) piping shall be lagged using a durable system, suitable to prevent condensate in the non-air conditioned spaces. Supports are to be provided at appropriate spacing, as suitable for the various types of piping and lagging systems. U-bolts are not acceptable for these systems.

14.6

GENERAL FIREFIGHTING SYSTEM

A complete fire main system shall be provided, served by the submersible pumps supplying water to the fire pumps, jockey pump, and the drill water/emergency fire/general service pump. The system shall fully conform to all the requirements of the Classification Society, the Owner and Regulatory Bodies. A complete fire main system shall be provided, permanently pressurized by a jockey pump in combination with hydrophore. For the deluge/foam pump and systems, refer to the Contract Plans.


Rev. 0

4

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C The fire system shall be run throughout the drilling unit and shall include all necessary risers, and isolation valves, hoses, hose valves, fire hose and nozzles, monitors, fog nozzles, applicators, hose cabinets, wrenches, fire axes, etc., to meet the requirements of Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies. All exterior and interior fire stations shall be 63.5 mm (2½”) nominal bore pipe size. Fire hoses shall be stowed on racks or reels with connection spanners and applicator secured with clamps, thus arranged for easy removal. Hose racks or reels outside accommodations shall be located on the walls of the deck houses and be enclosed in heavy duty fiberglass or approved molded plastic cabinets, recessed where possible, and arranged so that the valve is within the cabinet. Hose racks and hydrants inside the accommodation spaces shall be recessed in bulkheads where practical, and preferably large enough to also accommodate the portable fire extinguishers. Permanent type and identification marking, in accordance with Classification Society, Owner and Regulatory Bodies requirements shall be provided.

14.7

FRESH WATER GENERATING PLANT SYSTEM

The fresh water generating plant shall receive feed water from the saltwater service system. Brine water shall be dumped overboard. If heat rejection units are utilized, the energy to produce water will come from the heat rejection of the main diesel engines through the cooling water circuit of the main engines, which also incorporates booster heaters to boost the temperature of the cooling water in case of low heat rejection due to partly loaded main diesel engines. The fresh water from the plant shall be connected to the fill connection for the potable water tanks and to the drill water tanks via a funnel.

14.8

LOW PRESSURE MUD SYSTEM

The low pressure mud system shall be installed as shown on the Contract Plans. A full description of the low pressure mud system is in Section 17, “Drilling Systems”.

14.9

HIGH PRESSURE MUD AND CEMENT SYSTEM

A full description of the high pressure mud system is in Section 17, “Drilling Systems”.

14.10

DIESEL OIL PURIFYING, TRANSFER AND SERVICE SYSTEM

The diesel oil purifying, transfer and service system shall be designed as shown on the Contract Plans. Diesel oil shall be carried in the hull storage tanks. Two diesel oil purifiers shall be arranged to take suction from the settling tank and discharge to the diesel oil day tank. Two diesel oil transfer pumps shall be arranged to take suction from any of the storage tanks and discharge to deck fill connections, mud pits, settling tank or enable transfer between storage tanks. An additional 6.34 m³/h (27.9 GPM) pump shall transfer diesel oil from two (2) main engine day tanks to the service header via a discharge manifold as indicated below: •

emergency generator diesel oil day tank

•

cement unit

•

trip tank


Rev. 0

5

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C •

diesel engine driver starting air compressor

•

mud process are

•

well logging unit

•

burner booms

From the Main Engine Day Tanks, diesel oil shall supply the main engines, boiler and incinerator by gravity feed. Each day tank shall be provided with a high and low level alarm arranged to sound on the Engine Control Panel. The waste discharge from the diesel oil purifiers shall be piped to the dirty oil tank. The diesel oil day tanks shall have a capacity according to the Contract Plans and as required by Classification Society and Regulatory bodies. The diesel oil day tanks and emergency generator diesel oil day tank shall be provided with direct reading level gauges, of an approved type, marked in gallons and liters at gauge or tank itself.

14.11

LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM

The lubricating oil system shall be connected as shown on the Contract Plans and shall be complete with storage tanks and all necessary piping. The main diesel engines and mud pumps shall be arranged for gravity filling from the lubricating oil storage tanks located in the machinery spaces. Drained lubricating oil from the diesel engines and mud pumps shall be piped to the dirty oil tank. Fill lines shall be installed for the lube oil tanks terminating on the main deck and arranged for hose connection and/or funnel for dumping in drums of oil. All fill lines shall be fitted with screens to remove contaminants that may be inadvertently introduced. The oil storage tanks shall be fitted with sight gauge glasses and bolted oil tight access plates for cleaning the inside of tanks.

14.12

DRAINS

The drain system shall be installed as shown on the Contract Plans. 14.12.1 Weather and Interior Drains shall be provided in all spaces and on all decks where water or oil can accumulate so as to create a zero discharge collection and treatment system. All drain lines shall have a minimum slope of 1:100 and utilize lateral and ‘Y’ type connections exclusively, to promote good drainage flow through the systems. The drains shall be divided into two general categories: clean and contaminated. Clean drains shall be piped to the contaminated drain holding tanks (port or starboard) with a provision to isolate the drain collection system from the holding tanks. As an option, clean drains from the main deck may be piped to the drill water tanks, P/S, to relieve load on water maker. Contaminated drains shall be piped to the contaminated drain collecting tanks.


Rev. 0

6

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C All deck drains shall be fitted with a removable strainer plate having an open area equal to the area of the connecting down pipe. Strainer plates shall be bronze. All drain down pipes shall be a minimum of 100 mm pipe, except accommodation decks and coaming drains which maybe 50 mm pipe (minimum), and mud pump room and mud process rooms which shall be 150 mm pipe. Deck drains shall generally be located in the corners of spaces or coamings, but the final location is dictated by the arrangement of the specific area. Clean drains are from those areas not subject to contamination by oily liquids, fuels or chemicals such as quarters, main deck and house top, exterior doors and vestibules, interior accommodation deck drains other than toilet spaces, etc. Contaminated drains are from those areas that are subject to contamination by spillage or leakage of oily liquids, fuels or chemicals. There are four types of contaminated drain collection holding tanks: (1) a single bilge contaminated drain holding tank for collection of liquids from all the below deck machinery spaces, loading stations, vent coamings and main deck pipe storage areas (except mud pump room and mud mixing room), (2) two drain holding tanks (port and starboard) for collection of liquids from the accommodation, main deck and house top, exterior doors and vestibules, interior accommodation deck drains other than toilet spaces, etc. (3) the skimmer tank for collection of fluids from the drill floor and cantilever areas, and other hazardous areas (4) the dirty oil tank for engine room & fuel oil drains and oil from the oil/water separator. All drain holding tanks shall be fitted with individual high level alarms. Drains from the mud mixing room and mud pump room shall be collected into a common header. An isolation valve provides option for fluids from these spaces to be pumped to mud ditch or overboard discharge or to be pumped to offloading or portable holding tank. Rodding (cleanout) facilities shall be provided to allow cleaning of these drain pipes. The drill floor shall be provided with a drip pan and drain collection system of gutters which surround the working areas of the drill floor, including the setback areas. The gutters shall have bar grating covers with an adequate number of down spouts to handle the maximum flows. Down spouts shall be no less than 6" pipe and headers at least 8" pipe. Drain pipes shall be constructed of Bondstrand 2000M or equivalent composite piping materials. Facilities for rodding out each section shall be provided. The drill floor drains and all other cantilever drains shall be routed to and collected in the mud process equipment or cantilever skimmer tank. The drains from the cement unit area coaming are directed to an overboard discharge aft of the transom. The skimmer tank is monitored for level and is automatically (or manually) pumped out with individual sludge gulper pumps to a portable collection tank nearby. Solids that may accumulate in the skimmer tank shall be removed manually via a manhole installed in tank side shell and stored in cuttings skips.. The oily water separator shall be capable of taking suction from, either drain holding tank or the bilge holding tank. Extracted oil is pumped to the dirty oil tank. Processed fluid is returned to the drill water tanks or pumped overboard. A sampling pump system for each clean drain holding tank circulates clean water holding tank fluids through an oil monitor (with strip chart recorder). If the fluid contamination level is less than 15 ppm, the clean water can be dumped directly overboard, otherwise it is recycled through the oily water separator until the contamination level of the water in the clean drain holding tank is reduced to less than 15 ppm.


Rev. 0

7

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C The dirty oil tank shall be provided with a pump and system to allow dirty oil to be pumped to the off-loading discharge station (to shore facilities or barge) or portable container. Remote STARTSTOP push-button stations shall be provided at the port and starboard stations/main deck outlets. 14.12.2 Sewage Piping All plumbing drain systems shall be designed for the installed sewage system. Plumbing drains shall be divided into two categories: clean and soil. Clean drains are all interior drains other than soil. Soil drains are those from toilets, toilet space deck drains, urinals, showers, lavatories and hospital lavatory, bath and shower. All plumbing drain piping shall be fitted with clean outs at least every 12 m. All drain piping shall be provided with vent lines to the atmosphere. Consideration shall be given to the location of vents in respect to ventilation system intakes and normally manned areas, and to prevent siphoning of P-traps. Clean drains from the accommodation level below main deck are to be led to the drain holding tanks or overboard. Soil drain lines shall be piped to the sewage treatment plant. All drains from the hospital shall be piped separately to the sewage treatment plant. All drains piped to the sewage treatment plant shall also be capable of being led directly overboard; however the valves shall be normally locked and blind spectacle flanges mounted in the drain lines to overboard. 14.12.3 Refrigerated Compartments and Food Preparation and Serving Spaces and Equipment Drains Deck drains for refrigerated spaces, laundry, dry stores, mess areas, galley and other food preparation spaces, including pantries, shall be provided in quantity and location so that complete drainage is possible under normal conditions of list or trim. Deck and equipment drains from these spaces are to be led to the sewage system or overboard. 14.12.4 Helideck The helideck and helideck refueling system areas shall be provided with a drain collection system. Coamings around the refueling storage tanks, refueling package shall capture spilled fluids. The helideck surface and recessed tie-downs drains shall be in a manifold underneath the helideck. The collected drains shall be run down to main deck where the fluids can be directed to overboard discharge or to a portable holding tank.

14.13

VENTS, SOUND AND OVERFLOWS

Vents and/or overflows shall be installed for all liquid tanks and void spaces and where tanks are to be filled by pump pressure, the cross-sectional area shall be equal to or greater than 125% of the fill pipes cross-sectional area. Ball check valves in vent terminals for all preload ballast tanks are to have clearance equal to dump valve opening area. Vents from oil tanks shall be fitted with 40-mesh corrosion resistant flame screens protected by 6 mm wire mesh screens and shall be led to the open air. All vents to the weather shall be fitted with balls and covers. Fresh water tank vents shall be fitted with 16-mesh or finer bug screens of corrosion resistant wire. The vents from the lube oil tanks in the engine room and mud pump room shall terminate below the main deck out of the weather.


Rev. 0

8

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C The fresh water and preload tanks shall have remote level gauges for sounding. In order to prevent the discharge of oil upon filling of the contaminated drain tanks, a high level float alarm switch shall be installed in the contaminated drain tank(s). Each of the preload, diesel oil, drill water, and void tanks shall have a straight sounding pipe extending from the main deck to within 38 mm of the tank bottom with 12.5 mm thick striking plate about 150 mm x 150 mm located under the sounding tube. The sounding tube shall be 50 mm pipe 5.5 mm wall thickness, continuously welded and shall have sleeves in way of each deck or tank top penetration. The upper ends of the sounding tubes shall be fitted with sounding plugs on main deck with inscription of tank service engraved on a stainless steel plate adjacent to the sounding plug. All engine crank case vent lines shall be routed to outside the engine compartment with low point drain.

14.14

DIESEL EXHAUSTS

The exhausts from the main diesel engines shall be led from the engines up through the main deck. Each exhaust shall be provided with flanged spark arresting silencer. Exhaust piping and silencers shall be mounted on vibration isolator. All support brackets to hull plate will be extra heavy and attached by use of doubler plates. The exhaust piping shall be provided with sufficient flexible connections to compensate for expansion. Expansion joints shall be stainless steel fitted with an internal sleeve liner. Exhaust pipes shall be run in such a manner as to provide clear paths to all chocks and cleats. The Main Engine exhaust pipes shall be run outboard of the Vessel side shell and vertically down to a point flush with the Vessel bottom plate. Pipes are to be fitted with bypass outlets at the main deck. Access shall be provided to the bypass outlets. Internal runs shall be located to maximize the useable head space in the compartments through which they run. The cementing unit diesel engines and emergency diesel engine shall be fitted with spark arresting silencers.

14.15

SERVICE AIR

The service air system shall be as shown on Contract Plans and shall furnish air for engine starting, drilling services (including air hoists, drawworks, drillers console, power slips, top drive, bulk handling system, control valves, etc.), and other equipment and service outlets throughout the Vessel. The service air system shall be designed for 8.6 bar working pressure and shall be delivered by the service air compressors discharging through an air dryer to the engine room starting air receivers, and the service air receivers as specified in Sections 12 and 17 of these Specifications. Acoustic enclosures shall be installed on the three air compressors. The three service air compressors will be operated on a sequential base, whereby the running hours for each individual compressor will be kept in line with the other ones. The running status and hours will be remotely displayed on the engine room alarm and control panel. Air for the bulk handling system shall be furnished by the air compressors through reducing valve station. Compressor discharge lines and connections to engine starting motors shall be made with flexible hose of a type meeting the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies.


Rev. 0

9

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Each service outlet shall each be fitted with a ball valve and filter, pressure regulator and lubricator to suit vendors' recommendation.

14.16

FIXED FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS 14.16.1 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems A complete high pressure water mist fire dousing system shall be provided by the Builder for protection of the spaces listed below. The system shall be designed and installed in accordance with applicable regulatory body requirements. The System shall be fitted with approved alarm to provide personnel evacuation warning prior to discharge. The alarm signal shall be distinctive, visible, and clearly audible over the normal noise levels in the respective rooms. Ventilation systems will be shut down when the water mist system (or any other means of fixed fire extinguishing system is activated) is discharged into the relevant compartments via the fire and gas detection system “cause and effect” matrix.

The following spaces shall be protected: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)

Engine room Main switchgear room Emergency generator room Galley Paint locker Control room / Radio room Mud pit room and below the mud pit deck plates

The following spaces shall be protected from a unit on the cantilever: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Mud process room and below process pit deck plates Cantilever MCC room LER at drill floor Cement unit room or space

14.16.2 Foam System A complete foam fire extinguishing system shall be provided by the Builder for protection of the spaces listed below. The systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with applicable Regulatory Bodies. 1.

Helideck and helicopter refueling area

14.16.3 Galley Hoods A remote actuated R102 system shall be provided to protect the galley range hood, deep fat fryer and the exhaust ventilation duct. Actuator shall be located at exit(s) from gallery. 14.16.4 Deluge system


Rev. 0

10


For the deluge pump size, location and piping refer to the Contract Drawings. A deluge system shall be provided to protect the drill floor, cellar floor and well test area in accordance with Regulatory Bodies. A water spray system shall further be installed on the handrails near the burner booms on the aft side of the drilling unit, as well as on the hand rails of the adjacent jack houses, to provide cooling during flaring operations. 14.16.5 Sprinkler system (optional) An optional sprinkler system may be provided for accommodation and other areas in accordance with the Regulatory Bodies. Note that an accommodation sprinkler system is not required when an early smoke detection system is installed in every space of the accommodation.

All necessary alarm systems for the fixed firefighting systems as per Regulatory Bodies shall be provided by the Builder. 14.17

BULK SYSTEM

A full description of the high pressure mud system is in Section 17, “Drilling Systems”.

14.18

TANK LEVEL MEASURING 14.18.1 General There will be a level measurement in all tanks, ballast/preload, and any other water, fuel or oil tank. The level display for the preload tanks may be in the area of the preload control panel, with a slave panel in the jacking control room. All other levels may be displayed on the DCS, with a slave panel in the jacking control room. The preload control panel shall be near the pre-load manifold. The panel will have the following functionality: •

monitor and control tower pumps

•

monitor and control bilge/preload pumps

•

monitor the tank levels

•

monitor and control the preload valves

14.18.2 Sensors The tank levels will be monitored using differential pressure sensors with 4-20 mA outputs. The piping will be arranged such that the sensors will be mounted externally to the tanks. Each sensor will be wired to the preload monitoring panel. 14.18.3 Preload Dump Valves The preload dump valves will be hydraulically operated and fitted with a position indicator. 14.18.4 Pumps


Rev. 0

11


The pump stop / start contacts and run signal in the motor starter cubicles will be wired to pre-load panel.

14.19

HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS 14.19.1

Drill Floor

There shall be a water cooled multi-purpose hydraulic power unit with a distribution / pressure control manifold at the drill floor serving: •

Drill line spooler

•

Hydraulic Cathead

•

Hydraulic Rotary drive

•

Casing tong

•

Drill floor lift and roll system

•

Top drive pipe handler

•

SPHS Pipe Handling System and associated hydraulic unit

•

Iron Roughneck

•

Catwalk Machine (on cantilever)

The drill floor skidding systems shall include supply and installation of all piping, hydraulic hoses, etc. and be complete working systems. Pipe work and fittings shall be stainless steel. Isolation valves shall be installed on supply lines, non-return valves on return and drain lines at each piece of equipment supplied by the central HPU. A permanently installed hydraulic oil filtration and cleanliness system including permanent readout of NAS or ISO 4406 cleanliness level should be included at the central HPU. 14.19.2 Rack Chock System There shall be a complete HPU, control console and control distribution system for the F&G supplied Rack Chock system(s) (screw jacks and lift cylinders) at each of the three legs. Each system allows individual control of each individual Rack Chock. 14.19.3 Split Conductor Tension Unit (CTU) The CTU control and accumulator system and split CTU / sliding panel system shall be installed in the moon pool area of the cantilever. The foundations for the system accumulator bottles shall be provided with two extra slots for future expansion. The CTU control system shall be installed to allow both local and remote control/instrumentation display of the system via interface with the DCS. The Split CTU unit shall be installed in the CTP. The installation shall include a complete hookup and function test/simulation. 14.19.4 Cantilever Skidding


Rev. 0

12

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C There shall be a complete and independent HPU, control console and supply and control system for the Cantilever skidding system. The system includes the port and starboard skidding cylinders. 14.19.5

Cantilever hydraulic unit

A complete and independent hydraulic unit for the supply of the following units shall be located on the cantilever:

14.27

•

CTU

•

BOP Handling

•

Casing Stabbing Basket

•

BOP carts

LEG JETTING SYSTEM

The spud cans shall be equipped with a double jetting system: One system shall consist of twelve nozzles underneath the can, and the other system shall consist of twelve nozzles on the upper surface of the can. Two 125 mm standpipes (104 bar WP) shall be installed in each leg with a sufficient number of outlets to allow jetting at any elevation. The jetting system shall be capable of being connected either to the HP mud pump discharge manifold through a relief valve or direct to the raw water system. Deck connections shall consist of two sets of 125 mm valves (104 bar) installed in the vicinity of the leg well and two 138 bar HP flexible hoses. Either hose shall be capable of being connected to any valve. The spud cans are to be fitted with a means of removing water from each spud can. An eductor is located at the lowest point in each spud can. The eductors require an operating pressure of the motive medium to remove the liquids from the spud cans of 10 to 14 bar, at which the suction lift will be around 27 ft. Spud

cans to be fitted with a means of educting water from each can Spud cans. The educator capacity shall be 45 m³/hr. This is usually accomplished by connecting the sea water service system or drill water system via a hose connection to the eductor supply pipe. A rose box strainer is connected to the suction side of the eductor to prevent any debris from getting lodged in the pipe. All supply and spud can water is discharged overboard via a hose connection attached to the end of the eductor discharge piping.


Rev. 0

13


TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 15.0 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ................................................................................................. 2

15.1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL PLANT ......................... 2

15.2

GENERATORS.................................................................................................. 4

15.3

ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELS ......................................... 4

15.4

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) .................................................... 6

15.5

RIG JACKING SYSTEM .................................................................................. 7

15.6

TRANSFORMERS ............................................................................................ 8

15.7

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ............................................................................... 9

15.8

CABLES ........................................................................................................... 10

15.9

A.C. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC’S) ............................................ 11

15.10 A.C. MOTORS ................................................................................................. 11 15.11 CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS ..................................................... 11 15.12 HEATERS AND WINDOW WIPERS ............................................................ 12 15.13 LIGHTING SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 12 15.14 UPS’S, BATTERIES AND CHARGERS........................................................ 14 15.15 ELECTRICAL SHOP ...................................................................................... 15 15.16 ELECTRICIAN'S TEST PANEL .................................................................... 16 15.17 RADIO COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ................................................. 16 15.18 WEATHER INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM .............................................. 17 15.19 ALARM SYSTEMS......................................................................................... 17 15.20 EMERGENCY “SHUT DOWN” (ESD) AND "STOP" STATIONS ............. 18 15.21 INTERIOR COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................. 18 15.22 ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ....................................................................... 21 15.23 NAVIGATION AND SIGNAL LIGHTS ........................................................ 21 15.24 MISCELLANEOUS NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT ...................................... 22 15.25 Alarm and CONTROL SYSTEM .................................................................... 22 15.26 LAN SYSTEM ................................................................................................. 23 15.27 ECHO SOUNDER ........................................................................................... 23 15.28 CCTV SYSTEM............................................................................................... 23 15.29 SHIP SECURITY ALERT SYSTEM .............................................................. 23 15.30 HEAT TRACING SYSTEM (OPTIONAL) .................................................... 24


SECTION 15.0 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 15.1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL PLANT Scope The electrical plant shall be described as guidance herein and in accordance with all applicable requirements of the Classification Society, Owner and Regulatory Bodies. 15.1.1

Design Requirements

The electric plant including power generation, distribution, and electric power consuming equipment, such as lighting, power, communications, and electronics shall be as specified herein, and in accordance with all applicable requirements of the Classification and Regulatory Bodies. The electrical Drawings shall be complete in all details, as required by all applicable Regulatory Bodies, and as specified by the Owner. The Builder shall submit a load analysis plan for the Owner's approval within sixty (60) days after Contract signing. The 'generator load analysis' shall include as a minimum: (1) total connected load, (2) calculated operating loads for various operating conditions (elevating, drilling, emergency, etc.), (3) assumed usage factors for the various loads in the various operating conditions. In addition, the format and information shall be suitable for Regulatory Body approval, specifically for ABS approval. Builder shall prepare a fault current analysis to indicate the minimum interrupting capacity required of each circuit breaker at its point of application. Fault current analysis for the system shall include calculations of symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents at all critical points with a bolted fault. Any assumptions made shall be noted and justified. In addition, the format and information shall be suitable for ABS evaluation and approval. All circuits and equipment shall be adequately protected. Design will be based on IEC standards. Electrical equipment and machinery shall have suitable barriers and screens wherever necessary to prevent personnel from contacting non-insulated energized parts. Nonconductive rubber matting shall be installed at operating and service areas in way of electrical switchboards for the prevention of electric shock. Elementary wiring diagrams, deck arrangement plans, one line diagrams, and other special plans and booklets, as required to sufficiently details all electrical systems, shall be prepared by the Builder and submitted to the Owner for approval. Wiring arrangement plans shall be per composite cable schedule. Units shown on elementary wiring diagrams, for which a separate wiring schematic is provided, may be represented by a block with terminals shown and appropriately marked. Manufacturer's technical manuals (6 copies) shall be provided for all Builder-furnished electrical equipment and systems that require explanatory information and instruction for proper operation and maintenance. Such manuals shall include: • Installation instructions. • Operating instructions, including safety precautions and sequence of operation if needed. • Maintenance procedures and routine adjustments. • Parts illustrations, including parts lists and designation of number as required per component. • Wiring diagram (including conductor color code if applicable). • Trouble shooting procedure.


Rev. 0

2

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C • Dimensions, weights and center of gravity. 15.1.2

Arrangement of Equipment

Electrical equipment shall be installed in such locations as to provide ready accessibility for replacements, service and repairs and to reduce to a minimum any chances that the equipment may be exposed to damage caused by leaking oil or water from piping, ventilation ducts, or containers within the same or adjacent compartments or by excessive heat. Equipment and cabling shall be installed so as to minimize the possibility of mechanical damage during the handling of stores or drilling component 15.1.3

Hazardous Area Classification

The extent of Zone 1 and Zone 2 hazardous area shall be dictated by the more onerous of ABS, CDS, API 505, IEC or IP Model Code of Practice Part 15 - Area Classification Code for Petroleum Installations. All electrical apparatus essential for the safe operation of the rig shall be selected or enabled with the appropriate degree of protection for the area classification into which it is installed. The Builder shall generate a register of all hazardous area equipment, complete with one picture of each type of equipment and the location of all equipment according to a grid pattern to be found on the hazardous area drawings. 15.1.4

Equipment and Materials

All electrical equipment located on open decks shall be rated for full load service at 45 °C. All electrical equipment in enclosed machinery spaces shall be rated at 45 °C, except that in the engine rooms and mud pit rooms are to be rated for full load service at 50 °C. In enclosed non-machinery spaces, electrical equipment may be designed for 40 °C. Flame-proof, increased safety and intrinsically safe equipment located on the open decks or in hazardous areas shall have CENELEC (ATEX) approval and be installed in accordance with the requirements of the Classification Society and Regulatory Bodies. UL, FM, CSA listed equipment is not to be used, unless with specific approval of the Owner. All equipment in hazardous locations as well as the equipment that remains in operation after a shutdown in all other exterior areas, shall be explosion proof certified for operation in Zone 1 or 2, as dictated by the area. Watertight (IP 56) equipment shall be installed in all locations either temporarily or permanently exposed to the weather or subject to flooding. Drip proof (IP 44) enclosures shall be provided for all other electrical equipment. The electrical equipment shall be adequately protected against corrosion and have as a minimum protection an epoxy coating, when mounted in outside areas exposed to the weather. Cable trays shall be of stainless steel in areas where the trays are prone to corrosion (on outside locations, semi exposed areas, mud pit room, shale shaker room, mud treatment and mixing areas, drill floor (above and below), battery rooms, paint locker, etc.) and be hot dipped galvanized metal ladders when located inside the accommodation or technical rooms. All electrical cables, cable connectors, and cable glands shall be provided. All cables shall be sized in accordance with the Regulatory Bodies. 15.1.5

Spare Parts

Spare parts shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies and the recommendations of the manufacturer for one year's operation. Spare parts shall be delivered to Owner onboard the vessel at time of delivery. 15.1.6

Nameplates and Marking for Electrical Equipment

All electrical equipment shall be provided with name plates and carry unique marking for identification. Name tags shall be phenolic or photo-engraved stainless steel in all exposed and aggressive location. Name tags shall be attached with stainless steel screws.


Rev. 0

3

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Every piece of electrical equipment shall be provided with a nameplate as described above; such nameplates will name the equipment, the feeding circuit designation, origin, voltage, and tag number. All electric cables shall be marked in accordance with the Regulatory Bodies' requirements. As a minimum, all cables shall have a permanent ID tag at each end of the cable. In some cases wherein such cables pass through an MCT, a typical marking at each side of bulkhead shall be applied. The ID tag shall correlate with the identification shown on the one line diagrams. Nameplates provided on the switchboards shall clearly identify all devices, their function, circuit or purpose. Circuit identification shall be provided by number, capacity, name, maximum current rating and element rating.

15.2

GENERATORS 15.2.1

Main Generators

There shall be six (6) diesel driven generators which shall supply normal power to the Vessel. The generators shall be arranged for simultaneous parallel operation. The main generators shall generally be as follows: Six (6) Caterpillar 3516 C HD diesel engines, connected to 1918 kVA (1534 kW at pf. of 0.8), 1200 RPM, 690 volt, 60 Hz, 3 phase, generators. The generators shall be: Brushless, for VFD use, insulation class H, ambient temperature 50 °C, with two bearings, Air intake with filters, space heaters, 6 x 10 ohm RTD’s 15.2.2

Emergency Generator There shall be one diesel driven emergency generator (Caterpillar 3512B), 1125 kVA (900 kW at a pf. of 0.8), 1200 rpm, 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz. The unit shall be rated for operation at 50 °C. , and all associated electrical equipment shall also be rated for 50 °C.

The emergency diesel driven generator system shall be equipped with a dual starting system which complies with all applicable rules and regulations.

15.3

ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELS 15.3.1

General

A main 690 volt AC switchboard, 480 Volt MCC boards and a 480 volt Emergency Switchboard (all IT system) and other power and lighting distribution boards shall be supplied and installed by the Builder. The drilling AC switchboard shall be associated with the VFD panels which shall be supplied and installed by the Builder. All MCC's will be located in the main electrical space and in the emergency generator room. All bus bars and connections shall be made from hard drawn pure commercial copper. Bus bars and connections shall be provided with tin plated surface contracts. All free standing control, distribution and switchboards shall be fitted with insulated front grab rails. Sufficient power supplies, telephone, PA/GA, fire and gas detection, etc. shall be routed to 3d party equipment, where these are to be located. 15.3.2

Circuit Breakers


Rev. 0

4


Distribution of circuits from all switchboards shall be in general accordance with the applicable one line diagrams. All ratings shall be demonstrated by load analysis and in accordance with IEC 61892 and other applicable rules and standards. All circuit breakers shall be capable of interrupting the maximum fault current available at their point of application. The protection features and interrupting ratings of circuit breakers shall be coordinated to provide the greatest continuity of service possible and a selective system of tripping which allows the generator breaker to be the last to open. 15.3.3

Main AC Switchboard

This switchboard shall contain the necessary equipment to provide adequate protection and control the generation and distribution of 690 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz power, and switch gear necessary for distribution of 690 volts, 3 phase power. All circuit breakers shall be of the withdrawable type, load sharing shall be droop and ISOC digital, complete with synchronizer, displays, power management system, etc. 15.3.4

Main 480 Volt Distribution Center

Consisting of a “main-MCC ‘A’”, “main MCC ‘B’”, “cantilever drilling MCC ‘A’ MCC ‘B’”, “ventilation MCC ‘A’” and “ventilation MCC ‘B’”, “Emergency MCC” panels, free standing type, front access only, dead front type Main 480 Volt Distribution Centers. All electrical distribution systems shall be of the IT type, floating neutral, complete with earth fault detection systems (where applicable) in each distribution board. The Main 480 Volt Distribution Centers shall be located in the Switchgear/Engine Control Room and shall receive power from the 690/480 volt transformers and distribute this power to motor control centers, transformers, distribution panels, etc. The Main 480 Volt Distribution Centers shall have a split bus arrangement and shall have interlock bus tie and transformer secondary interrupters. These interrupters shall be mechanically interlocked in such a way that it shall not be possible to close more than two at one time. In addition, the bus tie switches shall have a key lock type device which shall prohibit unauthorized closing. The main 480 Volt Distribution center shall have two spare circuit breakers installed for every ten (or fraction thereof) used in the final installation. 15.3.5

Emergency Switchboard

Consisting of a free standing, front access, dead front type emergency switchboard for use with the emergency generator as indicated on the Contract Plans. The emergency switchboard shall control and distribute 480 volt, and 220 volts power to the circuits indicated on the one line diagram and as prescribed by the Regulatory Bodies. The switchboard shall contain voltage sensing, automatic engine starting, and bus transfer equipment as required by rules and regulations. The 480 volt emergency distribution switchboard shall be arranged to allow feedback to the main 480 volt distribution switchboard and synchronized transfer to main power after a black-out. 15.3.6

Low Voltage Distribution Center

One 220 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire ungrounded Lighting and Small Power Distribution Center (IT system) shall be provided and installed by the Builder. The Low Voltage Distribution Center shall have two spare circuit breakers installed for each ten, or fraction thereof, used in the final installation. The spare breakers shall be similar in size and type to those used in final design. The incoming circuit breakers of the 480/220 Volt lighting and small power switchboards shall be withdrawable. 15.3.7

Small Power and Lighting Distribution Panels


Rev. 0

5


Distribution panels for small power and lighting shall be provided with cabinets that have doors and locks, except in spaces where panels are constantly under supervision of personnel, (such as in control rooms, machinery rooms, etc.). A directory frame complete with the cabinet’s distribution schematic shall be installed on the back of each lighting cabinet door. Panel board main buses shall be 3 phase, 3wire ungrounded (IT system) as required. Connections for single phase loads shall be allocated at the main buses in such a manner as to maintain a balanced 3 phase system. Panel boards shall be provided with at least one spare circuit breaker complete, installed but not used, for every ten active units, or fraction thereof, installed. All distribution panels shall be factory assembled, circuit breaker type, completely serviced from the front. Bus work is to be copper with tin plated connections. Circuit breakers shall have a pole for each conductor. 15.3.8

System earthing, protective and instrument earthing and bonding

System Earthing: All electrical systems on a drilling unit shall be IT system, with an earth leakage detection and alarm systems on each phase of all switchboards: 690V, 690V VFD, 480V main and emergency boards are IT isolated and 220 Volt boards are high impedance earthed IT system. Protective and Instrument Earthing: All metal enclosures of panels, motors, junction boxes and other metal frames of workshop equipment, etc. shall be earthed at a location close to the equipment. Instruments shall be earthed and cables connected to these instruments shall be earthed as per manufacturer’s specifications. Bonding: All equipment located on deck, in hazardous areas, the helicopter re-fuelling piping, pump and filters, etc. and other equipment shall be bonded to the metal on the deck or house close to the equipment. The conductor size of the bonding wire shall be according to the regulations.

15.4

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD)

AC power for the drilling motors shall be provided by a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) system as shown on the Contract Plans, One Line Diagram - Electrical Power Distribution System. The VFD system will be fully dual redundant PLC controlled and will use PLC’s, MMI’s, and software packages as appropriate for this type of equipment. Communications to the drillers console will be through dual redundant optical data links (preferably fiber optic) and have control of all the major drilling functions. The VFD system PLC will contain all the necessary components with which to operate and control the top drive drilling system, i.e. no external or separate top drive control system will be required. The below mentioned AC motors shall be connected to the VFD system. Each motor will require one set of motor cables, one set of control cables for connection of blower motors, space heaters, mud pump rod and chain oilers, charge pumps, and safety cut-out switches, in accordance with all Regulatory Body requirements. The AC motors to be connected to the system are as follows: • • •

drawworks AC motors, 1150 HP, 1070 RPM mud pump AC motors, 1150 HP, 1070 RPM top drive AC motor, 1150 HP, 1070 RPM

The VFD system shall provide all the necessary components with which to interface to other miscellaneous devices needed to fully complete the AC power drilling system. These shall include but not be limited to:


Rev. 0

6

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C • • • • • •

Control consoles Drawworks control system Top Drive Mud Pumps VFD brake resistor VFD cooling units

The drillers control panel system shall contain all components necessary for the operation of the following auxiliary drilling equipment: * * * *

15.5

Hydraulic rotary table (optional) Hydraulic catheads Mouse hole tool. Drillers stop / start controls and run indicators (shale shakers, mud process pumps, hydraulic units, etc.)

RIG JACKING SYSTEM

A complete jacking system with jacking and holding capacities as mentioned in Section 6.2.1 shall be provided by the Designer (Friede and Goldman, Ltd.). The jacking system shall be PLC controlled and use a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) system for “soft start” to reduce load impact on the jacking motors, gearboxes, generators and switchboards. System redundancy shall be as per Regulatory Body requirements. The principal mechanical components of the jacking system shall be: • •

Fifty-four (54) Jacking Units, each equipped with a motor and a fail-safe brake. Nine (9) Pinion Wheel Assemblies for measurement of leg/hull height and rack phase differential.

The principal electrical components of the jacking system shall be: • • • • • •

One (1) Central Control Console (CCC) with touch sensitive screens; also housing the PLC CPU and I/O modules for the operation, control, monitoring and alarms of the jacking system. Three (3) jacking cabinet line-ups comprising Incoming Power Cabinet, Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Cabinets, and Motor Control Centers (MCC). These cabinets shall contain the electrical switchgear for each leg and be located in the hull as close as possible to the leg they serve. One (1) Isolation Transformer for reducing the harmonic distortion to the ship’s power supply. One (1) Braking Resistor Bank for the dissipation of regenerated power during descending jacking. Nine (9) Load Transfer Local Control Consoles (LT-LCC) for load transfer from the jacking system to the rack-chock system and vice versa, and for operating the brakes individually. Three (3) Rack Phase Differential Local Control Consoles (RPD-LCC) for monitoring and indication of Rack Phase Differential (RPD), and individual chord jacking.

The jacking system electrical equipment shall be of proven design and construction methods in accordance with ABS rules and IEC/IEEE standards. The Central Control Console (CCC) shall have the following functionality: • • • • • • • •

Data links to the jacking MCC’s. Power indication for each leg (kW value) and each motor. Hard wired emergency stop discrete push-button which shall remove all power from the jacking MCC’s. Separate controls for independent operation of each leg. “HULL UP/LEG DOWN” push-button. “HULL DOWN/LEG UP” push-button. “STOP” push-button. Individual motor status indication, displayed on screen in a graphical format relative to the physical position of each motor.


Rev. 0

7

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C • • • • •

Individual brake status indication. Alarm override key switches. “POWER ON” indication lights for electrical equipment of each leg. Inclinometer alarms. Leg length and RPD value.

The jacking system shall provide a dynamic pinion load monitoring and rack phase differential (RPD) monitoring system. A bi-directional electronic inclinometer shall be provided, mounted in the CCC. The inclinometer shall be electrically interconnected to the jacking system safety circuits. Two separate bubble inclinometers shall be installed for visual reference information. The system shall record historical data for system alarms and overrides and shall record relevant I/O events during jacking operations. The system shall record data for not less than 5 rig moves. A USB connection shall be provided which shall allow the Owner to archive data on Owner supplied data storage devices. An electrical-mechanical load transfer mode to transfer rig weight from elevating jacks to the rack chocks and vice versa shall be provided for the jacking system. Load transfer to and from the rack chock system shall be carried out locally at each chord by means of the LT-LCC installed at each chord. Rack Phase Differential correction shall be done from the RPD-LCC, mounted locally on the top of the jackcase. A selector switch shall be provided to select mode of operation (CCC or LCC’s). Another selector switch shall be provided to switch between LT-LCC and RPD-LCC. There shall be a total of 54 jacking motors, 18 per leg, 6 per chord, 1 per jacking unit. Each AC induction motor shall have sufficient HP / Torque to match the lifting capacity of the jacking pinion, and have a 1.15 service factor. Each motor shall be provided with a space heater for moisture control. Each jacking unit shall be equipped with a weather-proof electromagnetic, double face, spring operated fail-safe brake. The brake monitoring unit shall indicate the opening/closing action of the brake and the brake pad wear condition; these indications shall be displayed at the CCC. The jacking system motors, termination boxes and brakes shall be rated to IP56 or greater.

15.6

TRANSFORMERS

Transformers of the marine, dry, air-cooled type rated for 50° C shall be installed as follows: Two 2000 KVA, 690/480 volt, 3 phase, delta-delta connected transformers shall be provided for power supply to the ship's service distribution buses "A" and "B". One 125 KVA 3 phase, 480/220 volt delta-delta connected transformers shall be provided for power supply to the emergency 220 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire ungrounded emergency switchboard. One 22.5 KVA, 1 phase, 480/220 volt transformer to provide undistorted sinusoidal voltage for clean supply distribution. Two 225 KVA, 3 phase, 480/220 volt delta-delta connected transformers shall be provided to supply power to the ship's service normal 220 volt, 3 phase, 3 wire ungrounded system. Two 12 pulse isolation transformers 690/690 /690 volt, 4000 KVA for drilling VFD system. One 10 KVA, 3 phase, 480/220 volt, delta-wye connected transformer (UPS) shall be provided to supply undistorted sinusoidal voltage to the communication systems power distribution panel and to the electronics systems power distribution panel/radio panel. Two 75 KVA, 3 phase, 480/220 volt transformers shall be provided for the optional heat tracing system.


Rev. 0

8

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C All transformers shall have a local winding temperature display as well as to the DCS. The final rating of all transformers shall be calculated through load balance calculation and load flow diagrams.

15.7

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 15.7.1

General

The distribution of electric power shall be in general accordance with the Contract Plans and calculations done for load balance, load flow, short circuit and selectivity studies. 15.7.2

AC Power-Distribution System

The main AC power system for the vessel shall be ungrounded 690 Volt (IT system), 3 phase, 60 Hz supplied by six main generators, all capable of parallel operation. The generators shall supply 690 VAC power for ship's service power, to the VFD units, two main step-down transformers and to three jacking system feeders, two cranes and spares.

The secondary of each 690/480 Volt transformer shall be connected to a 480 volt distribution bus located in the Switchgear/Engine Control room. The 480 volt distribution buses shall provide power and control to the various 480 volt power equipment located on the Vessel. Normal lighting, control, small motors, galley equipment, and motor heater power shall be supplied by two banks of transformers fed from the 480 volt main bus. Galley and laundry equipment may be supplied from either 220 Volt or the 480 Volt distribution. Socket outlet, heating and lighting groups shall be supplied through separate groups on the distribution boards and panels.

15.7.3

Receptacles

There shall be provided general purpose AC receptacle with ground fed from the lighting and small power distribution board as well as one duplex socket outlet per stateroom. Single socket outlets shall be installed near all lavatory mirrors in accordance with Regulatory Body requirements. The type of receptacle shall be selected per owner requirements. In addition, socket outlets shall be installed for the following equipment: *

Adjustable Bracket Lamps *

Desk Lights

*

Portable Bench Tools

*

Portable Lights

*

Television Sets and Radios (in recreation room)

*

Office Machines

*

All fixed, however removable equipment

220 Volt receptacles shall be distributed throughout the Vessel. In the accommodation passageways there shall also be 220 Volt socket outlets, so as to permit the use of portable tools, including vacuum cleaners, at any location without requiring more than 10 meter (30 ft.) of cable between the socket outlet and the tool (location to be confirmed by the Owner). A separate 220 Volt distribution system for harmonic sensitive equipment (computers, monitors, instruments, etc.) will be fed from the “clean” undistorted distribution source (UPS or transformer). This system shall be run to all computer locations, toolpusher’s office, company man’s office, barge engineer’s


Rev. 0

9

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C office, warehouse office, radio and control rooms, drill floor and mud logger’s cabin and other defined areas. All outlets shall be clearly marked and fitted with special computer service only plugs. There shall be at least 6 power socket outlets (480 Volt, 63 Amps) on the main deck, in addition to that there shall be dedicated socket outlets in workshops for portable and fixed tools, 3rd party units etc.

15.8

CABLES 15.8.1

Selection of Cables

All electric cables and the installation thereof shall meet the requirements of the IEEE - 45, IEC 332-3 Category ‘A’ and IEC 331 (where applicable), and the ABS Rules. The feeder cables are to be calculated as per rules and regulations. All cables for installation in the accommodation shall be of a low halogen, low smoke type. Conductor colors shall comply with IEC harmonized color coding and marking of cables. A cable specification shall be developed by the Builder. All cables shall be rated for 90 ºC conductor temperature. All cables shall include an earth conductor. In lieu of separate earth conductor, the use of bronze armored cable shall be permitted for earthing. Cables in the accommodation areas shall be of a low smoke and halogen free type. Cables installed on the drill floor, cantilever, mud pit room and mud pump room shall be mud resistant to NEK 606 standards. Communication and Instrument cables shall be shielded and screened (individual or overall and twisted as required by the equipment or system manufacturer). Fiber optic cables shall have an orange outer jacket; all cables for intrinsically safe circuits shall have a blue outer jacket over the whole length of the cable and be run in separate cable trays. VFD cables shall be 3 core + 3G shielded with bronze armor. All outside cables shall be non-metallic armored and approved for use in hazardous areas and mechanically protected against crane handling and falling objects Suitably armored cables are required if the cable enters a Zone 1 Area or the area within 15 meters of the rotary table and any part of the derrick, unless separated by a solid boundary, or if the services supplied by the cable are essential and required during or after a major or catastrophic failure. 15.8.2

Installation

Where cables pass through watertight decks, kick pipes or preferably multi cables transits (MCT) shall be used. Each kick pipe shall consist of piece of steel pipe, threaded on the upper end, fitted with a female terminal-tube with the lower end welded into the deck. Kick pipes shall be 30 cm (12") in height. The use of potting compounds on multiple cable penetrations on water tight, gas tight, weather tight, or fume tight (Class A) bulkheads is not acceptable even if such installations are Regulatory Body approved. The MCT shall be filled only with the proper manufacturer’s supplied blocks and inserts, according to Regulatory Standards. Composite materials may be used for cable trays and conduits wherever allowed by the Regulatory Bodies and the Classification Society. Cables shall be arranged so that external magnetic fields are reduced to a minimum especially for high current cables when passing through cable entry plates in MCC panels with metal cable glands. All cables exposed to radio frequency fields, and particularly those within spaces containing radio equipment shall be metallically shielded throughout their entire length in the exposed areas. The shielding armor (or braiding) shall be efficiently grounded at the equipment to which they connect. All cables installed on cable trays and cable guides in the engine room, other technical rooms and in the weather (on deck, cantilever and drill floor) shall be in accordance with ABS rule requirements.


Rev. 0

10

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C All cables from the emergency switchboard to all emergency consumers shall NOT be routed through high fire and damage risk areas, including the main generator room, mud pit rooms, galley, etc. The cabling for emergency consumers shall be of a fire-resistant (IEC 331) type where required by Regulatory Bodies and, in general, shall be separated from other power cables as far as practical. The builder shall submit the cable sizing philosophy, depending on bundling of cables and voltage drop calculations for each power cable. For motors, voltage drop calculations shall be provided considering the current inrush on motor starting. 15.8.3

Test after Installation

The Builder shall carry out voltage drop calculations and insulation tests on any circuits before connecting.

15.9

A.C. MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC’S)

The Builder shall submit a motor control matrix to the Owner for approval. Auto/manual, Local/Remote in the field or on the MCC face, remote control and/or monitoring shall be as per Owner requirements In general, any switchgear for AC motors shall be mounted in MCC. The controllers shall be provided with motor running lights, overload reset buttons and motor heater on/off switch with indicating light (if motors are fitted with heaters). Motor controllers having float, vacuum, pressure, etc., pilot operating devices shall have provisions for hand off automatic (H/O/A) and continuous operating in the event of failure of these switches. Motors equipped with space heaters (3 kW /5 HP and larger) are to have their heaters automatically energized when the motor is not running. A door mounted H/O/A switch shall make it possible to defeat this feature. All controllers shall have 127 or 220V AC control circuits. A control transformer within each controller shall supply control power. The controllers for motors 75 kW (100 HP) or larger connected to the 480 volt main or emergency bus shall be of the reduced voltage or a solid state type soft starter. The number and location of MCC shall be as shown on the Contract Plans.

15.10

A.C. MOTORS

Except for the drilling VFD motors, all motors to be IEC standards and frames, minimum IP 23 in the accommodation, IP 44 in machinery spaces and IP 56 in outside areas (in open spaces). Motors shall be designed for operation in ambient temperature as required by the Regulatory Bodies. All motors shall be squirrel cage induction type rated for Class "F" insulation with 1.15 service factor (S 1). All electric motors in the hazardous areas shall be ATEX certified and rated for the relevant gas group type and have a minimum temperature rating of T3. All AC motors shall be equipped with proper terminal strips and no bolted connections will be acceptable.

15.11

CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS

Electrical connections shall be made using solder less copper pins or lugs on terminals provided in the equipment or on Owner approved terminal strips, such as Weidmueller terminals, etc. These lugs or pins may then be screwed to the appropriate terminal strip or board or terminated in motor termination blocks inside the motor connection box.


Rev. 0

11


15.12

HEATERS AND WINDOW WIPERS

There shall be an adequate amount of window wipers for the jacking control room, the radio room and the driller’s house. Each window wiper shall have a disconnect switch mounted adjacent to the window or on a central control console. All window wiper systems shall be provided with a window wash system as well. There shall be an anti-condensation heater for the control room, driller’s cabin, crane operating cabin and other locations where windows may fog up in certain weather types. There shall be space heaters for the jacking MCC’s, outside motors larger than 5 kW, pump room motors, independent starters not located in the electrical rooms and other spaces where electrical equipment requires anti condensation heaters.

15.13

LIGHTING SYSTEM 15.13.1 General All lighting equipment shall be designed for operation at 220 volts, 60 cycles, single-phase AC. All fluorescent fixtures except in quarters shall be equipped with approved type high output ballast designed to give hum-free operation and to reduce RF interference. Lighting fixtures provided for the derrick and drill floor and all fixtures located above 4 meter from the deck shall be fitted with stainless steel safety lanyards. 15.13.2 Emergency Lighting System The emergency lighting system shall be supplied with 220 volts, 3 phase power via the 480 volt/220 volt , 3 phase, 3 wire delta-delta transformer located in the emergency generator room. All Emergency lighting fixtures shall have a red “E” attached to the lens or housing on strobes, indicating the light is part of the emergency circuit and shall be installed in quantities in the appropriate locations required by rules and regulations, and as specified herein. The emergency lighting equipment, distribution systems and controls shall be as specified by the Owner and as required by Regulatory Bodies. The accommodation shall have low level escape lighting as per IMO resolution A.752 (18) As a minimum, emergency lights shall be installed in the following locations: 1.

Throughout the machinery spaces to permit the performance of essential operations and observations to facilitate restoration of power.

2.

Throughout the drilling unit adequately distributed to permit personnel to readily find their way through passageways, up stairways, or by other available means to open decks with all water tight doors closed.

3.

In the galley, mess room, recreation room, and the hospital.

4.

On the heliport.

5.

At life raft launching stations.

6.

At lifeboat stations

7.

In the tool pusher's office

8.

In the jacking control room and the engine control room (main electrical room).


Rev. 0

12


9

In the radio room

10.

On the drill floor and in the BOP control and handling area

11.

At the port and starboard cranes

12.

Escape routes, including leg wells

13.

In front of the switchboards, MCC and other important control panels, i.e. engines, BOP control and main unit, etc.

15.13.3 Illumination Requirements Ultimate illumination values shall be determined by applying a maintenance factor (ratio of maintained lux in service to initial lux) of 70 % to initial values to allow for deterioration of lamps, reflectors, enclosures and painted surfaces of the compartments. Lux levels obtained by applying the maintenance factor may range higher than level specified.

Ultimate illumination shall be provided as follows unless higher values are required by ABS Rules: Machinery Rooms Engine Room Engine Control Room Mud Pump Room Mud Pit Area Access Areas Emergency Generator Room Auxiliary machinery Room Electrician's Shop Mechanic’s Shop

100 lux 500 lux 150 lux 150 lux 100 lux 200 lux 200 lux 300 lux 300 lux

Access-Storage Areas Bulk Mud Storage Area Bulk Mud Handling Area Sack Storage Area Passageways

100 lux 150 lux 100 lux 100 lux

Staterooms Mess room Recreation Room Toilet/Washroom/Change Room/Shower/Passages Hospital Galley Offices

100 lux 200 lux 100 lux 100 lux 100 lux 300 lux 500 lux

Radio Room Jacking Control Room

300 lux 300 lux

Stairways

100 lux

Living Spaces

Control Rooms

Miscellaneous


Rev. 0

13

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Drill floor Derrick Monkey board Shale shaker house Fire pump room Supply boat loading area Pipe rack Material handling Platforms under Drill Floor Parts, Storage and Issue Spaces Jack Case and Rack Chock Areas Moon Pool Area BOP Service Area

200 to 300 lux 200 to 300 lux 200 lux 200 lux 100 lux 100 lux 150 lux 150 lux 100 lux 100 lux 100 lux 100 lux 200 lux

Escape lighting, this may generally be 25 lux. As per IEC 61892-2, chapter 11.4 Regardless of detail illumination levels, the following detail lighting fixtures shall be installed: (1)

Fluorescent berth lights, 15 W maximum, shall be installed on all berths.

(2)

One lighting fixture and one AC receptacle shall be installed on each lavatory mirror; individual control shall be provided for each mirror light.

(3)

A desk light shall be installed at all desks.

15.13.4 Floodlights Floodlights are to be Sodium lamp type except at the lifeboat, life raft and heliport, where Halogen lamp beam type floodlights shall be used. The lights near the lifeboats shall be battery backed.

15.14

UPS’S, BATTERIES AND CHARGERS 15.14.1 General UPS/Batteries for BOP control system, PA/GA, fire and gas detection system, drilling control system, engine room control system, LAN, and other 3rd party systems except where otherwise specified, shall be of lead acid , sealed and maintenance free type installed according to the Regulatory Bodies requirements. The capacity of the UPS/Battery systems shall be in compliance with the Class and Owner’s requirements. The harmonics of all UPS/Battery units, VFD’s, etc. shall be within 5 % per unit and 8 % of all units. Battery charging shall be by means of silicon rectifiers of the convection type or PWM controlled. The equipment shall be complete with transformers and other components required accomplishing high rate charging and trickling charging of the batteries. Over current and surge protection shall be provided. Charging rates shall be automatically controlled over both the high charging and the trickle charging ranges. The high charging rate shall be controlled by an adjustable time and a battery voltage sensing device. The Builder shall provide a matrix indicating the required operation duration per battery for each safety system and present that the Owner for approval. Each charger shall be fully capable of charging its attached battery in not more than eight hours. The following equipment shall be included on each charger. Ammeter-high rate, ammeter-low rate, output voltmeter, potential free charger failure contacts and controls as necessary. 15.14.2 General Alarm Battery System


Rev. 0

14

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C There shall be two battery backup (or a UPS) of sufficient capacity for the equipment providing the general alarm signal system which shall comply with the Regulatory Body requirements. 15.14.3 Radio Battery System Radio Battery(s) and charger(s) for the radio communication equipment shall be supplied and installed by the Builder. 15.14.4 Battery Lighting System For temporary lighting during a total power system shutdown, an auxiliary lighting system of a number of battery backed fluorescent lights shall be provided as deemed necessary by the Owner and the Regulatory Bodies in safe evacuation of the Vessel. Each fitting shall have two fluorescent lamps or bright LED lights. The lamps shall be energized by an internal NiCAD or Lithium Ion battery with a self-contained charger. The battery powered lights shall be located but not limited to the following areas: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Accommodation Jacking control room engine control room engine room switchgear room mud pump room mud pit room mud processing area drill floor training room recreation rooms mess room galley (including storage areas). sack storage room workshops helicopter waiting room auxiliary machinery rooms Muster stations Outside walkways

Each lifeboat station shall be equipped with battery powered lights as approved by the Classification Society. All battery backed light fittings outside the accommodation Temporary Safe Refuge (TSR) shall be suitable for Zone 2 area.

15.15

ELECTRICAL SHOP

The electrical shop shall be provided with the following: 1

Work bench, steel with wood top 32mm (1¼" thick), drawers, shelves, battens, etc.

1

Tool board for storage of portable electrical instruments, installed over work bench.

1

Swivel base vise with 125 mm (4½") jaws with aluminum inserts.

1

Electrical test panel.


Rev. 0

15


15.16

ELECTRICIAN'S TEST PANEL

Receptacles, rated 20 amperes, shall be mounted on the bulkhead above the work bench in the electric workshop to provide the following power supplies for testing purposes: 690 volt, 32Amps, 3 phase, 60 Hz 480 volt, 32Amps, 3 phase, 60 Hz 220 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hz 127 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hz 0 to 36 volt DC, 15Amps variable Adjustable Auto Transformer with an input voltage of 127 volt or 220 volt, output 0-230 volts AC or DC. All circuits shall be complete with a volt and ammeter and a circuit breaker that can be operated without opening the test panel.

Matching CEE 17 format plugs with 3 meter (10 ft.) long cords shall be provided.

15.17

RADIO COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT

All radio equipment of any type (including cable, antenna(s), remote displays, controls, switches, etc.), shall be installed and tested. Hangers, wire ways, cable straps, etc., shall be provided as needed to deliver a complete working installation of each communication system.

Radio Communication Equipment List ITEM

QTY

1

1

2 3

5 8

4

5

5

1

6

6

7

6

8 9

1 1

10

1

11 12 13 14

1 1 2 1

15

1

16 17

1 1

DESCRIPTION MF & HF (SSB) radio communicating system (250W) which cover the requirements of GMDSS for Ocean Areas AI, A2, A3 Two way radio Telephone portable VHF radiotelephone Including Cranes and Lifeboats. Radar Transponder for use in Search and Rescue Operations (SART); Complies with GMDSS, IMO/SOLAS. EPIRB for GMDSS 406.0 MHz Standard Communications brand handheld Marine VHF-FM, Rated Intrinsically Safe. Standard Communications brand handheld Marine radio, UHF-FM, Intrinsically Safe, 8 channel capacity with 4 most used channels pre programmed Inmarsat-F Ship Earth Station Non-Directional Aircraft Beacon Navtex Receiver / Printer for dedicated reception at 518 KHz; SOLAS, IMO,GMDSS with kit to include Active Antenna GPS, eight outputs Aircraft Base Radio Panel Mount Transceiver, VHF-AM, 25 Watts output Aero VHF talkback Clock with three hands, silence times, battery powered. MF&HF (SSB), 250W for Back-up, installed in communal drilling office. (Optional) Inmarsat - C (EGC receiver) SSAS Inmarsat terminal

The main radio station facilities shall meet as a minimum of the GMDSS regulatory requirements. One (1) Satellite Communications system with voice, data, fax and telex capability is part of that installation.


Rev. 0

16


15.18

WEATHER INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM

A weather instrumentation system shall be installed consisting of weather and environmental instrumentation with sensors, visual displays (wind velocity and direction, dry and wet bulb temperatures, relative humidity, atmospheric pressure, cloud base measurement, visibility, etc.) and a wave height recorder. The weather system shall be installed in the radio room and have displays in the jacking control room and on the engine control room panel.

15.19

ALARM SYSTEMS 15.19.1 Ventilation Failure Alarm The loss of ventilation air to enclose hazardous areas and electrical equipment rendered non-explosion proof through loss of air pressurization is to be suitably alarmed in the DCS. 15.19.2 Local Engine Alarm Panel Each main diesel engine shall be provided with a local alarm and indication panel as well as an alarm and indication page on the DCS (display), having the following alarms and shutdowns: •

High cooling water temperature, alarm and shutdown (only on manufacturer’s set points)

•

Over speed, shutdown

•

low oil level, alarm and shutdown (only on manufacturer’s set points)

•

low oil pressure, alarm and shutdown (only on manufacturer’s set points)

•

crankcase overpressure, shutdown

•

high oil temperature, alarm and shutdown (only on manufacturer’s set points)

•

low oil temperature, alarm

•

generator bearing temperature with digital readout

Collective alarm signals shall be fed to the drill floor miscellaneous alarm panel.

15.23.3 Fire Alarm System See section 7 for a description of this system. 15.23.4 Gas detection and alarm system (Hydrocarbon and H2S) See section 7 for a description of this system. 15.23.5 Sprinkler Alarm System A sprinkler alarm system shall be provided in accordance with Regulatory Body requirements when such a system is installed. 15.23.6 Other Alarm Systems


Rev. 0

17

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C In addition, the vessel shall have all alarms required by the Regulatory Bodies, and other alarms belonging to specific pieces of equipment. The miscellaneous alarm panel shall be installed in the DCS and the remote collective slave alarm panel is to be located in the driller’s cabin and the jacking control room.

15.20

EMERGENCY “SHUT DOWN” (ESD) AND "STOP" STATIONS

The ESD philosophy shall comprise the functional requirements of the safety systems upon detection of an abnormal situation, the fail safe functionality for the safety systems shall be included. The philosophy shall indicate actions to: Limit the duration and severity of the incident Protect personnel exposed to the incident Limit environmental impact Facilitate escape, muster and evacuation as necessary Interaction between the following systems shall be addressed during the HAZOP meetings between the Builder and the Owner’s safety team: ESD, Fire and gas detection system, drilling process and well control system, alarm and communication systems, active firefighting systems, ventilation systems and energy sources that drive the emergency functions. The ESD system comprises: Manual input devices (pushbuttons) to be located in strategic locations, radio room, helideck, drill floor, near the lifeboats, tool pusher’s office and engine control room. Interfaces towards other systems: Fire and gas detection system, usually one single integrated system Alarm and communication system, PA/GA, driller’s intercom, radio station Drilling shutdown system and procedures Well control systems Firefighting systems Ventilation systems A central control unit (ESD shutdown control panel) receiving and evaluating signals from the input devices and other systems, creating output signals to devices that shall be shut down or activated. The ESD system will provide visual indication of initiated inputs and activated outputs and local audible and visual alarms, output actuators, relays, valves, dampers, as well as status indicators Signal transfer lines between the ESD central and all input devices, interfaced systems and output actuators. The ESD system shall be supplied normally from the main power supply (as well as the emergency power supply) and a monitored UPS and battery backed up power supply, capable of supplying power for at least 30 minutes on loss of main power. The ESD control unit shall be installed in a non-hazardous, continually manned control room. Stop stations shall be provided at the deck discharge stations for the fuel oil and dirty oil transfer and bilge oily water separator pumps. Emergency "STOP" stations (2) shall be provided outside the machinery spaces to stop motors driving the fuel oil pumps, the machinery space ventilation fans, and the mud pump, mud pit room ventilation fans.

15.21

INTERIOR COMMUNICATIONS


Rev. 0

18

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C 15.21.1 General Public Address (PA/GA) and telephone (PABX) Systems: 15.21.2 PA/GA system Two free standing PA/GA (2 x 1500 Watt, A + B system) system housed in 19" industrial cubicle, front and top access only, allowing good access to all out going cables and terminals without the need to withdraw any of the amplifier or exchange racks. Each 19” rack shall be installed in a different space and one of the units shall be explosion proof, possibly by means of overpressure with a back-up air vessel. Each PA/GA unit will have a UPS with DC Battery backup package. The PA/GA system shall be equipped for the following access inputs: • • •

2 Microphone inputs. 2 PABX inputs. Alarm inputs

Microphones shall be located in the toolpusher’s office, jacking control room and in the radio room; there shall be a priority speech set up, Builder to supply the matrix, Owner to approve. Zone selection shall be three in total • • •

Zone 1 - All areas, except sleeping and resting areas Zone 2 - Accommodation Zone 3 - All Call

Alarm selection shall be four (4) in total • • • •

Alarm 1 – Fire/ Combustible Gas Alarm 2 - H2S Gas Alarm 3 – General Muster Alarm 4 – Abandon Vessel

The audible alarms shall be generated through the PA/GA system which shall be activated by the fire and gas detection system for fire and gas alarms and by the ESD system for abandon vessel. Visual alarms shall also be fitted in all high noise areas which will also be activated via the PA/GA, fire and gas detection system or the ESD system. There shall be ample telephone sets in all areas of the drilling unit, those in noisy areas, shall be equipped with a sound deadening booth and flashing lights. All telephones, speaker, cables and associated equipment outside the accommodation shall be suitable of Zone 2 installation. 15.21.3 PABX system The telephone exchange PABX system housed in 19" industrial cubicle, front and top access only, allowing good access to all out going cables and terminals shall be equipped for up to 140 extensions (plus 10 % spare) and the following levels of land line access pre-programmed: • • •

1 level for Inmarsat access 1 level for platform access 1 level for radio access

Associated with the interconnection from the PABX to the PA/GA system, there shall be digital storage and forwarding devices. These devices will store the audio announcement from the PABX. On the hanging up of the telephone extension or after a pre-set time with “off-hook” signal the digital storage


Rev. 0

19

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C and forwarding devices will pre-chime the audio amplifiers and broadcast the announcement over the selected zone. Outgoing terminals from telephone are to be labeled with the telephone extension number. The PABX system shall operate from the following supplies 1. 2. 3.

AC Normal Supply - 220 V, 60 Hz AC Emergency Supply - 220 V, 60 Hz UPS with Battery Back Up - 24 VDC or UPS

On loss of 1, 2 will seamlessly take up the load. On loss of 1 and 2, 3 will seamlessly take up the load, with the option to manually change over and bypass function. An integral alarm system will monitor the PA/GA and PABX system for failure of exchange, amplifiers, extensions and power supplies. A potential free contact shall be provided for remote alarms of major failures, this shall be monitored by the DCS. 15.21.4 Hospital Call System A hospital call bell system shall be provided with annunciators in the radio room or in main control room, a push-button at each hospital berth, a rotating beacon outside hospital, a bell in the medic’s stateroom and connections for a miscellaneous alarm panel.

15.21.5 Drilling Communication System A hands free communication system with the talk back facility shall be installed serving the following areas: •

drillers cabin (2)

•

mud pump room

•

BOP Area (2), (strip tank + CTP area)

•

monkey board

•

cement unit

•

upper mud process room

•

mud pump room

•

Drill Floor

15.21.6 Sound Powered Telephone System The system shall include the following stations:

Station

Special Features

Jacking Control Room

N.W.T Sound powered telephone

Engine Control Room

Auxiliary 24VDC horn, flashing red light in Engine Room

Emergency Generator Room

Sound deadening hood, high volume ringer and auxiliary 24VDC horn

Drill Floor

Explosion proof unit


Rev. 0

20


Lifeboats

Explosion proof unit

Tool Pusher’s Office

15.22

ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM 15.22.1 Television System A satellite television system with a minimum of 6 free to air decoders and a distribution system shall be provided consisting of four Owner approved 42" diagonal LCD/LED or Plasma color stereo television stereo sets (HD ready). The televisions shall be capable of multiple format (i.e. NTSC, PAL, etc.). Four (4) of which two (2) HD ready DVD/Blue ray/VCR players with multiple format (NTSC, PAL, etc.) capability shall be provided. The television sets shall be connected to a television distribution amplifier mounted in the radio room. Game consoles shall be provided as part of the entertainment system. The television distribution amplifier shall be connected the satellite distribution system, to be provided by the Builder. TV distribution outlets shall be installed in each cabin, offices, gym and hospital. 15.22.2 Entertainment Radio System The entertainment radio system shall consist of two radio receivers/CD players having AM band coverage of 540 KC to MC, at least 5 SW bands 13-80 m, and FM frequency band coverage. The radio receivers shall be separately mounted.

15.23

NAVIGATION AND SIGNAL LIGHTS 15.23.1 Running Lights Port, starboard, and stern lights shall be two compartment type with filament (or bright LED) lamps in each compartment as per the rules and regulations. 15.23.2 Anchor Lights Bow and stern anchor lights shall be single compartment type with single filament lamps (or bright LED) as per rules and regulations. 15.23.3 Signal Lights An array of fixed lights on the mast powered from and switched at the running light panel in the jacking control office each consisting of a single filament lamp (or bright LED) in a Fresnel lens fixture of the proper color shall permit signals to be displayed. 15.23.4 Aircraft Warning Lights A flashing or steady red light shall be provided at the highest point of the derrick. Aircraft warning lights for derrick legs shall be provided. Self-contained aircraft warning lights on top of each leg complete with lights, batteries, solar powered charger, photocells, etc. shall be provided. A red aircraft warning light shall be installed on each crane boom tip and ‘A’ frames. 15.23.5 Helicopter Lights and Illuminated Wind Sock


Rev. 0

21


Outline lights for the perimeter of the helicopter platform shall be provided in accordance with the Regulatory Body requirements. The helideck and approach lights shall be in accordance with CAP 437 requirements for spacing and color. Builder shall designed and arranged the helideck lighting system as per CAP 437 guidelines and Ower’s approval. An illuminated wind sock on a hinged mast (for re-lamping) shall be provided and installed clear of the landing area but visible to pilot on his final approach. An illuminated wind sock shall be provided on aft crane to indicate wind direction to drill crew during gas release.

15.23.6 Obstruction Lights and Fog Horn A flashing light system and fog signal horn shall be installed. The light system shall consist of three 15 mile, three 10 mile and one 5 mile marine signal lanterns,. The 15 mile lights solid state contacts to flash synchronous and be selectable for “U” code or Flash with automatic changeover to 10 mile lights on failure of the 15 mile system with alarm in radio room. The 5 mile lights complete with automatic lamp changer. The 5 mile lights are to work in synchronous with the 15 and 10 mile lights or can be run as an independent system and should have alarm in radio room when the last light fails. Alternatively, if an LED 5 mile obstruction light is to be used, the automatic lamp charger is not deem necessary. Light locations are as follows: •

One 10 mile and one 15 mile light on each aft leg tower.

•

One 10 mile and one 15 mile light at outer perimeter of helideck

•

One 5 mile light at aft end of cantilever

The UPS and battery system shall be connected to the emergency switchboard and be capable of supplying the complete power for the navigational aid system and simultaneously maintain the standby batteries in a fully charged condition. The UPS and battery system shall be connected to emergency switchboard and consist of one UPS/ storage battery bank of sufficient capacity to operate the fog signal four days with charger off and to operate the obstruction lights for the duration required by the regulatory bodies with the charger off.

15.24

MISCELLANEOUS NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT

The following navigation equipment shall be provided:

15.25

1

Fog bell, 20" diameter

1

Fog horn, mechanical, hand-operated

1

Inclinometer

1

Barograph

1

Temperature recorder

1

Battery-operated bull horn

1

Aldis signaling lamp with rechargeable battery and red and green filters

ALARM AND CONTROL SYSTEM

A central DCS (Distributed Control System) shall be provided which shall monitor and control a variety of rig functions on a PC and PLC based system. The critical components of the system shall be fully dual redundant.


Rev. 0

22

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Failure of any critical component shall result in seamless fail-over to the backup system with appropriate alarm messages displayed on the system HMI’s which normally located in the manned engine control space, the jacking control room and an alternative space to be indicated by the Owner. All machinery alarms (both audible & visual) to be repeated at the equipment location as required by class and agreed on with Owner. I/O provisions to include a minimum of 10 % spare capacity for each type of I/O. The base system shall full integration for the systems listed below and shall replace the discrete control panels normally associated with these systems. The systems to be fully integrated within the DCS shall include but not be limited to: • Fire Detection System • Gas Detection System • Watertight door monitoring system • Bulk Handling system • Drilling Instrumentation system • Mud Instrumentation system • Environmental monitoring system • All fixed firefighting systems • Water mist system • HVAC shutdown system • Emergency shutdown system • Fire and deluge pump control systems • Preload system • Tank Gauging System • Bilge alarm system • Air compressor sequence control • Miscellaneous alarm system, etc. The system shall be powered by an UPS capable of maintaining power for a minimum of six hours continuous operation of the system. The base shall be fully capable and expandable to a fully integrated control network through the addition of local area network (LAN) servers and an associated disc storage subsystem.

15.26

LAN SYSTEM

One set LAN system should be provided which shall consist of a server located in the network room and terminal points distributed at the office, meeting room and cabins.

15.27

ECHO SOUNDER

A builder supplied Echo Sounder shall be installed, with a bottom mounted (easily accessible for maintenance and troubleshooting) sonar and associated equipment in the jacking control room, to survey water depth and debris at the intended drilling location.

15.28

CCTV SYSTEM

Two CCTV systems to be provided. One for the Driller and the other for Des system (composite cable for the system to be equipped by the CCTV vendor). Monitor to be located at radio room and Drillers Cabin. Cameras (not less than 20) to be arranged at the engine room (I), helideck (I), main deck (2), mud pit room (l), helicopter waiting room (1), BOP area, Drill Floor, Cantilever, etc.

15.29

SHIP SECURITY ALERT SYSTEM

One set Ship Security Alert System should be provided.


Rev. 0

23


15.30

HEAT TRACING SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)

The fire main and other essential piping systems shall have freeze protection installed. Generally, freeze protection in these systems shall be accomplished by using electric trace heating tape and insulation. In areas where piping runs through hazardous areas, the trace heater shall be of the explosion proof type. An alarm facility is to be built into the trace heating panel to indicate tripped breakers or loss of power. This facility is to be connected to DCS. Other piping systems subject to freezing or freeze damage shall be insulated and heat traced as may be required by the Regulatory Bodies or the Owner.


Rev. 0

24


TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 16.0 - TESTS AND TRIALS ....................................................................................................................... 2

16.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 2 16.2 INCLINATION TEST ................................................................................................................... 2 16.3 MECHANICAL COMPLETION TESTS ...................................................................................... 2 16.4 SYSTEM TESTS ........................................................................................................................... 5 16.5 VIBRATION TESTS ..................................................................................................................... 5 16.6 DOCK ENDURANCE TRIAL ...................................................................................................... 5 16.7 ACCEPTANCE TRIALS ............................................................................................................... 5 16.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS ....................................................................................... 6 16.9 OTHER TESTS .............................................................................................................................. 6 16.10 RACK CHOCKS............................................................................................................................ 6 16.11 CANTILEVER TEST .................................................................................................................... 7 16.12 DRILLING SYSTEM TRIAL........................................................................................................ 7 16.13 DERRICK AND CANTILEVER BEAMS LOAD TEST ............................................................ 7


SECTION 16.0 - TESTS AND TRIALS 16.1

GENERAL

All FAT tests, Vessel installation tests, dock trials, and acceptance trials shall be scheduled and completed to the satisfaction of the Owner and shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies, the equipment manufacturers, and these Specifications. The Builder shall prepare a trial procedure including all items covered by the above referenced test codes and submit it to the Classification Society and Owner for approval at least six weeks prior to the trials. All tests shall be scheduled by the Builder and notification of such testing shall be given to the Owner's Representatives no less than one full working day prior to commencing with the test. The Builder shall have all relevant documentation onboard the Vessel or at the testing site at the time of the test. Where the trials require more than twenty-four (24) hours continuous testing, a recuperation period of six hours shall be provided at the end of each eighteen hours period or at an acceptable stopping point wherein all testing will be suspended. All expenses or costs for the tests and trials shall be borne by the Builder. Builder shall limit the use of vessel equipment and provide proper maintenance as per manufacturer recommendations to the equipment. Cranes shall be inspected by a 3rd party company before delivery of the rig, at Builder’s cost, to verify the condition. Consumables e.g. oil, filters, wires, sheaves, etc. will be replaced at Builders cost prior to delivery as per 3rd party inspection report. Sea water pumps shall not be used at shipyard site, except during commissioning and sea trials.

16.2

INCLINATION TEST

An inclination test shall be performed in accordance with the Regulatory Bodies and / or Classification Society, as required. The Builder shall prepare the inclination test schedule and procedure shall consist of moving the cantilever and drill floor (the weights of these entities shall be known and be confirmed in the test) and submit the schedule to the Classification Society for approval. The results of the stability test establishing the vessel's lightweight and center of gravity together with the calculations of trim and stability adequately covering the full range of operating and transit loading conditions shall be documented in the marine operating manual. The inclination test shall be conducted after all equipment has been commissioned and all mechanical completions and punch lists have been cleared to the satisfaction of the Owner as well as the Classification Society. Tank liquids and contents at the time of the test shall be held to an absolute minimum and fuel oil shall be restricted to the day tanks. Based on the results of the stability test, the Builder shall prepare a stability booklet which sets forth the stability data necessary to permit safe and efficient handling of the vessel. The booklet shall include an indication of any operating conditions that must be maintained to assure that the Vessel will safely withstand damage under the standard of subdivision required by these Specifications. These instructions shall be as clear and concise as practicable and shall be approved by the Classification Society and the Owner.

16.3

MECHANICAL COMPLETION TESTS

Definitions


Rev. 0

2

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Mechanical Completion means that all physical work on all components of the equipment, unit and/or area has been completed. A mechanical completion activity means a written recorded systematic checking and verification that the work is completed satisfactory according to the requirements laid down by the Owner, Builder, Authorities, Classification Society and the equipment manufacturer. Commissioning means formal testing and verification of all functions of equipment, unit and system as it is intended to function and operated stand alone and/or integrated to all other systems interfacing the equipment, unit or system. A commissioning activity means a written recorded systematic checking and verification of all functions and operation demands, one by one and in combination, laid down by the Owner, Builder, Authorities, Classification Society and the equipment/system manufacturer. The equipment or system commissioning, checks and verifications procedures shall be developed by the Builder with the assistance of the Owner and OEM and the final approval of the Owner and Class shall include but may not be limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Equipment installation check/verification list. Documentation/Certification review. Pre-commissioning tests. Commissioning tests. Acceptance tests.

General requirements All equipment, units, areas and systems on board the Drilling Vessel shall be included in Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities. A preliminary Mechanical Completion Test and part Commissioning shall be performed at equipment manufacturer fabrication site (Fabrication Acceptance Tests, FAT) as well as after the installation onboard, when the full function of the equipment shall be verified. All equipment shall be checked to the best possible extent at the manufacturers’ site prior to delivery. This checking does not relieve the requirements for rechecking and extended checks and tests after the installation on board. The Builder shall have the responsibility to establish a system for unique identification of equipment, instruments, valves, pipes, cables, etc., to be able to establish a systematic system for planning, verification, check list, punch list and follow up of all Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities. This shall include both manufacturers’ equipment and systems and the Builder furnished equipment and systems. This system shall utilize an electronic database as a tool for the systematic identification, planning, status recording and punch lists. The system shall be described and presented to the Owner prior to contract signing. Planning of the Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities and preparation of check lists and other preparing activities shall have an early start by the Builder within the project. Preliminary schedules, activity identification and examples of check lists shall be presented to Owner within two months after contract signing. The Builder shall be responsible for identifying and coordinating all interfaces between equipment and system as a basis for the commissioning activities. Complete plans, activities and detailed procedures divided by area, equipment and/or system shall be sent to Owner for approval not later than two months prior to Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activity starts. The Owner shall have the right to be present during the activities, and shall have reading access to the Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning database.


Rev. 0

3

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C The status during the Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities on site shall be continuously updated in the database and shall be reported to the Owner once a week. All punch items from Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities shall be corrected by the Builder prior to the delivery. The Builder shall, after having consulted the equipment and system supplier, inform the Owner of any countermeasures and corrective actions required to equipment and system as a result of the Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities. All shop and installation tests shall be conducted in accordance with the best shipbuilding practice and to the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies. The Society of Naval Architects and Marine Engineers Technical and Research Bulletin No. 308, “Code on Installation and Shop Tests,” shall be used as a general guide in determining the equipment to be tested and the scope of the tests. Detailed reports on shop and installation tests shall be required. The Owner shall be notified, in writing, at least 10 days prior to any shop or installation trial of any machinery or equipment items. Under no circumstances shall electrical equipment intended for operation on 60 Hz power be tried, operated or tested on 50 Hz power and vice versa. Preparations In addition to establishing the Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning system database and other administrative preparations as described above, the Builder shall have the responsibility to define and obtain all temporary and testing equipment, and other utilities such as power, load bank, oil, air/nitrogen, measuring instruments, reference system, etc., to execute all the Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities. In addition to all preparations thorough “dropped objects” verification shall be carried out, especially in areas where loose items may be a falling hazard, such as on cable trays in the upper part of the technical and other rooms, construction debris left in beams of the derrick. A check also needs to be made for welding rods, pieces of metal, grinding material, rags, etc. left in piping, cleanliness of switchboard cabinets, cleanliness under the floor plates in engine rooms, electrical rooms, etc. Calibration and acceptance criteria The Builder shall be responsible for calibration of all instruments, including test instruments, and sensors output prior to the testing. Acceptance criteria for the instrument accuracy and for the test results shall be suggested by the yard, after having consulted with the requirements established by Authorities, equipment manufacturer and the Classification Society, and shall be agreed upon by the Owner prior to all commissioning activities. Special tests The following tests shall be especially highlighted and shall be performed as a part of the commissioning program within the Scope of Works: All Class requirements to be performed by the Builder near their facility. • • •

Power generation test; Primary test of protection devices; Derrick load test

The following equipment and ventilation tests • •

Drill string rotation including hoisting and lowering, pipe handling, mud circulation with fluids (e.g. water); Smoke test (for verification of suitable location of ventilation inlet/outlet and pressurized areas)

Documentation


Rev. 0

4


The file of all Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning including FAT activities, punch lists and test results, shall be available to the Owner on agreed format after completing the Works. All drawings and documents, including manufacturer’s drawings and documents, shall be updated by the Builder to include all modifications and/or corrections made as a result of the FAT and Mechanical Completion Test and Commissioning activities

16.4

SYSTEM TESTS

All piping, ventilation, electrical, etc., systems shall be tested to prove operational readiness and achievement of performance requirements to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Classification Society. All drilling systems and an endurance test shall be carried out as per pre-agreed commissioning schedule and procedures to demonstrate the functionality of the vessel as a drilling unit.

16.5

VIBRATION TESTS

A vibration test shall be conducted during trials to determine the "base line" of performance of all machinery components. All major equipment shall be tested and measured both with the Vessel afloat and in the elevated condition except that drilling equipment need not be tested in the afloat condition. These tests shall be run when the machinery components are operating at simulated rated capacity and design conditions as far as practical. Additional readings may be requested at various speeds of equipment that is not constant speed equipment, i.e. equipment powered by internal combustion engines, DC motors, or multiple speed AC motors.

16.6

DOCK ENDURANCE TRIAL

Prior to acceptance trials the entire Vessel's powered systems, drilling equipment and controls shall be operated at the dock for at least 24 (twenty four) continuous hours. During this trial the loading of the power system shall be produced by operating various pieces of the Vessel's equipment to maintain as close to full load as possible. All equipment tests shall be done at 100 % load and 110 % load for the piece of equipment or system involved, when this is required by the applicable rules and standards. An effort shall be made to operate all of the vessel's equipment and the industrial equipment to maintain these loading requirements. All safety features shall be carefully checked and functionally demonstrated to the Classification Society. The detail of the test procedure is to be discussed with and approved by the Owner.

16.7

ACCEPTANCE TRIALS

When the Vessel is substantially complete and after satisfactory Dock Trials, the Builder shall conduct an Acceptance Trial in accordance with an approved trial agenda. The Vessel shall be jacked up and down with simulated deck loading for variable loads. The Vessel shall be ballasted to a maximum preload as defined in the operating booklet and then de-ballasted to the normal jacking loads. The time to jack the unit up, preload, de-ballast, and then jack the unit into a transit mode shall be recorded. While the Vessel is pre-loaded to its design maximum, or the maximum possible, it shall be jacked to clear the hull from the water surface. The procedure shall be approved by the Owner. While the Vessel is in the elevated position, all equipment or machinery shall be operated to show that it is in proper working condition. Readings of vibrations, noise, temperature, current, voltage, and etc., shall be recorded during all such tests.


Rev. 0

5


The alignment of all rotating equipment shall be read both with the Vessel afloat in the transit condition and in the elevated condition. In the course of the construction, the Vessel shall be jacked up to the top of the legs.

16.8

SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

After completion of Acceptance Trials the Builder shall be required to open up, correct, close up and re-test as mutually agreed, any item judged faulty by the Owner or Classification Society. If it is necessary to install the final sections of leg at a location other than the Builder's facility and after the Acceptance Trials, the unit at its maximum deck load will be jacked to the maximum permissible height above the water, as determined by the Owner's Underwriters, to prove the satisfactory installation of the final leg sections. After this, all welds will be checked while jacking the unit down and any suspect welds non-destructively tested. All defects shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner and Classification Society at the Builder's expense. The following tests shall be especially highlighted and shall be performed as part of the commissioning program of the drilling unit within the Scope of Work. The Builder will carry out these tests with presence of the equipment manufacturer’s representatives: Power generation / Distribution / Management tests Deluge / Fire water coverage, Foam test Life boat davit test Smoke test (for verification of suitable locations of ventilation intakes and outlets and pressurized areas) All tests required by the Classification Society Provision refrigeration plant test Test of cantilever skidding system to maximum reach at maximum allowable skidding load and without obstructions in the skidding envelope Test of the Drill Floor skidding system to maximum transverse offsets Working test for all auxiliary machinery Working test for all electrical systems Load test of all lifting appliances, cranes, hoists, davits, pad eyes, etc. All equipment shall be marked with SWL and register number. Working test of all automation systems Working test of all software programs Noise and vibration survey Fire and gas detection tests PA/GA system test ESD system test

16.9

OTHER TESTS

All tests called for in other Sections of these Specifications (example: noise level, vibration, and illumination) shall be accomplished at a time that will permit corrective action to be completed prior to delivery of the Vessel. Official noise and vibration tests will be done by Owner on the first drilling location. Such tests are to be attended and witnessed by Builder's representative(s), at Builder's expense. All lifting devices and lifting attachments shall be independently proof load tested and certified by the Classification Society in accordance with the Regulatory Body requirements.

16.10

RACK CHOCKS


Rev. 0

6

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C Complete operational tests of the Friede and Goldman rack chock system and equipment shall be carried out prior to delivery of the vessel. These operational tests shall consist of engaging the rack chocks with the leg chord rack and tightening of horizontal and vertical screw support jacks, to the Designer specified load. The rig weight shall then be transferred to the rack chock system from the elevating system pinions. The rig weight shall then be transferred back to the elevating system, and the screw jacks must then be fully retracted to the stowed position and the chocks disengaged and secured in accordance with instruction book. The rack chock system provides the rig support mechanism during storm, drilling and towing of vessel. Close observance to the testing and operation of this equipment is necessary in order for it to serve its purpose on the rig. Owner’s representative and Classification Society representative shall witness these tests. This operational test on the rack chock shall consist of, but not be limited to, the below listed items.

NO. 1

Table 16.1-Rack Chock System Test ITEM QTY. Chocks 18

2

Chocks

18

3 4 5

Vertical Support Jacks Horizontal Support Jacks Positioning Cylinder

36 36 18

6

Hydraulic Power Unit

3

7

Jack Drives

36

16.11

TEST Witness the release of all rack chock and transfer of load onto the jacking pinions. Full horizontal and vertical travel. Fit of chock teeth to rack teeth. Fit of chock securing turnbuckle and lifting eyes. Travel full in and out. Jack securing devices. Travel full in and out. Jack securing devices. Installation to chock and structure. Piston travel. Interference with support jacks in up position. Pressure settings are correct. Satisfactory lifting, positioning, and lowering of chocks. Check piping and unit for leaks. Operate each jack with hydraulic operators from control manifold.

CANTILEVER TEST

The builder shall compile a trial item of the cantilever beam moving function and the load function based on the technical materials that provided by the designer, and submit to the Classification Society and the Owner for approval. The Owner, the surveyor and the designer should attend to the trial, and the data on all trials are to be recorded by the Builder. All trial procedures and approved trial data shall be compiled by the builder and delivered to the Owner.

16.12

DRILLING SYSTEM TRIAL

The Builder shall ensure that the supplier compiles the procedures for single equipment and system testing, and delivers to the Classification Society and the Owner for approval. Based on the approvals, the Builder with the supplier shall, perform the trial and record the detail of the trial and compile the data to deliver to the Owner for approval.

16.13

DERRICK AND CANTILEVER BEAMS LOAD TEST

The cantilever beams load test is to pretension the lifting gear (including the derrick) and supports by applying a known load so that the cantilever will be subjected to a known loading moment and deflection.


Rev. 0

7

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C The test shall be carried out in the presence of Class representative in accordance with Class and Owner approved test procedure. The load test shall be carried out for the center of the rotary 22.86m (75ft) aft of the transom and 4.57m (15 ft.) of the Vessel CL with the maximum allowable design load as per the load chart on the cantilever at the center of the rotary. Builder should consider using a barge or an alternative load as the load test weight. The deflection readings are to be recorded by transit and marks on both port and starboard cantilever beams for the following conditions: • Substructure at centerline, without load. • Substructure at 15ft. off centerline to port, without and with load, and after it is released • Substructure at 15 ft. off centerline to starboard, without and with load, and after it is released. • Substructure at centerline, without load, after load test is complete. Prior to conducting the load test, the Builder shall ensure the Vessel's power systems, electrical distribution system, jacking system, skidding systems, ballasting system and racking system are all operable. In particular, the drawworks and derrick and its rigging must be ready for the load test. The load test should be performed after the cantilever beams and drill floor assemblies are weighed as described in these Specifications. Weights in addition to the cantilever beams and drill floor lightship weights should be recorded (e.g., contents of tanks). Checks should be made to ensure there are no obstructions to skidding both the cantilever beams and drill floor. The procedure for the load test shall be fully developed by the Builder and incorporate all Class and/or Owner comments prior to commencing the load test. The following principal elements should be included: • Deflections of the cantilever beams should be measured at five (5) points along the beam. • Deflections should be measured before loads are applied, during the application of the load, and after the load has been released. • The drawworks and a set of slings shall be used to lift the test weight. Recordings of the loaded structure should be made only after the drawworks brake has been set and the load is in a static mode. Builder shall record all data and prepare a summary of the test results for submittal to ABS and to the Owner.


Rev. 0

8

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD.

BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 17.0 - DRILLING SYSTEMS

17.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 2 17.2 DRILLING EQUIPMENT AND PIPE HANDLING SYSTEMS ................................................... 2 17.3 DRILLING FLUID SYSTEMS ....................................................................................................... 7 17.4 BULK MUD SYSTEMS................................................................................................................ 10 17.5 WELL CONTROL SYSTEM, CONTROL AND HANDLING .................................................... 12 17.6 WELL TEST SYSTEM ................................................................................................................. 14



SECTION 17.0 - DRILLING SYSTEMS 17.1

GENERAL This section provides only guidance for the delivery, installation and hook-up of the drilling systems and equipment to be installed on the Vessel to provide a suitable drilling equipment package for the rig Builder to satisfy the requirements of the Owner and Operator. It should be used by the drilling equipment provider in conjunction with the other sections of this Specification that deal with specific aspects of the work such as piping, electrical, etc. and in full compliance with the installation and selected regulatory bodies. A detailed specification is to be developed by the Drilling Equipment Vendor (DEV) and associated contractors. All the capacity and description of drilling equipment shall be finally defined in accordance with specification of selected Drilling Equipment Vendor including mud and solids control system. Any conflict between the description of drilling system in this Specification and the final drilling equipment including mud and solids control system provided by selected drilling equipment vendor, the description of the drilling system in the specification of selected drilling equipment vendor shall prevail. All equipment, unless otherwise specified, shall be subject to Owner's approval. All electrical equipment shall be of European standards. For non-European equipment, Builder to seek Owner's approval on a case by case basis.

17.2

DRILLING EQUIPMENT AND PIPE HANDLING SYSTEMS 17.2.1

Derrick

The primary purpose of the derrick is to support the weight of the string of tubulars used to drill the well and the weight of the casing string when lining the well. The weight of the drill string is transmitted through the top drive which, in turn, is supported by the hook / traveling block. The traveling block is raised and lowered using the drawworks and drilling line. Casing may be run on the top drive or on the hook if the top drive can be parked. The derrick is a 51.8 m (170 ft.) high, and has a 12 m x 12 m (40 ft. x 40 ft.) base and 5.5 m x 5.5 m (18 ft. x 18 ft.) crown opening. The derrick, which is load-tested on installation, has a nominal hook load capacity of 907 mt. (2,000,000 lbs.) with a limited setback capacity in transit field move of 181 mt. (400 kips) of pipe in the derrick and is of a latticed structure. Cladding, which provides protection for the crew and equipment, is installed from the rig floor to a level approximately 8.5 m (28 ft.) above the rig floor and at the monkey board level, extending approximately 5,5m (18 ft.) towards the crown. A pipe racking platform is installed approximately 27.5 m (90 ft.) above the rig floor. Two air winches are installed to facilitate the safe handling of pipe at this level, if required. Access from the drill floor to the 90 ft. level or the crown is by means of a ladder complete with staging platforms, safety rings and aided by a derrick climber (lad-safe type). An emergency escape (controlled descent) device is situated at the 90 ft. level and is anchored to a safe escape/landing area. A casing stabbing basket is situated on the inside of the derrick. The derrick is also equipped with blocks and tackle for auxiliary lines to and from various items of equipment such as rotary tongs, man riding winches and mud buckets, etc. All derrick mounted tackle equipment is fitted with safety straps. The unit is equipped with a multi-sheave crown block with a maximum load rating of 907 mt., a traveling block which has eight 1.88 m (72 inch) diameter grooved sheaves and idler sheaves as required suitable for 2 “ diameter wire line and a load rating of 907 mt. The traveling block is attached to a guide dolly which is mounted onto the derrick installed rail system which prevents lateral movement and counteracts drilling torque. The derrick generally will be delivered to the shipyard in its component pieces. The Builder will contract with DEV to supply a derrick erection crew who will erect the derrick in position on the drill floor. The Builder shall assist the derrick erection crew by furnishing the necessary labor, crane assistance, etc. to complete the task. Builder shall furnish, build and install the foundation for the derrick to the design supplied by F&G. Once the derrick has been erected it shall be Builder’s responsibility to provide all of the necessary crane assistance, personnel, supplies, equipment and services to install the remainder of the equipment and services into the derrick generally as directed by Drilling Equipment Supplier representatives. 17.2.2

Drawworks and Accessories

Friede & Goldman, Ltd., Houston TX USA

Rev. 0

2



The drawworks consists primarily of a revolving drum driven by AC motors, sufficiently sized as required for the 680 mt. hook load. The primary function of the drawworks is to draw pipe out of the well or lower pipe into the well. The drill line is spooled onto the drum and when the direct coupled drawworks is engaged, the drum turns and depending on the direction that it turns, either reels in the drilling line to raise the traveling block or pays out the line to lower it. The AC drive motors have blowers mounted on top for cooling purposes and also to maintain a positive pressure within the motor to prevent any ingress gas, rendering them purged / pressurized. Their cooling air supply is taken from and exhausted to a safe area. The drawworks is supplied drilling line that comes off the storage drum, which first passes through the deadline anchor and is reeved between the crown of the derrick and the traveling block before being wrapped around the drum of the drawworks a sufficient number of times to allow the block to travel the height of the derrick. Once an adequate quantity is fed onto the drawworks drum, the drill line is secured at the deadline anchor using bolts. Control of descent of the drawworks is primarily by the AC motors. The VFD system is designed to provide regenerative braking capabilities in addition to the disc braking system. The drawworks is controlled by the

drilling system, operated from the driller’s or assistant driller’s chair. The drawworks is equipped with a hydraulically powered disc brake system (including a plate disc brake system), incorporating a number of calipers, main as well as emergency. The system is operated from a dedicated hydraulic power pack located on the rear of the drawworks which is primarily pressured by an electric motor/pump. The hydraulic power pack incorporates both high temperature and low fluid level alarms. Should this electric motor/pump fail the system has a back-up facility in the form of an air pump and accumulator bottles. The drawworks brakes are fail safe to set. The drawworks' brake cooling system consists of fresh water, closed-loop heat exchangers complete with tank and two circulating pumps located beneath the rig floor directly below the drawworks. Cooling water for the heat exchangers is routed through a radiator for cooling. A flow rate, temperature, pressure, etc. monitoring system shall be furnished. The drawworks control system includes a kinetic energy monitoring system (KEMS) which monitors and controls the speed of lowering of the blocks in conjunction with the hook load. Should the kinetic energy monitoring systems calculate excessive lowering speed for the weight being lowered, it will automatically control the VFD system to reduce the drawworks drum speed and, if necessary, apply the disc brake. In the event of power failure to the auxiliary brake, the kinetic energy monitoring unit will apply the disc brakes. The control system shall also prevent collision between the crown, drill floor, auxiliary equipment in the derrick such as pipe handling, bridge crane, etc. and the traveling block. The Builder shall install the drawworks and all of its accessories at the locations on the drill floor and on the foundation specified by the DEV. Builder shall satisfy himself that there is adequate clearance between the fast line, the dead line, the derrick structure and equipment in the derrick and that there is sufficient clearance around the drawworks to permit routine maintenance. 17.2.3

Top Drive

The purpose of the 907 mt. Top Drive is to transmit rotational energy to the drill string and to allow drilling fluid to be pumped through the drill string. The Top Drive provides the load transmission from the drill string to the travelling block assembly. To reduce the overall height of the Top Drive and travelling assembly the Top Drive shall feature a fully integrated swivel assembly and an adapter to connect to the travelling block. The Top Drive shall be powered by one (1) AC explosion proof (IP 44) motor and the unit shall be complete with a retractable dolly assembly to improve tripping efficiency. Facilities shall be provided on the Top Drive to power and operate the pneumatic / hydraulic rotating type of elevators used with automatic pipe handling systems. The Top Drive pipe handling system shall be able to rotate 360 deg. The speed and torque requirements for the main Top Drive are given below.


Rev. 0

3

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. Interim Torque: Continuous Torque: Drilling Speed:

BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV. C 128 kNm (94,500 ft-lb) at 0 – 170 rpm 118 kNm (87,000 ft-lb) at 0 – 130 rpm 91 kNm (67,000 ft-lb) at 0 – 150 rpm 0-260 rpm

The maximum continuous operating pressure of the drilling fluid system shall be 7,500 psi working pressure. A 3 1/2” ID Top Drive main shaft is required and a wire line entry guide on the gooseneck shall be provided. Two separate Top Drive IBOP valves rated to 15,000 psi shall be provided, one manual (upper) IBOP valve and one remote controlled (lower) IBOP valve. Hydraulic power for the Top Drive shall be provided by the drilling hydraulic power unit. Electrical power and other services to the Top Drive shall be provided and routed to the Top Drive via service loops. The service loops shall be located so as to prevent visual interference between the drillers control cabin and the Top Drive. Safe access to the Top Drive for routine servicing and maintenance shall be provided. Guards shall be provided on the Top Drive to prevent hoist wires or tong hang off lines from becoming entangled with the Top Drive during its movement within the derrick. 17.2.4

Rotary Table

The rotary table supports the bushings and slips which in turn suspend the drilling and casing strings to allow the addition or removal of tubulars. In addition, the rotary table supports the casing during running operations. A 49 1/2” opening, 907 mt. capacity rotary shall be furnished and installed. Power slips should be installed in the rotary table as an option. The rotary table shall be powered by a hydraulic motor to allow for controlled speed rotation of the table. Power is to be provided to the rotary table by the drilling hydraulic power unit. A split adapter bushing, a master bushing and insert bowls no. 1, 2 and 3 shall be included. 17.2.5

Iron Roughneck

The Iron Roughneck makes and breaks tubular connections during drilling, tripping & casing operations. Max break-out torque Make-up torque

203 kNm (150,000 lb/ft) 203 kNm (150,000 lb/ft)

The Iron Roughneck shall be able to handle tubulars from 2 7/8” DP to 20” casing. The control for the Iron Roughneck is from the drillers control cabin. 17.2.6

Driller’s Cabin with Instrumentation and Control Console

The Builder will supply a driller’s cabin from which all of the major drill floor equipment will be controlled and in which the instrumentation and data acquisition system that monitors all drilling parameters, CTU, C&K, Mud Pits, Pumps, etc. is located. The driller’s cabin shall be suitable to be located in a Zone 1 hazardous area. The cabin shall have a complete HVAC system installed (powered from main and emergency switchboards) with fresh air to be taken from a safe area. The Builder shall install and connect this driller’s cabin according to the detailed instructions provided by the Cabin Manufacturer and under his direct supervision. 17.2.7

Instrumentation

The driller’s cabin shall feature a drilling instrumentation and control system with controls for the drawworks, top drive, pipe racking machinery, mud pumps, hydraulic power pack, brake water cooling unit, hydraulic cat heads, etc. The instrumentation display system will obtain its information from equipment PC’s/PLC’s. The displays provide output information for, but not limited to, hook load, mud pit volumes, flow rates, manifold pressures (HP mud, C&K), pump stroke rates, conductor tensioning, etc. A slave display device shall also be provided in the toolpusher’s office. Trending information shall be available on various drilling screens.


Rev. 0

4

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. 17.2.8


Bulk Tank Control System

The bulk mud and cement systems shall be comprised of those elements described in Section 5 of these Specifications. Each system valve shall be equipped with electro-pneumatic actuators and position indicator limit switches related to the main control and two mimic panel displays. Each mimic panel shall display the system valve positions, pressure and the weight of the contents of each bulk storage tank. 17.2.9

Simultaneous Pipe Handling System (SPHS), Casing Tools and Rotating Equipment

The Builder shall install a Friede & Goldman, Ltd. standalone Simultaneous Pipe Handling System (SPHS®), connect, test and prove operational. The Simultaneous Pipe Handling System (SPHS®) is a patented (published U.S and worldwide) tubular handling system that has the capability to handle drilling tubulars (drill pipe, drill collars and /or Hevi-Wate), casing and drive pipe. The SPHS® has Online, Offline and Simultaneous (Online and Offline at the same time) tubular handling capability using one drawworks, one drill floor, one rotary and one derrick, which makes it unique. The rig may solely use either the online feature or the offline feature by itself or use both at the same time (simultaneous). The system is a standalone system, but can be integrated into a zone management system for safety and reliability. The SPHS® alarms are coming to the main HPU unit, where the alarms are centralized for this system and a collective alarm is given on the driller’s panel and to other locations where required. Offline operations are used to build stands of drill pipe, drill collars or casing for future use at the well center. Offline stand building eliminates multiple drill pipe, drill collar or casing connections at well center when stands are made offline. The components of the Drill Floor section of the SPHS® are the Catwalk Machine, Pipe Loader Assemblies, Tubular Cab, Powered Mouse hole, Pipe Centralizer, Horizontal to Vertical (HTV) Arm and the Stand Building Arm. All stand building functions and catwalk operations are controlled from the Tubular Cab with a slave control mounted on the drill floor. The Fingerboard level components of the SPHS are the Derrickman’s Cab, Drill Collar and Drill Pipe Fingerboards, Casing Fingerboards, Monkey Board and Bridge Racker Crane with Casing Handling Adapter. Options include an independent Hydraulic Power Unit for the SPHS® or a centralized Hydraulic Power Unit for the entire drill floor. The top drive and its pipe handler works in conjunction with a Simultaneous Pipe Handling System (SPHS), hydraulic rotary, hydraulic catheads, casing stabbing basket, etc. These tools derive their power from the centralized drill floor hydraulic power pack or the rig’s AC electrical systems. A control interface is through the integrated control system. The Builder shall supply the necessary crane assistance, personnel, supplies and services to install the SPHS equipment, top drive, casing stabbing basket and all other equipment in the derrick and shall make the necessary electrical and other connections to produce a fully functioning system that works as intended and in conjunction with the remainder of the drill floor equipment. 17.2.10 Casing Stabbing Basket The Builder shall install a Casing Stabbing Basket (CSB, 150 kg SWL), connect, test and prove operational. The CSB is a telescopic arm with a personnel basket designed for offshore duty on vessels operating under dynamic conditions. Its main purpose is to securely lift and position personnel above the drill floor to perform work on or inspect equipment within its reach. It is operated from the basket or from a remote control stand located at a site where an operator will have a proper view of the CSB’s operating area. The CSB is comprised of a steel basket, a telescopic boom, a derrick foundation with slewing bracket and a remote control panel. Hydraulic cylinders perform tilting, slewing and telescoping functions. This enables personnel in the basket to manually assist stabbing operations or assist in inspection or maintenance of drilling equipment above the drill floor. 17.2.11 Crown block The crown block assembly shall have 907 mt. gross capacities, and 8 ea. 183 cm (72”) diameter sheaves grooved for 2” drill line. Bumper blocks shall be secured under the crown sheave assembly to mitigate damage to the sheaves in the event that the travelling block makes contact with the crown. 17.2.12 Travelling assembly


Rev. 0

5



The travelling block assembly is raised and lowered by the drawworks. The capacity of the travelling block shall be 907 mt. and shall be capable of being strung with 16 parts of 2” drill line and the unit shall be complete with a retractable dolly (Top Drive) assembly to improve tripping efficiency. A hang off arrangement shall be provided to allow the block and Top Drive to be supported during “slip and cut” operations. This hang off arrangement shall have a SWL of 80 Metric Tons. 17.2.13 Deadline anchor The deadline anchor is used to secure the ‘dead’ end of the drill line and is conveniently located on drill floor between the drill line storage reel and the first (idler) sheave in the crown block assembly. It shall be rated to a minimum of 150,000 lbs. using 2” drill line. The deadline anchor shall also feature a rotating type drum to aid “slip and cut” operations and to reduce wear on the drill line. A load cell and a load indication display shall be included to accommodate the drilling instrumentation. 17.2.14 Air and Hydraulic Hoists Builder shall install and connect hoists at the following locations. Air hoists will use service air and will operate on 8.6 bar air pressure. Hydraulic hoists will be connected to the drill floor HPU. 3 - drill floor – hydraulic (one is man-riding) 4 - below drill floor – 10 mt. air + 2 man riding winches 2 - monkey board – 500 Kg air 17.2.15 Drill String and Down Hole Equipment The Builder shall receive all drill pipe, drill collars, tools, etc. and store them in temporary racks until the vessel is completed and ready to receive all tubulars. 17.2.16 Additional drilling equipment The following additional equipment shall be arranged on the drill floor area or elsewhere, 1 ea. Mathey Wireline Measuring unit 1 ea. Mud bucket c/w inserts for 2 7/8” to 6 5/8” drill pipe 2 ea. Mousehole, 45 ft. and 60 ft. long hydraulically powered 2 ea. Hydraulic catheads, remotely operated from the DCC Drill line spooler, outside the drill floor Power slips 17.2.17 Third Party Drilling Equipment This equipment will be delivered to the Shipyard during the course of the project and shall be installed by the Builder at the locations shown on the Contract Plans or as determined by the Builder. Foundation designs for all equipment will be provided by the Builder. The Builder shall provide all electrical and other services (fire and gas detection, PA/GA, ESD, telephone, LAN, etc.) and connect the units to the satisfaction of the suppliers of this third party equipment. 1 ea.

Mud Logging Unit

1 lot

Well Logging Unit with Tool House

1 lot

Cementing Unit and accessories. Interconnecting pipework, valves and fittings shall be furnished and installed by the Builder.

1 lot

Mud lab equipment and test equipment

17.2.18 Split Conductor Tension Unit (CTU) The CTU control and accumulator system and split CTU / sliding panel system shall be installed in the moon pool area of the cantilever. The foundations for the system accumulator bottles shall be provided with two extra slots for future expansion. The CTU control system shall be installed to allow both local and remote control/instrumentation display of the system via interface with the DCS.


Rev. 0

6



The Split CTU unit shall be installed in the CTP. The installation shall include a complete hookup and function test/simulation.

17.3

DRILLING FLUID SYSTEMS 17.3.1

Mud System General

The mud system (liquid and dry) is designed to provide a large, highly flexible storage and treatment facility together with a high pressure system capable of pumping at the flow rates and pressures required for the drilling of deep High Pressure/High Temperature wells. In addition, the system shall be provided with the monitoring capabilities compatible with the efficient and safe management of the mud system and drilling operations. The Builder furnished mud control system (pumps starts/stop, level indication, flow indication, pumps strokes, etc.) will comprise the liquid and dry systems, the control will be from the driller’s cabin as well as a control location near the mud mixing hoppers. The mud system includes, materials storage, mixing facilities, mud pits and mud pumps, both the mud system supply and solids control system and ventilation facilities. The system components are designed and manufactured to applicable API standard by reputable suppliers and certified fit-for-purpose by the classification society. The design of the system is such that the unit has the capability to keep a large amount of drilling fluid and material on board the unit while being able to extensively build or treat different parts of the total volume. This means that critical reserves e.g. kill mud, reserve drilling mud and cement spacers, can be prepared in advance, this operation can be closely operated and monitored without affecting the active mud system. The total surface capacity for liquid mud on board is 775 m³ (4876 bbl.), which includes eight mud pits and two slug pits. All active and storage pits are totally enclosed and equipped with agitators. Two (2) ea. (eight) 8 m³ trip tanks are mounted within the cantilever mud processing area equipped with two centrifugal pumps and a mud level indicator readable from the Driller's position. The facility has the ability to isolate the trip tank system from the mud return system. In addition, a small tank (3 m³) calibrated for accurate measurement of returns during stripping operations is also located in the mud process area. The trip and stripping tanks shall have a level indicating system feeding into the mud control system. There will be a flow return measuring system capable of measuring all flow from the well back to the mud conditioning system. For the purposes of this Specification the mud system is divided into four sections: •

High Pressure Liquid Mud System

•

Mud Conditioning

•

Mud Mixing

•

Mud storage and low pressure mud system

17.3.2

High Pressure Liquid Mud System

The high pressure mud and cement piping shall be connected as shown on the Contract Drawings. The high pressure mud system is to include a 127 mm I.D. (5”) high pressure discharge line from the discharge of each mud pump to a distribution/crossover manifold. Each line to be fitted with isolation valves at the manifold. From the manifold a single 127 mm I.D. line is to be run to one pit where it will terminate to a shearing fixture and two 127 mm I.D. lines run to the drill floor where they will connect to the standpipe manifold. The two 80 mm I.D. (3”) cement discharge lines from the cementing package will be connected to the cement standpipe manifold on the drill floor. The HP mud system shall be capable of 517 bar (7500 psi) continuous rating and be fitted with 690 bar (10,000 psi) valve bodies, dressed for 517 bars. The HP cement system and the C&K system shall be capable of 1,035 bar (15,000 psi) working pressure and be fitted with 1,035 bar valve bodies and trim. All HP mud system elbows or bends shall have a bend radius of 2 times the nominal pipe diameter. Elbow bends for stand pipe goosenecks shall be a minimum of 3D bend radius. The C&K system shall only be fitted with targeted blocks for elbows.


Rev. 0

7



All API flanged ring joint connections shall have ring grooves with stainless steel inlay. Ring joint gaskets are to be stainless steel. Particular attention shall be given to the design of the pipe support structures for the high pressure systems to guard against excessive deflections or vibration during dynamic system input. The spud can jetting system shall be capable of being connected either to the HP mud pump discharge manifold through a relief valve or direct to the sea water system. The high pressure side of the mud system comprises of three triplex mud pumps which are capable of delivering mud at up to 517.2 bar (7500 psi), dependent upon the liner size installed. The pumps can be used individually or in parallel, dependent upon flow requirements, but the high pressure as well as the mud return system shall be capable of handling the maximum flow from two of the three mud pumps, equipped with their largest liners. Each pump is provided with a pressure relief valve which discharges directly back into the mud pits and a pulsation damper to ensure smooth pump pressure delivery. The pumps will be supplied by the DEV. It shall be possible to stop and start the pumps from the drill floor or mud pump room. The mud pumps take their suction from the DEV supplied charging pumps which take suction from the mud pits. The suction manifold from the mud pits to the charging pumps shall be configured in such a manner as to allow flexibility in selecting the mud pits to be drawn from. Each mud pump shall have a dedicated charging pump, but the system shall allow assignment of other charge pumps (273 m³/hr.). The Builder shall furnish and install a high pressure piping system in which mud discharged from the mud pumps is pumped through a crossover mud manifold located in the pump room and a parallel run of hard piping and high pressure hoses (main hull to cantilever, cantilever to drill floor), which have a continuous working pressure rating of 517.2 Bar, to the stand pipe manifold on the rig floor. The stand pipe manifold shall be of the 'H' type effectively giving two outlets which can be isolated from one another and providing greater redundancy in the event of one failing. From the standpipe manifold, the mud flows through a DEV supplied flexible hose to the top drive. All pump installations, valves and related equipment that needs periodic maintenance shall be installed taking into account ease of maintenance and appropriate lifting points and devices shall be provided by the Builder. The high pressure mud pumps shall be fitted with lube oil and rod oil coolers. 17.3.3 Mud Conditioning and Mixing System The Mud Conditioning and Mixing Systems include 2 systems: the solids control system and the mud mixing system. The mud system shall be capable of handling 2.2 sg fluids. For both these systems the following conditions shall apply: All centrifugal pumps may be horizontal or vertical (belt driven). The two systems shall satisfy single point discharge requirements. The electrical source will be 480V AC 3-phase 60 HZ. The Pump Units shall utilize steel flex-couplings to deliver motor / pump power. The Pump Units shall incorporate a Mechanical Seal for zero discharge compliance. Pump & Motor Set Assemblies shall be skid mounted. Pump seals & miscellaneous rubber components shall be suitable for use in conjunction with Brine, Water Based Mud, Oil Based Mud and abrasive weight materials. The Pump & Motor System shall be designed for operation within a Zone 1 area. The Pump Units shall be self-contained and protect operators from any moving part / hazard. The agitators shall utilize steel flex-couplings to deliver motor /agitator power. Agitator & Motor Set Assemblies shall be skid mounted. The Agitator & Motor System shall be designed for operation within a Zone 1 area. The Agitator Units shall be self-contained and protect operators from any moving part / hazard. Agitator shafts to be installed with bottom bearings (support). 17.3.3.1 Mud Conditioning The solids control system and equipment shall be located within the cantilever generally as shown on the Contract Drawings and capable of handling of at least the maximum return flow from two HP mud


Rev. 0

8



pumps @ 1500 gpm as a minimum. The system comprises the following equipment, all of which will be supplied by the DEV and installed by Builder: Gumbo removing equipment (gumbo shaker) Mud flow divider Shale shakers Desander Desander pump Desilter Desilter pump Degassers Mud cleaner (desilter mounted over one of the shale shakers) Centrifuges (optional and 3d party) Centrifuge feeding pumps (optional and 3d party) Trip tank pumps (2) Stripping tank Cuttings dryer and cuttings handling “skip and ship” system (provision for space only) 2 ea. Portable 2500 cfm bug blowers. The mud flows from the bit up the annulus transporting drilling cuttings from the bit to surface. Once on the surface, the mud flows from the well bore down the flow line to a cascade shaker configuration. Firstly the mud flows across gumbo shakers where the larger cuttings and clay balls are removed and discharged either overboard or into skips. The underflow is then processed further across any number of the five shale shakers located in the shale shaker house which, dependent upon the screen size installed, can remove unwanted solids larger than 75 microns. The shaker area or shakers are enclosed to contain condensation and fumes from the mud. Builder shall furnish and install a ducted atmospheric extraction system that removes the contaminated air and exhausts it out through the deck below the BOP area. The mud then flows from the shakers into the sand trap and then through the remaining treatment pits where the finer solids can be removed by either centrifuging or mud cleaners. If required, the mud can be degassed using either of the two degassers which work on a vacuum principle gas cut. Mud is pumped through the degasser and a vacuum pump in the unit creates a low pressure condition making it easier for the gas to 'break out' from the mud and the disengaged gas is vented up the derrick. The mud then flows from the shaker house via the mud return ditch and is returned to the 'active pit' to be re-circulated back through the system. The active / reserve / slugging mud pits are totally enclosed and agitators are installed. 17.3.3.2 Mud Mixing The mixing system is designed to take mud from any particular mud pit, circulate it through either of two mix lines to the mixing hoppers where bulk mud materials or chemicals can be added in order to give the mud the required drilling properties. The mud is then returned to the same pit or an alternative pit. The system shall be designed in such a way that mixing and transferring can be done simultaneously. The mix pumps (250 m³/h, 100 kW) can also be used to transfer mud to the cantilever trip tank and shale shaker tanks, cement unit and, if required, to a supply vessel through transfer hoses located at the bulk loading stations either side of the unit. The system comprises the following equipment, all of which will be supplied by the DEV and installed by the Builder: Mud mixing pumps Base oil transfer pump Brine transfer pump Mud agitators Mud guns Pallet mechanical lift Sack slitting system Dust filter unit Dosing screw Distribution screw Mud mixer Big bag handling unit Surge tanks


Rev. 0

9



Local control panel Liquid additive pump skid LP shear mixer & shear pump unit High rate mixers Bulk material from the storage tanks is transferred through to the mezzanine level of the sack storage area where there are three DEV supplied jet mix hoppers, two of which can be supplied from the two surge tanks with bulk chemicals of these required to be added to the mud. All sack supplied material is added at the mix hoppers by the sack slitting and processing machine. DEV shall furnish and Builder shall install an additional hopper facility on the main deck to service larger sized bags that will be handled by the crane. The DEV will provide an overall design of this system including a general arrangement and foundation drawings for the major pieces of equipment. Builder shall follow this design and the piping requirements of Section 14 of this Specification to interconnect all of the equipment to provide a complete and working system that meets the specifications of the DEV. 17.3.3.4 Mud storage and low pressure mud system The low pressure mud system shall be installed as shown on the Contract Drawings. The system includes the mud pump suctions (minimum 300 mm NB diameter), the various centrifugal pump suction and discharge lines, the flow line, the trip tank return line, casing fill-up system and mud mixing system. A positive means of shutting off the return line to the pits shall be fitted at the main deck. The piping shall be laid out in such a fashion, that two mud pumps can take suction from two different mud tank headers and send the contents to the drill floor separately. Cleanout fittings with blank flanges shall be installed at the ends of headers and elsewhere as shown on the system drawing. Jetting lines shall be fitted in shaker header boxes; flow lines and overboard discharges as necessary. The low pressure mud system piping interconnects both the mixing and conditioning systems and the low pressure side of the primary mud pumps. The mud suction shall be capable of being taken by any mud pump from any mud pit, such that two different fluids can be pumped to the drill floor at once. It shall be furnished and installed by Builder according to the Contract Plans and to the requirements of Section 14 of this Specification so that all of the systems work together and independently as required by the DEV. Each of the mud pits shall be interconnected through the suction pipe work and the three mix lines. Any of the three dedicated centrifugal mixing pumps shall be able to take suction from any pit and discharge into any pit. The lines shall go through manifolds in such a way that they provide maximum flexibility in terms of taking suction from and discharging to the mud pits. The entrances to the mud pit room shall have self-closing doors with an airlock and ventilation to create an under pressure with respect to the adjacent rooms as per API 505. Builder shall furnish and install mud ditches and gravity flow return troughs to carry the drilling fluids from the well bore back to the active system. All ditches shall have circular (half round) bottoms and all ditches and piping in the mud return system shall have consistent slopes throughout, the maximum slope achievable is to be used but in no case is it to be less than 40 mm per linear meter slope. Ditches in the mud process area however may have a minimum slope of 10 mm per meter to ensure drainage of the system. Ditches shall be adequately sized to handle the maximum flow potential of the HP pumping system and shall have removable covers. All mud tanks shall have supply lines from the sea water system, drill water system and diesel oil system.

17.4

BULK MUD SYSTEMS 17.4.1

Bulk mud materials

Bulk air and distribution lines shall be connected to the P-tanks. Each tank shall be provided with fill, vent, compressed air and discharge connections as well as electronic load (or content) sensors and pressure transducers. The cement discharge shall be piped to the cement surge tank located in the cement unit room (cantilever) and the mud discharge shall be piped to the mud surge tanks located in the sack storage room.


Rev. 0

10



The Builder shall furnish all pipe, flanges and fittings not directly connected to the tanks and headers, electro pneumatic valves, load sensors and fittings for interconnection piping at the P-tanks. The valves shall be fitted with limit switches locally and remotely indicating the valve position. All elbow fittings shall be long sweep (min. 3D BR) 90 degrees or long sweep (min. 3D BR) 45 degrees. No short or long radius fittings will be acceptable. Purge piping shall be provided as required for flow boost or cleaning all sections of the systems. All piping connections to the P-tanks will be made through non loadtransferring flexible connections as required. The installation of all piping shall avoid traps, and the final arrangement plans shall be approved by the bulk system vendor. Access walkways and ladders shall be provided to all valves. Bulk material (cement, barite and bentonite) is stored in eight DEV furnished bulk tanks. Each tank has two access hatches, one top and one bottom, is each fitted with internal and external access ladders and load cells that shall be installed into the Builder furnished and installed foundation structure by Builder. Builder shall install the bulk tanks, hoppers and valves and fittings into a complete and working system as shown on the Contract Drawings. Bulk material is transferred around the rig using compressed air that is introduced into the bulk piping system from the rig air system through a Builder Furnished pressure reducing station. The Builder shall furnish and install the supply boat loading station on each side of the main deck for cement and bulk mud material systems. Service air is supplied to the bulk system after having passed through two pressure reducing valves located in the sack storage area, each of which is capable of handling the demands of the bulk system individually and each can be isolated from the other. Normal system operating pressure is 2.76 Bar with the pressure relief valve at the reducing manifold being set at 3.1 Bar. Additionally, each bulk tank is equipped with a pressure relief valve set at 3.17 Bar which vents into a common vent line with an outlet above main deck level. A dust collector is to be fitted to each vent line outlet. Each bulk tank has its own fill, discharge, air supply and vent lines which are segregated from one another by either one or a series of pneumatically controlled valves. The fill and discharge lines can be made common through a series of crossover valves which gives the system greater flexibility. The air supply lines are totally segregated and non-return valves are installed at the inlet to each tank or at any connection into the bulk system to prevent contamination of the air system by bulk material. Bulk air is supplied into the bottom of each tank through a 'spider' system which both pressurizes the tank and aerates the bulk product. The load and discharge lines have air purge lines installed to assist in the transfer of material and blowing the lines clear at the completion of each transfer. 17.4.2

Sack material handling and storage

Mud material in package form, normally comes in sacks or drums which are stored in the sack storage area which has a capacity of 5,000 sacks and which also incorporates a fully enclosed hazardous chemical store located at the mezzanine level. Sack material is moved around the sack storage area with the use of a forklift truck and then up to the mixing area with the aid of a lift, minimizing the need for manual labor. The sacks are fed to the mud system through a sack slitting and processing machine to minimize manual handling by personnel. The mud mixing system shall also encompass a liquid mixing skid. A DEV supplied dust extraction system shall be installed by Builder at each hopper. This system consists of an enclosure, closed in on three sides. Exhaust ducting from each enclosure is led to a collection receptacle. An eyewash station and shower and personal protection equipment box is located at the mixing hopper area. The system shall have the ability to circulate mud from the mud pits through the mix hoppers and back to the mud pits. Additionally, each mud pit shall have a high-rate mixing facility capable of adding bulk material at up to 1,000 lbs./min directly into the mud pits. 17.4.3

Monitoring and Control System

The Builder furnished bulk monitoring and control system will be fully integrated within the drilling control system. The system shall comprise of three ruggedized control panels with touch sensitive screens. The stations will be located as follows:


Rev. 0

11



•

P-Tank Rooms

•

Cement Unit Room (Suitable for hazardous location)

•

Mixing Hopper area.

•

Driller’s control room

•

Engine room alarm and control panel

The screens will be housed in stainless steel enclosures which may be closed and sealed during periods of non-operation. The P-tank pressure and load (or content) sensor inputs will be wired to the nearest drilling control system input module. The valve limit switches will be wired to the nearest mud control system digital input module. The valve electro - pneumatic actuators will be wired to the nearest mud control system digital output module. The mud control system program will continuously monitor the control valves, P tank weight (or contents level) and pressure sensor inputs at a frequency of no less than one sample per second.

17.5

WELL CONTROL SYSTEM, CONTROL AND HANDLING 17.5.1

BOP Stack

Consists of one 18-3/4" BOP stack rated at 1034 bar with two double pipe preventer rams with one spool between the pipe rams and one 689 bar annular preventer. The BOP shall have two choke and two kill outlets. The BOP shall further be supplied with rams, as per Owners and Operator’s requirements, overshot, mandrels, conductor pipe from the BOP to the diverter, etc. Shear rams will be required to shear 5 ½” S-135, 38 ppf drill pipe. The stack will be complete with all rams and packers to be used for high temperature and sour gas applications. One BOP test pump, fit for 20,000 psi and one 18 ¾” stack; 15,000 psi test stump shall be provided and installed by the Builder. The Drilling Contractor (or Owner) shall verify the rating and design of the BOP stacks with the operator to ensure that the BOP stacks will match the drilling program for the unit. The BOP vendor shall furnish all required test stumps with mounting flanges, test pumps, controls, hoses, etc. 17.5.2

BOP Control System

Consisting of the BOP closing Unit and control manifold, 206.9 Bar WP with 3656.78 liter accumulators, 3 air pumps, reservoir, two 25 kW electric pump, control manifold, and remote control panels, or equal according to the latest API guidelines. The Builder shall allocate space for up to 4 banks of 15 bottles for system expansion. Controls are to be provided at the closing unit, driller’s cabin and toolpusher’s office. The BOP control unit shall basically be based upon the BOP type selected and there shall be remote controls in the toolpusher’s office and the Operator’s office, as well as the main control panels on the drill floor and the local controls near the BOP control unit. The accumulator shall be equipped with an air source from the cold start air compressor for emergency operation. In addition, the Builder shall equip the accumulator unit with a "low accumulator pressure" warning light and audio alarm with a secondary warning light located at the drillers console. 17.5.3

Fixed Diverter System

The diverter will consist of a Vetco-Gray KFDJ-500, Hydrill or equivalent diverter system housing and shall be 49 ½” nominal ID and rated at 500 psi working pressure with integrated Control Panel and remote control manifold with hydraulically operated valves. The system shall be permanently installed and recessed below the drill floor so that the 400 mm (16”) , 19.05 wall thickness piping is run port and starboard from the diverter in straight lines with no bends to the port and starboard extremes of the drill floor. All piping and valves shall be


Rev. 0

12



adequately supported to withstand the maximum forces that will be imposed while diverting a flowing well. The diverter configuration is to consist of: 1 x 16” flow line valve, 2 x 16” overboard line valves, 1 x 4” hole fill up valve, 1 x 8” annulus fill valve, 1 x 3” trip tank valve, 1 x 4” diverter testing valve. Diverter accessories: • Diverter assembly • Diverter Insert Packer, Nom. 22” bore, • Diverter Insert Packer, Nom. 17-3/4” bore • Diverter Insert Packer, Nom. 10” bore, • Overshot Spool Assembly • Overshot Packer Assembly, • Overshot Mandrel Assembly • Diverter running tool 17.5.4

Choke and Kill Manifold

The Choke & Kill manifold system, 15,000 psi working pressure, consists of: • • • • • • • • •

2 ea. 41/16” power choke with remote panel 2 ea. 41/16” adjustable chokes 41/16” bypass lines 2 ports for glycol injection 2 - Buffer Tanks (one 15,000 psi rated before the chokes, one 10,000 psi rated after the chokes. 1 - Control Panel for multiple gate valves for isolation and choke line-up. 4 each, 15,000 psi WP., 3 inch ID Coflon lined, -40 °F to 260 °F Coflexip hoses preferred two choke and two kill entries. Upper & Lower Choke & Kill lines. overboard line that bypasses the chokes and buffer tanks

The choke manifold design must allow for bypass of the MGS. The Builder will supply fine read out choke manifold gauge ranges of the 1,000 psi, 5,000 psi and 15,000 psi ranges. 17.5.5

Mud Gas Separator

The Mud Gas Separator (MGS) is connected to the choke manifold. When the mud enters the MGS, it passes over a series of baffles which promote the gas to break out and eventually discharge up through a Builder furnished and installed 300 NB (12”) vent line extending up the derrick from the MGS to above the crown. The liquid returns line taking the mud back to the surface system contains a 'U' tube arrangement which remains full of mud, thus providing a liquid mud seal which forces separated gas to exit through the 300 NB vent, thus preventing gas from migrating downstream to the mud processing area and ending up in the pits. To maintain the integrity of the mud seal an additional line shall be connected to the 'U' tube to enable freshly weighted mud to be regularly circulated through the tube. A secondary anti-syphon vent line shall be installed extending 13.75 m (45 ft.) up the derrick from the top of the 'U' tube. The height difference of the “U” tube shall be 6.0 m (20 ft.) with a minimum difference of 4.5 m (15 ft.). 17.5.7

BOP Handling and Service Cranes

The area between the cantilever beams and under the drill floor houses the BOP handling and storage system. This system will be supplied by F&G and installed by Builder. The main BOP handling system consists of a rail mounted hydraulic lifting crane which is located in the BOP area and which has the capability to move both forward and aft as well as transversely, port and starboard. The crane is designed to facilitate the landing, disconnection and transportation of a complete BOP assembly up to a maximum weight of 150 mt. from the well center to the test/storage skids located forward of the conductor tensioner platform. The crane consists of vertically telescoping forks which engage a specially designed lifting ring (also supplied by F&G) installed around the bottom of the annular preventer on the BOP. The unit does not have any means of determining the load being lifted, therefore, should only be used with known weights. Hydraulic supply to the trolley drive, bridge and six hydraulic lift cylinders on the forks is derived from the multi-purpose hydraulic unit located on the cantilever. If hydraulic pressure is lost all functional control is lost and its brake applied. Control of the unit is from a console located in the BOP area. The unit is only operated when in the jacked-up mode. When in the floating mode the unit is locked in the stowed position.


Rev. 0

13



Attached to the bridge crane are two 5 mt. air hoists which are controlled independently from push button pendant control boxes. These cranes are used to service the BOP(s) once in situ. In addition to the BOP handling system, the unit is also equipped with two (2) Ex proof electrically operated 17.5 mt. service bridge cranes which traverse the BOP test / storage area and is used for the service and maintenance of the BOP stacks. The BOP Service Cranes can operate independently or in tandem. Control of the crane is through a festooned, push button, pendant which allows for hoisting/lowering, trolley forward/reverse and port/starboard operations. The block is equipped with a maximum safety limit switch to prevent hoisting the block into the structure. Several devices are fitted to stop the trolley and bridge at their extreme limits of travel. The BOP storage and deployment are configured for a two stack system, though only a single stack system is initially employed; the second position can be utilized for well head construction. The BOP(s) are stowed on retractable storage skids in the test/stowage area. These skids are equipped with hydraulic rams which enable the BOPs to be skidded longitudinally from the stowed position to the moon pool so that the BOP handling system can latch and transport the BOPs to the well bore. BOP test stump(s) are permanently attached to the skids.

17.5.8

Conductor Tensioning Unit

For deepwater operation, the unit is capable of applying a primary vertical tension to the conductor pipe up to 272.1 mt. at any position of the cantilever and substructure and up to 136 mt. secondary tension to the BOP stack. Supported on a structural platform (Conductor Tensioner Platform) hung from and below the cantilever, the Conductor Tensioning Unit (CTU), consisting of four pairs of hydraulic cylinders driving a lift ring assembly which reacts against a load collar attached to the conductor pipe to apply tension. The CTU is also designed to slide transversely 4572 mm either side of the hull centerline and is locked in place (in 150 mm increments) to accommodate any drilling position within the range of the transverse drill floor movement. Consistent and balanced load is assured by hydraulic accumulators serving opposite pairs of cylinders. Each bank can be independently adjusted. The CTU cylinders have a maximum 600 mm stroke so changes in the length of the conductor pipe due to temperature fluctuation and lateral motion of the conductor from wave or current action are automatically accommodated. Monitoring and control of the system is through a control panel. The system incorporates several isolation valves, each accumulator bottle can be isolated individually and the system can be isolated from the power pack. The support platform itself is totally enclosed and can be raised and lowered vertically and secured to allow the cantilever to be retracted all the way forward for transit mode. In order to raise and lower the platform, a special tool attached to a length of drill pipe which is hung from the top drive and latches into the center of the CTU base. Lateral support to the BOP is provided by four 10 mt. deck winches mounted in the corners of the cellar deck with the wire led through fairleaders. The CTU and CTP will both be supplied by the DEV and installed by the Builder. 17.5.9

Secondary Tensioning System

The unit is equipped with a secondary tensioning system which, if it is intended, will support the weight of the BOP stack, thus reducing stress loading on the riser. The system consists of four 34 mt. x 900 mm stroke hydraulic rams which are suspended from pad eyes mounted beneath the rotary table and attached to the BOP stack. Hydraulic power is supplied from the multipurpose hydraulic power pack. The system also has independent accumulators fitted.

17.6

WELL TEST SYSTEM

A fixed well test piping system shall be provided. A single high pressure (75 mm x 690 bar) (3” x 10,000 psi) line shall be run from the drill floor to the well test area on main deck. This run will include the standpipe and gooseneck at the drill floor, jumper hoses between drill floor / cantilever, and cantilever / main deck. The system and all its components shall be suitable for H2S service.


Rev. 0

14



From the well test manifold, a 150 mm x 100 bar (6” x 1500 psi) line to and 100 mm and 150 mm x 100 bar (oil and gas) lines from a test separator position will be provided (separator to be supplied by the testing service company). The 100 and 150 mm, 100 bar rated oil and gas test lines shall be run to a transverse distribution header along the transom between the port and starboard burner boom locations. Sufficient valves shall be provided to allow selective discharge between port or starboard and provide complete isolation. All connections to hoses or test area shall be of the hammer union type. A 100 mm airline shall run port to starboard along the transom, to allow a third party air compressor on either side of the deck, to provide air to the flaring operation. This airline shall never be connected into the service air system.


Rev. 0

15


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 18.0 - EQUIPMENT LIST .......................................................................................................... 2 18.1 GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................2


SECTION 18.0 - EQUIPMENT LIST 18.1

GENERAL

This section describes the major equipment to be installed on the Vessel and designates which items shall be provided by the Owner (OFE), purchased from Friede & Goldman, Ltd. (F&G), and provided by the Builder (BFE). Any and all equipment and material not specifically identified in the Equipment List (Table 18.1) as being OFE or F&G supplied shall be considered to be BFE, and it is the Builder’s responsibility to furnish all materials (including, but not limited to, foundations, fittings, cables, piping, etc.) necessary to complete the Vessel as described in these Specifications. The only equipment and materials which will be supplied by the Owner or F&G to the Builder are those which are specifically identified in Table 18.1. The Builder shall accept, store, preserve and install all OFE and F&G specified equipment herein and shall provide any other materials required to make a complete installation. Loose items (such as drill pipe, tools, etc.) listed herein shall be loaded on board the Vessel by the Builder into stowage locations as directed by the Owner. The Builder may procure the BFE from any of the manufacturers named in Table 18.1, subject to final approval by the Owner within seven days from date of submission to the Owner. The Owner’s approval shall not be withheld for any Builder’s equipment which is of good marine quality, designed for the service intended, in compliance with these Specifications and the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies, and having service and spare parts readily available on an international basis. Where the term “or equivalent” is used in Table 18.1, it shall be understood to mean that equipment of equivalent specification and quality to that listed, but manufactured by a maker not on the approved list, may be substituted by the Builder subject to Owner’s approval.


Rev. 0

2

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C Table 18.1 EQUIPMENT LIST ITEM 01 02 03

04 05

DESCRIPTION 1.0 MECHANICAL Air-conditioning system complete with ducting Air receivers BOP handling system A. 150 mt. BOP handling bridge crane and associated accessories B. 30 mt. BOP service crane and associated accessories C. BOP stack lifting rings Cold room equipment Compressors A. cold start air compressor mechanical driven

1 S/S

Saboro, Daikin, Carrier or Equivalent

6

X X

1 2 1 S/S

X

X

Do

D. bulk air reducing/flow control system

1

Do

3

(3) 75 tons @ 25 ft Liebherr, Seatrax, Dreco or Equivalent

B. emergency generator set C. engine radiator D. Amot valves E. Spark arresting silencers, Flex connections, etc. Hoist A. air and hydraulic hoist for drill floor, cellar deck, cantilever and other areas B. air hoist for towing bridle

1

Daikin, Carrier, or Saboro or Equivalent

2

Generator set A. main engine/generator sets

OFE

X

1

C. air dryer

07

F&G

X

3

A. deck cranes, electro hydraulic with 120 ft booms, load monitoring and alarm B. Knuckle boom pipe handling crane A. Eductor - tank stripping B. Eductor – spud can stripping A. Flow meter (fuel oil, base oil) B. Potable water

10

BFE

B. service air compressor with sequence module, acoustic enclosures, cooling packages

Cranes

09

MAKE

Ingersoll-Rand, Gardner Denver, Atlas Copco or Equivalent Do

06

08

QTY.

1 2 3 2 2

6 1 5 5 1 LOT

1 LOT

2


X

X

X

X

X

X X

Hydralift, F&G, Aker Solutions, or Equivalent Elle-Hammer, Golar, Vita or Equivalent Oval, Brooks, Fisher or Equivalent Oval, Brooks, Fisher or Equivalent Caterpillar, Wartsila, MAN, Bergen Caterpillar, Wartsila, MAN Hunt, O&M Amot or Equivalent Caterpillar, Wartsila, Bergan, MAN

X

X X

X X

X X X X X

Ingersoll-Rand, Thern or Equivalent

X

Do

X

Rev. 0

3

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C Table 18.1 EQUIPMENT LIST ITEM

11 12 13 14

DESCRIPTION C. manual/elect chain hoist c/w trolley and rails Helicopter refueling system c/w quick release platforms Water heater

QTY. 1 LOT

A. Jacking system B. Rack Chock System Mooring equipment A. anchor 7,500 kg c/w pelican hook B. anchor buoy C. anchor rack D. towing bridle (complete assembly) E. towing pads F. anchor winch, single drum c/w load monitoring system G. anchor wire (51 mm dia, 6 x 36 IWRC, EIPS galvanized) with closed spelter socket at one end & Baldt No. 7 shackle H. pennants and fittings I. mooring lines, chains, and shackles J. emergency tow line (complete) K. towline recovery winch and line c/w snatch blocks L. deck turning sheaves

1 S/S 1 S/S

M. swivel fairleader

15

16

1 SET 3

4 5 1 S/S 1 SET 1 LOT 4

MAKE Nitchi, Kito, Toku or Equivalent Hunting, Helifuel, Specific or Equivalent Spartan Hot Water, Rheem, CTC or Equivalent F&G F&G

BFE X

F&G

OFE

X X X X

Flipper Delta, STEVPRIS

X X

Builder

X X

Builder SAS, BLM, AMClyde, Rolls-Royce or Equivalent

X X

4x 914m

X

1 LOT 4

X X

1 SET

X

2

X

4 4

N. deck fittings Oily water separator (bilge, contaminated drains, clean drains), c/w two monitors and two recorders Pumps A. bilge/preload/stripping pump

1 S/S 1

B. drill water/emergency fire pump/genl service C. fire pump D. drill water pump E. foam/deluge pump F. dirty oil pump

1 2 1 1 1

G. diesel oil service pump H. fuel oil transfer pump J. hot water circulation pump

1 2 2

2


Smith Berger, Crosby, American Block, SAS Smith Berger, Crosby, American Block, SAS Builder Heli-Sep, Sigma, Jowa, Rwo or Equivalent

Hamworthy, Allweiler, Taiko, Desmi or Equivalent Do Do Do Do Allweiler, Viking, Blackmer, Taiko or Equivalent Do Do Allweiler, Specific, Dean Brothers or Equivalent

Rev. 0

X X X X

X

X X X X X

X X X

4


17

18

19

20

21

DESCRIPTION K. raw water pump

L. pre-load pump M. fire jockey pump N. sewage transf. Pump O. waste mud pump P. waste pump Purifier A. fuel oil purifier non-self cleaning type B. fuel oil coolers Pressure set A. sanitary pressure set

QTY. 3

1 1 1 1 1

MAKE Pleuger, Johnston, Peerless, Reda, Thomson K&L, S&N or Equivalent Do Do WILDEN WILDEN WILDEN

2

Alfa-Laval

2

Alfa-Laval

F&G

X

X X X X

B. potable water pressure set Rig skidding system

1 SET

A. Cantilever (longitudinal) c/w Hilman Rollers and Fabreeka pads

1 SET

F&G

X

1 SET

F&G

X

1 1

1 S/S

X

X

EVAC or Equivalent Omni-Pure, Triqua or Equivalent

X

Hartzell, Woods or Equivalent

X

1 S/S

OFE X

X X

Allweiler, Specific Offshore, Speck or Equivalent Do

B. Drill floor (transverse) lift & roll system A. Vacuum collection system B. Sewage treatment plant for 120 men Ventilation system A. ventilation fans system c/w cowls & trunking B. fire dampers

1 SET

BFE

X

X SGL Systems Ltd or Equivalent

22

23

24

Workshop equipment A. lathe B. grinder C. pipe threading machine D. power hacksaw E. hydraulic press F. universal milling machine G. welding machines H. drill press I. Hydraulic hose crimping machine Water maker A. R.O. Type B. UV purifier & de-ionizer filter Conductor tensioning system A. split primary conductor tensioning unit B. secondary conductor tensioning system

1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1

2

X X X X X X Lincoln, Hobart. Miller X X

Alfa-Laval, MECO or Equivalent

1

1 S/S

X

X X

4

F&G, Bardex or Equivalent DO


Rev. 0

X X

5


25

DESCRIPTION C. conductor tensioning platform Disposal equipment A. Trash compactor B. Incinerator

26

QTY. 1

1 1

X

1 S/S

Builder (stainless steel tubing / fittings) Sebie Gorman or Equivalent Champion, Alimak or equivalent

X

1 S/S 2

28

Hydraulic Power Unit, For BOP Handling Crane Hydraulic power unit – cantilever skidding system Dump valve power packs Forklift truck & battery charger Handtools for mechanic, electrician and driller c/w storage cabinets 2.0 DRILLING EQUIPMENT A. Bulk mud & cement tanks, including 8 x P-tanks, and all accessories, valves, fittings, etc. B. Surge tanks & mixing hoppers w/accessories, valves, fittings, etc. 18-3/4" x 15,000 psi BOP, c/w drilling spools, adaptors, wing valves, test stump, etc. BOP/diverter control equipment c/w pumps, accumulators, and test panel Bug blower

1

01

02

03

04 05

06

07 08

OFE

X

Mako, Cascade, Bauer

Personnel elevators

32

F&G

X

1

27

30 31

Max INTL, Enviro-Pak or Equivalent TEAMTEC, ATLAS OR EQUIVALENT

BFE X

H2S breathing air system A. H2S breathing system compressors & storage cylinders B. H2S distribution pipe & fittings C. breathing masks

29

MAKE Builder – F&G Design

Drawworks 4000 hp, c/w disk brake, motors, and cooling blowers, etc. Derrick and accessories, 2,000,000 lbs, 170' x 40' x 40’, with 907 mt. crown block & 300 NB vent line Hoisting and rotary equipment, hook/block (680 mt.) Diverter, 49½" x 500 psi, KFDJ fixed type

X X X

1 2 1 3

1 S/S

3

X X Caterpillar, Crown or equivalent Snap-On, Matco, etc.

BJ Services / Dowell / Halliburton/ Technic Offshore / Step Offshore or Equivalent Do

X X

X

X

1 S/S

NL Shaffer, Cameron, Hydril or Equivalent

X

1 S/S

Koomey, Cameron, NL Shaffer, Hydril or Equivalent Eldridge, Hurricane, or Equivalent NOV, Aker Solutions or Equivalent

X

Dreco, MH-Pyramid, Loadmaster, or Equivalent

X

NOV, Dreco, Aker Solutions or Equivalent VETCO-Gray or Equivalent

X

2 1

1

1 LOT 1


Rev. 0

X X

X

6


12 13 14

15

16

17 18

DESCRIPTION Overboard valves Casing stabbing basket Drillers cabin, c/w drilling instrumentation console, drilling equipment controls, data acquisition system, etc. Drill string, consisting of drill pipe, collars, and accessories Fishing tools Drill pipe / casing handling tools and equipment (slips, power torque wrench, tongs, c/w torque indicating system, elevators, spiders, links, clamps, subs, etc. HP mud and cement systems 1. HP hoses for HP cement, choke and kill, BOP and diverter control, including fittings, valves, accessories, etc. 2. 7,500 psi valves for HP mud system 3. 15,000 psi valves for HP cement system 4. 6.75 in OD x 5 in ID alloy steel tubing for HP mud system 5. 5.5 in OD x 4 in ID alloy steel tubing for HP cement system 6. HP mud rotary hose 3” x 75’ c/w safety chain Mud, standpipe manifold c/w goose neck(s), 7500 psi gate valves & pressure sensors Mud lab equipment Solids control equipment 1. agitators and high rate mixers 2. shale shakers, dual gumbo shaker and five shakers 3. degasser

QTY. 2 1 1

MAKE VETCO-Gray or Equivalent F&G M/D-TOTCO, Rigserv, Aker Solutions, or Equivalent

BFE

F&G

OFE X

X X

1 LOT

GRANT PRIDECO

X

1 LOT 1 LOT

NOV, B&V, or Equivalent

X X

1 LOT

World Rig Supply, Contitech-Beattie, Copper States or Equivalent

X

1 LOT

X

1 LOT

Demco, ANSON, NOV, T3 Halliburton, FMC, Control Flow, T3 AISI 4130

1 LOT

AISI 4130

X

1 LOT

2

X X

X

1

Coflexip, ContitechBeattie, Copper States Anson or Equivalent

1

Baroid or Equivalent

X

Brandt, ITT Flygt, Fluid Systems, Inc or Equivalent Swaco, Brandt, Thule, Derrick or Equivalent Burgess, Brandt or Equivalent Swaco, Brandt, Thule, NOV, Derrick or Equivalent DO

X

1 LOT 5 2

4. mud cleaner / de-silter

1

5. De-sander 6. mud processing pumps: A. de-silter pump,

1 1

B. de-sander pump

1


HALCO, Mission or Equivalent HALCO, Mission or Equivalent

Rev. 0

X

X X X

X X X

7


DESCRIPTION C. mud mixing pump D. trip tank pump

2

E. shear pump

1

7. mud guns

19 20

22

23

24 25 26 27 28 29 30

QTY. 2

1 LOT

8. mud charging pump

3

9. base oil pump

2

10. brine pump

1

11. Skip and Ship cuttings collection and transfer system and/or re-injection system Mud gas separator Sack cutting system and material conveyance system (sack cutter, conveyor, vaclift and jib crane, mixing eductor) Rotary table, 49½" with hydraulic drive, brake and bushings Mud pumps, 2200 hp, with motors, blower assemblies, pulsation dampeners, attached oil pumps, seawater heat exchangers, and accessories Wireline measuring unit Cementing unit, surge tank and accessories Mud logging unit with tool house Well logging unit Well test equipment c/w burner boom Misc. Drilling equipment Top drive, 680 mt.

1 LOT

1 1

BFE

F&G

OFE X X X X

X X X

X Palamatic , Step Offshore or Equivalent

1

Varco BJ, NOV, Aker Solutions or Equivalent

X

3

NOV, Aker Solutions or Equivalent

X

1 1

Mathey or Equivalent Third Party

X X

1

Third Party

X

1 1 LOT

Third Party Third Party

X X

1 LOT 1

31

Powered drill line wire reel c/w 7500’ drill line

1

32

Multi-purpose hydraulic power pack c/w distribution/regulation manifold for drill floor & drill floor skidding. Optional for powering SPHS® Dead line anchor

1

33

MAKE HALCO, Mission or Equivalent HALCO, Mission or Equivalent HALCO, Mission or Equivalent HALCO, Demco, Swaco, Brandt, Fluid Systems, Inc or Equivalent HALCO, Mission or Equivalent HALCO, Mission or Equivalent HALCO, Mission or Equivalent NOV, Brandt, Aker Solutions, etc.

1


NOV, Aker Solutions or Equivalent NOV, AKER SOLUTIONS OR EQUIVALENT Bardex, NOV, Aker Solutions or Equivalent

NOV, Aker Solutionsor Equivalent

Rev. 0

X X X

X

X

8

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C Table 18.1 EQUIPMENT LIST ITEM 35 36 37 38 40

41

42 43 44 45 46

47

48

01 02

03 04

05

06

07 08

DESCRIPTION Energy absorbing panels for drill floor Simultaneous Pipe Handling System (SPHS®) P-tank weighting system display panels Pipe racking system

QTY. 1 LOT

Drawworks brake water cooling system, including pumps, heat exchangers, and monitoring system Drill floor/derrick video camera system. Monitors integrated into drillers cabin. Hydraulic catheads

1

F&G

OFE

F&G

3

Step Offshore, NOV, MD/Totco or Equivalent F&G, NOV, Aker Solutions Baylor

X

Hernis or Equivalent

X

Varco BJ, Drilco, Aker Solutions or Equivalent

X

1

1 LOT

2 1 LOT 2 2 1 S/S

Battery charger for emergency generator Cables A. AC power and control, lighting B. BOP control cable Combustible gas and H2S detection and alarm system

1 LOT

B. exit lights Emergency shutdown system, six stations Entertainment system 2 X 685mm Color CTV, 2 X VCR, 1 X CATV TV outlets required 2 x hi-fi

BFE X

1

Anti-freezing jetting unit Centrifuge Centrifuge pumps Choke and kill manifold (15,000 psi WP) with 300 NB vent line & control panel Cement, standpipe manifold c/w goose neck(s), 15000 psi gate valves & pressure sensors Iron Roughneck, hydraulic rotary, hydraulic catheads, etc. 3.0 ELECTRICAL Batteries for emergency generator and radio equipment Battery charger for radio equipment

Emergency lighting A. emergency fluorescent lantern (battery operated)

MAKE Builder

1

X

1 LOT

Safnife, Chloride GS or Equivalent Lamarche, Chloride, Autronica, Benning or Equivalent DO

1 LOT 1

1 LOT

1 LOT 1 LOT

1


X X X X

Step Offshore, T3, ANSON, WOM or Equivalent Step Offshore, ANSON, WOM or Equivalent NOV, Aker Solutions or Equivalent

1 LOT

X

Brandt or equivalent

1 LOT

1 LOT

X

X

X

X X

X

ABB, STK, BIW, Norsk, Tiger, Draka or Equivalent Sieger, Drager, DI, Mine Safety Autronica, or Equivalent ABB/AQUA Signal Teledyne, Chloride, Saunders-Roe, Betalight, Saft or Equivalent Do ABB

Hitachi, Sony, JVC, Naval, Elcon or Equivalent

Rev. 0

X X X

X

X X

X

9


12

DESCRIPTION Fire alarm system including smoke detection system Hospital call system Intercommunication system A. combined telephone / public address system

B. drilling communication system C. Sound powered telephone system Lighting A. berth/desk/mirror light B. fluorescent light EP for hazardous areas C. fluorescent light WT for machinery spaces D. fluorescent light NWT for accommodation spaces E. fluorescent light (with safety lanyards) and flood light EP for derrick and drill floor F. floodlights - 400W metal halide G. incandescent lights

13

14

Alarm panels A. Ventilation alarm system B. Engine alarm panel C. Sprinkler & CO2 Alarm panels D. Misc. alarm slave panels Navigation equipment A. Gyro compass B. Echo sounder C. Magnetic compass D. Nautical instruments including: Fog bell Foghorn, mech operated Inclinometer Barometer Thermometer Clocks, battery operated Megaphone C. Obstruction light and foghorn system D. Wind speed & direction indicator & recorder E. Wave height monitoring system and recorder

QTY. 1

MAKE AFA Minorva, Autronica, Salwico, MK or Equivalent

1 1

BFE X

X

1 LOT

GAITRONICS

X

1 LOT

X

1 LOT

Glamox, A&S, IRA or Equivalent Rig-A-Lite, ABB or Equivalent Do

X

1 LOT

Do

X

1 LOT

Rig-A-Lite, ABB or Equivalent

X

1 LOT

A&S, Rig-A-Lite, Philips or Equivalent Wiska, Kokosha, Karldose or Equivalent

X

1 LOT

1 LOT

1 6 2

EFC OR EQUIVALENT

X

X

X

X X X

1 LOT

X

1 1 1

X X X

1 1

X X

1 1 1 1 LOT

X X

1 1 1


OFE

X Vingtor, Phonico, SPT/Gaitronics, EB Communication or Equivalent GAITRONICS

1

F&G

X X

Automatic-Power, Orga, Penwalt or Equivalent GILL, EFC

X X X X

Rev. 0

10


15

16

17

18

DESCRIPTION F. Weather facsimile

QTY. 1

MAKE Tideland, Tranberg, AGA or Equivalent

BFE X

3

Tideland, Orga, Tranberg, AGA or Equivalent ORGA

X

Navigation obstruction lights A. Aircraft warning light for legs (self-contained) B. Derrick, crown and structure aircraft warning light C. Crane boom aircraft warning light fitted to boom tips D. helideck perimeter light

1 LOT

E. navigation lanterns

1 LOT

Panels A. electrician test panel

B. lighting panels 400/230 V C. navigation lighting control panel D. power panels 480 V (wallmounted) E. shore supply panel Receptacles A. receptacles flame-proof B. receptacles WT C. receptacles NWT Radio communication equipment including: A. Furuno Inmarsat-B Ship Earth Station, Class I, GMDSS System Complete. B. Facsimile. C. Uninterruptible Power Supply. D. ACR brand VHF Submersible Survival Radio. E. ACR SmartSart Radar Transponder. F. Sea Shelter 406 Fiberglass Container for Auto EPIRB Deployment. G. EPIRB - Satellite 406 for GMDSS. H. Navtex 518khz Receiver / Printer. I. VHF & HF (SSB) To Meet Inmarsat Area A3. Housed In Console MRU-2001. J. Antennas For VHF Radios. K. Base and Support Mounts For Item (J).

1 SET 3

ORGA

X

X

X

1 LOT 2

Terasaki, LK-NES, Square ‘D’, Appleton, ABB or Equivalent Do Do

X X

1 LOT

Do

X

1

Do

X

ABB or Equivalent Do Pauluhn, Clipsal, Elko, Hubell, MK or Equivalent

X X X

1

Radio Holland

X

1 1

DO DO

X

3

DO

X

4

DO

X

1

DO

X

1

DO

X

1

DO

X

1 LOT

DO

X

2 2

DO DO

X X

1 LOT 1 LOT 1 LOT


OFE

X

Halophane, Orga, Pauluhn, Tranberg or Equivalent A&S, Orga, Tranberg or Equivalent

1

F&G

X

X

Rev. 0

11


19 20

DESCRIPTION l. SEA Brand Antenna For Watch Receiver. M. Shakespeare 222 35 Foot Antenna With Mount. N. ICOM Aircraft Base Radio Mount Transceiver, VHF-AM, With Power Supply. O. STANDARD HANDHELD VHF-FM RADIOS; SPARE BATTERIES; CHARGERS; CASES; SPEAKER/MICROPHONE. P. STANDARD HANDHELD UHF-FM RADIOS; SPARE BATTERIES; GANG CHARGER; CASES; SPEAKER/MICROPHONE. Q. ICOM VHF-AM 760 Frequency Aircraft Transceiver R. Desktop charger. S. Furuno Fax214 355mm Weather Facsimile, Complete With Antenna. T. Southern Avionics NonDirectional Aircraft Beacon, Complete With Antenna. U. Longwire Helipad Antenna. V. Standard Omni Mobile VHF-FM Crane Radio Telephones, With Power Supply, Hailer, and Antenna. W. Standard Omni Mobile VHF-FM Office Radio Telephones, With Power Supply, Base Station Microphones, and Antenna. Refrigeration space alarm system Switchboard A. Switchboard 690 V for generator control and distribution system B. AC drilling motors C. Distribution MCC 480V

QTY. 2

MAKE DO

BFE X

F&G

OFE

1

DO

X

1

DO

X

6

DO

X

6

DO

X

2

DO

X

2 1

DO DO

X X

1

DO

X

1 3

DO DO

X X

3

DO

X

1

Builder

X

1

ABB, Siemens, NOV, OEM

X

GE, ABB, OEM Siemens, Allen Bradley, GE Siemens, Allen Bradley, GE

X X

11 1 LOT

D. Emergency switchboard & distribution center 480 V and 220 V E. Ventilation MCC F. 220 V distribution center

1 LOT 1

G. Drilling VFD system

1 LOT

1


X

X LK-NES, Terasaki, ABB Westinghouse or Equivalent SIEMENS, ABB, NOV, OEM, CONVERTEAM

Rev. 0

X

X

12

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C Table 18.1 EQUIPMENT LIST ITEM 21

QTY. 1

MAKE INSTRUMECH, LK-NES, Dial, Norcontrol, KDG, EFC or Equivalent

BFE X

Switches A. Switches flame-proof

1 LOT

X

B. Switches WT C. Switches NWT

1 LOT 1 LOT

24

Start/stop push-button station

1 LOT

ABB, Pauluhn, Karldose, Wiska Or Equivalent Do ABB, Pauluhn, Clipsal, Elko, MK or Equivalent ABB, Telemech, Appleton, Allen Bradley, Sq ‘D’ or Equivalent

25

Transformers A. 3-Phase 4000 kVA 690/690/690 V B. 3-Phase 2000 kVA 690/480 V (Normal) C. 3-Phase 125 kVA 480/220V (Emergency) D. Isolation/filtration transformers 10 kVA E. 3-PHASE 225 kVA 480/220 V F. 3-PHASE 75 kW, 480/220 V (heat trace) G. 1-PHASE 22.5 kVA 480/220V Wireway A. Cable ladders, straps B. Cable glands

22

26

27 28 29

30 31 32 01

DESCRIPTION Tank remote valve control console/tank gauging system

2 2 1 2 1 2 1

A/R A/R

X

X X X X

Noratel, Transfor, or Equilalent, Noratel, Transfor, or Equilalent, GE, or Equilalent,

X X X

X X

C. Cable lugs D. Multi-cable transits and sealing E. Steel material, hardware, pipe conduits F. Terminals, sleeving insulation Welding outlets

A/R A/R

ROX, BRATTBERG

X X

A/R

Builder

X

A/R

WEIDMUELLER

X

SCHUKO, ESAB or Equivalent

X

AC/DC converter for helicopter Computers A. Warehouse PC B. Other PC computers Cantilever & drill floor drag chains Distributed control system Heat tracing system 4.0 OUTFITTING Doors – watertight and weather tight

1

8

X

1 LOT 1 LOT 2

HP/DELL, LENOVO HP/DELL, LENOVO

1 S/S 1 S/S

EFC RAYCHEM

X X

1 S/S

BUILDER

X


OFE

X X

Noratel, Trasfor,Trafotek, or Equilalent, Noratel, Trasfor, or Equilalent, Noratel, Trasfor, or Equilalent, GE, or Equilalent,

Builder Hawke/BICC or Equivalent

F&G

X X X

Rev. 0

13

FRIEDE & GOLDMAN, LTD. BASED ON JOB #032-11 REV.C Table 18.1 EQUIPMENT LIST ITEM 02

DESCRIPTION Ceiling system with noncombustible material for cabin and galley areas

QTY. 1 LOT

03

Doors (joiner) for cabin, private toilet and shower including all hardware

1 LOT

04

Furniture (interior) for cabins, offices and other related areas Sanitary fixtures for toilet, shower and change room Flooring covering comprised of latex underlayment with vinyl tile finish and ceramic tile of wet areas

1 LOT

05 06

07

08

Quarters materials / trim Finishing / installation materials Adhesives - various Grout - various Installation kits - various Paints - wall finish Paints - special trim, various Trim pieces - various Fire-fighting equipment A. breathing apparatus (SCBA) B. first-aid kits (for number of men on board) C. fireman’s outfit c/w selfcontained breathing apparatus D. portable fire extinguisher w/spares E. Fixed water mist system

09

1 LOT 1 LOT

F&G

OFE

X

X TRITON, INA, TOTO OR EQUIVALENT POLYSPEC, DEX-OTEX, DURASTIC, YATOMIX, SEMTEX, SELBY OR EQUIVALENT

X X

1 S/S 1 S/S 1 S/S 1 S/S 1 S/S 1 S/S

6

Scott, MSA or Equivalent

1 LOT 1 LOT

1 LOT 1 LOT

3

B. deep fat fryer

1

C. dishwasher

1

E. electric hot food table F. electric range c/w back shelf broiler & oven under G. electric range c/w griddle top & oven under

BFE X

X X

Galley equipment A. coffee urn / Hot water dispenser

D. drinking fountain

MAKE DAMPA, TNF SYSTEM, STOCKFORS, ISOLAMIN OR EQUIVALENT ISOLAMIN, ALVENDOR, SUNG-MI, BAGGRROD, MOMEK OR EQUIVALENT

1 LOT

1 1 1


X X

Bristol, Maregaurd, Survivair, Scotts, Aga Or Equivalent Ansul, Ajax, AGA Or Equivalent Fogtec, Tyco, DanfossSemco or Equivalent Enterprice, Aluminox, Everhot, Swan Or Equivalent Hobart, Metos, Elframo, MKN Or Equivalent Hobart, Metos, Wexidisk Or Equivalent Marshal, Metos, Frigeria, Halsey Taylor, Elkay Or Equivalent Hobart, Metos, Aluminox, Beha Or Equivalent Hobart, Metos, Aluminox, Beha Or Equivalent

Rev. 0

X

X X

X

X X X

X X X

14


DESCRIPTION H. food mixer – multifunction I. freezer 0.6 cu.m.

J. ice-cube machine

1

K. meat block L. meat slicer

1 1

M. milk dispenser

1

N. refrigerator 0.6 cu.m.

1

O. refrigerator 0.2 cu.m.

1

P. S/S furniture and work table Q. soft ice-cream machine

10

11

12

QTY. 1

1 LOT 1

R. toaster 4-slot

1

S. potato peeler

1

T. beverage dispenser U. Steam cooker V. garbage disposal W. Can opener Insulation system A. fire insulation

2 1 1 1 1 LOT

B. thermal insulation

1 LOT

Laundry equipment A. two compartment laundry tub c/w accessories B. electric dryer, 25 Kg/load, Heavy Duty C. electric clothes washer, 20 Kg/load, Heavy Duty D. electric clothes washer, 7 Kg/load, Normal Duty E. electric clothes dryer, 7 Kg/load, Normal Duty Life-saving equipment A. covered life boat c/w launching davit B. line throwing apparatus C. life preserver c/w yard whistle and reflector lights

MAKE Hobart, Bear, Aluminox, Univex Or Equivalent Hobart, Metos, Microclimate, Foster Or Equivalent Scotman, Kold Draft, Crystal Tips, Whirlpool Or Equivalent Builder Hobart, Metos, Univex, Beha Or Equivalent Norris, Metos Or Equivalent Hobart, Metos, Microclimate, Foster Or Equivalent Hobart, Metos, Microclimate, Foster Or Equivalent Builder

BFE X

Taylor, Glacier, Electro Freeze Or Equivalent Rowlett, Dualit, Hobart, MKN Or Equivalent Hobart, Metos, Crypto Or Equivalent Jetspray or Equivalent Market Forge Red Goat EDLUND

X

Rockwool, Lapinus, Rockfine Or Equivalent Paramount, Asahi Or Equivalent

2 2

3 2 2

3

OFE

X

X

X X X X

X

X

X X X X X X X X

X American, Wascator, Ispo, Miele, AEG, Electrolux Or Equivalent Ispo, Miele, AEG, Electrolux Or Equivalent Maytag, Electrolux or Equivalent Maytag, Electrolux or Equivalent

X

Fassmer, BEIHAI, Norsafe or Equivalent

X

1 1 LOT


F&G

X X X

X X

Rev. 0

15


DESCRIPTION D. life buoys w/provision for self-ignition lights smoke signal c/w bks. E. 25-man inflatable life-rafts, self-inflating, davit launched (with cradles and 2 davits) F. personnel landing net G. stretcher H. embarkation ladders, rope or lightweight chain I. rocket parachute flares Paneling system

QTY. 1 LOT

14

Steel shelving for storage area inside quarters area

1 LOT

15

Windows fixed including side scuttles

1 LOT

16

Cathodic protection A. Leg/spud cans/sea chest B. Seawater lines, raw water discharge at pump towers. 5.0 PIPING Fittings and pipes Valves A. General valves

13

01 02

03

04

05

BFE X

1 LOT

X

1 LOT 2 4

X X

12 1 LOT

Stockfors, TNF System, Isolamin, Aker Or Equivalent Electrolux, Dexion, Teck, Chaing, Rhino Or Equivalent Kokosha, Hock Seng, Marita, Bannor Or Equivalent

X

X

X X

1 LOT

Builder

X

1 LOT

Toyo, Kitz, Lunkenheimer, Nibco, Stockham Or Equivalent Keystone, Bray, Centreline, Demco Or Equivalent Pre-Vac, Winel Or Equivalent

X

Fogtec, Tyco, DanfossSEMCO or equivalent Hunting, Unitor, Angus, Total Walther Or Equivalent KDG, Nor-Control Or Equivalent

X

C. Vent check valves

1 LOT

Fire-fighting A. WATER MIST

1 LOT

B. Foam (to be AFFF type) 3% conc.

1 LOT

C. Tank gauging system

1 LOT

X

X

X

X

1 LOT

X

1 LOT

X

1 LOT

X

1 LOT 1 LOT


OFE

X X

Builder CATHECO, Blume

1 LOT

F&G

X

1 LOT 4

B. Butterfly valves

Insulation A. Calcium silicate insulation for exhaust B. Molded insulation for hot water & anti-sweat High pressure cement, choke and kill, and BOP (15,000 psi) A. Valves, hoses and accessories B. Pipe, fittings – 100 NB cement

MAKE

Beattie, Copperstate, WOM or equivalent ANSON

Rev. 0

X X

16


06

07

DESCRIPTION C. Pipe, fittings - all other sizes High pressure mud A. Fittings and valves

QTY. 1 LOT

MAKE ANSON

1 LOT

B. Pipe – 125 NB bore C. Pipe - all other sizes Other piping A. loading hoses

1 LOT 1 LOT

WOM, Beattie, Copperstate ANSON ANSON

1 S/S

B. Cantilever skimmer discharge hose and coupling

1

C. Jetting line H.P. & L.P. hoses

1 S/S


COPPER STATES, DUNLOP Or Equivalent CONTITECH-BEATTIE, COPPER STATES OR EQUIVALENT World Rig Supply, Contitech-Beattie, Copper States or Equivalent

Rev. 0

BFE X

F&G

OFE

X X X X X

X

17

JACK-UP Specification.pdf

Recommend Documents